*TM 10-7310-281-13&P 

TECHNICAL MANUAL 

OPERATOR AND FIELD MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INCLUDING REPAIR PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS LIST 

FOR 

MODERN BURNER UNIT (MBU) 

NSN 7310-01-452-8137 

MODERN BURNER UNIT (MBU-V3) 

NSN 7310-01-507-9310 

* This manual supersedes TM 10-7310-281-13&P, 31 July 2004, including all changes. 

DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT A – Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited. 

HEADQUARTERS, DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY 

17 MAY 2010 

 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 

a 

WARNING SUMMARY 

This warning summary contains general safety warnings and hazardous materials warnings that must be 

understood and applied during operation and maintenance of this equipment. Failure to observe these 

precautions could result in serious injury or death to personnel. Also included are explanations of safety 

and hazardous material icons used in the technical manual. For first aid treatment, refer to FM 4-25.11. 

EXPLANATION OF SAFETY WARNING ICONS 

ELECTRICAL - electrical wire to arm with electricity symbol running through human body 

shows that shock hazard is present. 

EXPLOSION - rapidly expanding symbol shows that the material may explode if subjected 

to high temperatures, sources of ignition, or high pressure. 

FIRE - flame shows that a material may ignite and cause burns. 

HEAVY OBJECT - human figure stooping over heavy object shows physical injury 

potential from improper lifting technique. 

HOT AREA – hand over object radiating heat shows that part is hot and can burn. 

VAPOR - human figure in a cloud shows that material vapors present a danger to life or 

health.
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 

b 

GENERAL SAFETY WARNINGS DESCRIPTION 

WARNING 

Exercise extreme care when destroying equipment by fire using petroleum products. 

Petroleum products are highly flammable; improper handling may cause injury to 

personnel. 

WARNING 

Do not attempt service procedures on a burner that has recently been in operation. Let 

the burner cool down before performing these procedures. Failure to observe safety 

precautions may result in injury or death to personnel. 

WARNING 

The Battery Pack weighs approximately 93 pounds (42.3 kg). Two persons must carry 

the Battery Pack. Lift with legs, not back, to prevent injury. 

WARNING 

The MBU weighs approximately 58 pounds fully fueled (26.3 kg). Two persons must carry 

the MBU. Lift with legs, not back, to prevent injury. 

WARNING 

Do not store the MBU with fuel in the tank. Improper storage may cause injury to 

personnel. 
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 

c 

GENERAL SAFETY WARNINGS DESCRIPTION – CONTINUED 

WARNING 

HIGH VOLTAGE is used in the operation of this equipment. DEATH ON CONTACT may 

result if personnel fail to observe safety precautions. 

Never connect electrical equipment unless there is at least one other person nearby who 

is familiar with the operation and hazards of the equipment. That person should also be 

competent in giving first aid. 

External power must be shut off before connecting any cables or performing maintenance. 

For artificial respiration, refer to FM 4-25.11. 

Be careful not to contact high-voltage connections when removing, installing, or operating 

this equipment. 

Whenever possible, keep one hand away from the equipment to reduce the hazard of 

current flowing through the vital organs of the body. Voltages as low as 50 volts may 

cause death. 

Do not stand in water while handling live power cords or electrical shock may result. 

Position all power cables so that they are out of the way during operation and are not lying 

in water. 

WARNING 

The MBU has been designed to operate with JP-8 and certain approved diesel fuels. 

Only JP-8 or an approved alternate diesel fuel may be used. The use of gasoline is 

STRICTLY PROHIBITED and will create a fire danger and potential for explosion. Failure 

to observe safety precautions may result in injury or death to personnel. 

WARNING 

Do not attempt to connect a fuel line to the MBU in the vicinity of any open flame. Ensure 

that the fuel hose connections are made properly, to avoid fuel spillage. Prevent a 

possible fire hazard by having rags on hand to absorb any spillage. Failure to observe 

safety precautions may result in injury or death to personnel. 
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 

d 

GENERAL SAFETY WARNINGS DESCRIPTION – CONTINUED 

WARNING 

During operation, the MBU produces harmful carbon monoxide (CO) and other gases. 

Carbon monoxide is a colorless, odorless, and tasteless gas. Mild cases of carbon 

monoxide poisoning can cause symptoms such as nausea, dizziness, or headaches. 

Severe cases of carbon monoxide poisoning can result in brain damage, heart damage, 

or death. Although CO has no telltale odor, it may mix with other odors which mask its 

presence; therefore, CO can be present within a mix of seemingly harmless odors. 

To prevent CO poisoning, ensure that the MBU operating space is well ventilated during 

burner operation. Under no circumstances should an MBU be operated in any enclosure 

with all vents closed. 

WARNING 

For immediate decontaminating procedures, use ONLY hot, soapy water for spot 

decontamination of hot surfaces of the MBU. Shut down and cool the MBU for any 

additional decontamination procedures. DO NOT spray DS2 or any other combustible 

decontamination solutions or compounds on an operating MBU. DO NOT spray DS2 or 

any other combustible decontamination solutions or compounds on any equipment 

surfaces or components where the operating temperatures reach or exceed the flashpoint 

of DS2 (160o Fahrenheit or 71.1o

 Celsius). 

WARNING 

Have rags on hand to clean up fuel spillage that may occur, to prevent contamination. Do 

not perform this procedure near an open flame to prevent fire. Failure to observe safety 

precautions may result in injury or death to personnel. 

WARNING 

Fuel is toxic and highly flammable. Wear protective gloves and be sure to wipe up any 

spills with rags. Dispose of rags in accordance with Unit SOP and local environmental 

regulations. Avoid contact with skin, eyes, and clothes and don’t breathe vapors. Failure 

to observe this warning may cause injury or death to personnel.
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 

e/f blank 

GENERAL SAFETY WARNINGS DESCRIPTION – CONTINUED 

WARNING 

Do not perform this procedure near an open flame, to prevent fire. Failure to observe 

safety precautions may result in injury or death to personnel. 

WARNING 

Before proceeding with this procedure, the MBU fuel tank must be drained completely as 

described in WP 0014. Have rags on hand to clean up fuel spillage that may occur, to 

prevent contamination. Do not perform this procedure near an open flame, to prevent fire. 

Failure to observe safety precautions may result in injury or death to personnel.

WARNING 

Before proceeding, the batteries must be removed from the battery pack. Failure to 

observe safety precautions may result in injury or death to personnel. 

WARNING 

Batteries may explode if connected incorrectly. Red power lead MUST be connected to 

positive (+) terminal of battery. Black power lead MUST be connected to negative (-) 

terminal of battery. 

WARNING 

HIGH VOLTAGE is used in the operation of this equipment. Ensure power is 

disconnected before attempting this maintenance procedure. DEATH ON CONTACT

may result if personnel fail to observe safety precautions.

TM 10-7310-281-13&P

A 

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES/WORK PACKAGES 

NOTE: This manual supersedes TM 10-7310-281-13&P dated 31 July 2004. Zero in the “Change No.” 

column indicates an original page or work package.

Date of issue for the original manual is: 

Original 17 MAY 2010 

TOTAL NUMBER OF PAGES FOR FRONT AND REAR MATTER IS 42 AND TOTAL 

NUMBER OF WORK PACKAGES IS 74, CONSISTING OF THE FOLLOWING: 

Page/WP No. Change No. 

Front Cover 0 

Blank 0 

Warning Summary (6 pgs) 0 

i-xi 0 

xii blank 0 

Chp 1 title page 0 

Blank 0 

WP 0001 (8 pgs) 0 

WP 0002 (8 pgs) 0 

WP 0003 (6 pgs) 0 

Chp 2 title page 0 

Blank 0 

WP 0004 (4 pgs) 0 

WP 0005 (30 pgs) 0 

WP 0006 (2 pgs) 0 

Chp 3 title page 0 

Blank 0 

WP 0007 (2 pgs) 0 

WP 0008 (2 pgs) 0 

WP 0009 (4 pgs) 0 

WP 0010 (4 pgs) 0 

WP 0011 (4 pgs) 0 

Chp 4 title page 0 

Blank 0 

WP 0012 (2 pgs) 0 

WP 0013 (10 pgs) 0 

WP 0014 (2 pgs) 0 

WP 0015 (4 pgs) 0 

WP 0016 (2 pgs) 0 

WP 0017 (8 pgs) 0 

WP 0018 (6 pgs) 0 

WP 0019 (30 pgs) 0 

WP 0020 (2 pgs) 0 

WP 0021 (2 pgs) 0 

WP 0022 (2 pgs) 0 

WP 0023 (10 pgs) 0 

WP 0024 (8 pgs) 0 

WP 0025 (6 pgs) 0 

WP 0026 (2 pgs) 0 

WP 0027 (2 pgs) 0 

WP 0028 (2 pgs) 0 

WP 0029 (2 pgs) 0 

WP 0030 (6 pgs) 0 

WP 0031 (4 pgs) 0 

WP 0032 (2 pgs) 0 

Page/WP No. Change No. 

WP 0033 (4 pgs) 0 

WP 0034 (2 pgs) 0 

Chp 5 title page 0 

Blank 0 

WP 0035 (6 pgs) 0 

WP 0036 (2 pgs) 0 

WP 0037 (2 pgs) 0 

WP 0038 (2 pgs) 0 

WP 0039 (4 pgs) 0 

WP 0040 (4 pgs) 0 

WP 0041 (12 pgs) 0 

WP 0042 (2 pgs) 0 

WP 0043 (4 pgs) 0 

WP 0044 (4 pgs) 0 

WP 0045 (4 pgs) 0 

Chp 6 title page 0 

Blank 0 

WP 0046 (6 pgs) 0 

WP 0047 (4 pgs) 0 

WP 0048 (4 pgs) 0 

WP 0049 (4 pgs) 0 

WP 0050 (4 pgs) 0 

WP 0051 (4 pgs) 0 

WP 0052 (4 pgs) 0 

WP 0053 (4 pgs) 0 

WP 0054 (4 pgs) 0 

WP 0055 (4 pgs) 0 

WP 0056 (4 pgs) 0 

WP 0057 (4 pgs) 0 

WP 0058 (4 pgs) 0 

WP 0059 (4 pgs) 0 

WP 0060 (4 pgs) 0 

WP 0061 (4 pgs) 0 

WP 0062 (4 pgs) 0 

WP 0063 (2 pgs) 0 

WP 0064 (2 pgs) 0 

WP 0065 (2 pgs) 0 

WP 0066 (2 pgs) 0 

Chp 7 title page 0 

Blank 0 

WP 0067 (4 pgs) 0 
TM 10-7310-281-13&P

B 

Page/WP No. Change No. 

WP 0068 (4 pgs) 0 

WP 0069 (4 pgs) 0 

WP 0070 (4 pgs) 0 

WP 0071 (4 pgs) 0 

WP 0072 (2 pgs) 0 

WP 0073 (2 pgs) 0 

WP 0074 (2 pgs) 0 

INDEX-1 - INDEX-6 0 

Inside back cover 0 

Back cover 0 
*TM 10-7310-281-13&P 

i 

HEADQUARTERS 

DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY 

WASHINGTON, D.C., 17 MAY 2010 

TECHNICAL MANUAL 

OPERATOR AND FIELD MAINTENANCE MANUAL 

INCLUDING REPAIR PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS LIST 

FOR 

MODERN BURNER UNIT (MBU) 

NSN 7310-01-452-8137 

MODERN BURNER UNIT (MBU-V3) 

NSN 7310-01-507-9310 

REPORTING ERRORS AND RECOMMENDING IMPROVEMENTS 

You can help improve this manual. If you find any mistakes or if you know of a way to improve the 

procedures, please let us know. Mail your letter, DA Form 2028 (Recommended Changes to 

Publications and Blank Forms) directly to: TACOM Life Cycle Management Command, ATTN: AMSTALCL-MPP/TECH PUBS, 1 Rock Island, IL 62199-7630. You may also send in your recommended 

changes via electronic mail or by fax. Our fax number is DSN 793-0726 and commercial number (309) 

782-0726. Our e-mail address is TACOMLCMC.DAForm2028@us.army.mil. A reply will be furnished to 

you. 

* This manual supersedes TM 10-7310-281-13&P, 31 July 2004, including all changes. 

DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT A: Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 

ii 

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

WP Sequence No.

Page No.

How to Use This Manual x-xi/xii blank 

Chapter 1 – General Information, Equipment Description, and Theory of Operation 

 General Information ................................................................................................................ WP 0001 

 Figure 1. Modern Burner Unit and Associated Equipment ................. 0001-1 

 Figure 2. Disconnecting Battery Lead for Storage .............................. 0001-5 

 Table 1. Nomenclature Cross-Reference List ..................................... 0001-6 

 Table 2. List of Acronyms and Abbreviations ..................................... 0001-6 

 Equipment Description and Data ............................................................................................ WP 0002 

 Figure 1. Modern Burner Unit Location and Description of 

 Major Components .............................................................. 0002-3 

 Figure 2. Power Converter MS0150 ................................................... 0002-4 

 Figure 3. Power Converter MS0160 ................................................... 0002-4 

 Figure 4. Battery Pack ........................................................................ 0002-5 

 Figure 5. 24VDC Power Cables .......................................................... 0002-5 

 Figure 6. NATO Adapter Cable ........................................................... 0002-5 

 Figure 7. Fuel Can Adapter ................................................................ 0002-5 

 Figure 8. Fuel Hose ............................................................................ 0002-6 

 Figure 9. Extension Cord .................................................................... 0002-6 

 Figure 10. 4-Branch Cable .................................................................. 0002-6 

 Figure 11. 2-Branch Cable .................................................................. 0002-6 

 Figure 12. 1-Branch Cable .................................................................. 0002-6 

 Table 1. Equipment Data .................................................................... 0002-7

 Table 2. MBU Tool Kit Contents ......................................................... 0002-7 

 Theory of Operation ................................................................................................................ WP 0003 

 Figure 1. MBU Operational Schematic ............................................... 0003-3 

 Figure 2. MBU Power Configuration for 110VAC 

 Power Source ...................................................................... 0003-4 

 Figure 3. MBU Power Configuration for Vehicular or 

 Battery Supplied 24VDC Power ........................................... 0003-5 

Chapter 2 - Operator Instructions 

 Description and Use of Operator Controls and Indicators ...................................................... WP 0004 

 Figure 1. MBU Controls and Indicators (MBU) ................................... 0004-1 

 Table 1. MBU Controls and Indicators (MBU) .................................... 0004-1 
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 

iii 

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

WP Sequence No.

Page No.

 Figure 2. MBU Controls and Indicators (MBU-V3) .............................. 0004-2 

 Table 2. MBU Controls and Indicators (MBU-V3) ............................... 0004-2 

 Figure 3. Power Converter Controls and Indicators ............................ 0004-3 

 Table 3. Power Converter Controls and Indicators ............................. 0004-3 

 Figure 4. Battery Pack Controls and Indicators .................................. 0004-4 

 Table 4. Battery Pack Controls and Indicators ................................... 0004-4 

 Operation Under Usual Conditions ......................................................................................... WP 0005 

 Figure 1. Installing MBU into an Appliance ......................................... 0005-2 

 Figure 2. Power Converter Mounting Bracket with 

 Power Converter Installed .................................................. 0005-8 

 Figure 3. Connecting Power Cables to MKT .................................... 0005-10 

 Figure 4. Connect Power Cables with 110VAC Power for 

 Systems Other Than MKT ................................................. 0005-11 

 Figure 5. Connect Power Cables Using Vehicular 

 Power Alone ..................................................................... 0005-12 

 Figure 6. Connecting Power Cables Using Vehicular 

 Power and Battery Pack ................................................... 0005-13 

 Figure 7. Connecting Power Cables Using the 

 Battery Pack Alone ........................................................... 0005-14 

 Figure 8. MBU Pre-operational Check .............................................. 0005-15 

 Figure 9. MBU and Associated Equipment Power-up Sequence ..... 0005-17 

 Figure 10. Powered Fueling of MBU ................................................. 0005-19 

 Figure 11. Manual Fueling Procedure .............................................. 0005-21 

 Table 1. MBU Fault Indicators .......................................................... 0005-24 

 Figure 12. MBU Control Panel Set Up, Operation, and 

 Shut-Down Label ............................................................ 0005-25 

 Figure 13. MBU-V3 Control Panel Setup, Operation, 

 and Shut-Down Label ..................................................... 0005-25 

 Figure 14. Control Panel Indicator Label .......................................... 0005-25 

 Figure 15. Burner Control Valve Label ............................................. 0005-25 

 Figure 16. Power Converter Front Panel Label (Model MS0150) ..... 0005-26 

 Figure 17. Power Converter Front Panel Label (Model MS0160) ..... 0005-26 

 Figure 18. Battery Pack Control Panel Label .................................... 0005-27 

 Figure 19. Battery Pack Non-Spillable Battery Outer Cover Label ... 0005-27 
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 

iv 

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

WP Sequence No.

Page No.

 Figure 20. Battery Pack Identification Plate ...................................... 0005-27 

 Operation Under Unusual Conditions ..................................................................................... WP 0006 

Chapter 3 – Operator Troubleshooting Procedures 

 Malfunction Symptom Index ................................................................................................... WP 0007 

 Table 1. Malfunction Symptom Index ................................................. 0007-1 

 Troubleshooting Procedures MBU Controller Error Codes .................................................... WP 0008 

 Table 1. Controller Error Codes ........................................................... 0008-1 

 Troubleshooting Procedures Burner Will Not Start or Shuts Down During Operation ............ WP 0009 

 Troubleshooting Procedures Burner Will Not Refuel .............................................................. WP 0010 

 Troubleshooting Procedures Burner Runs Poorly but Does Not Shut Down ......................... WP 0011 

Chapter 4 – Operator Maintenance Instructions 

 Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) Introduction ..................................... WP 0012 

 Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) ........................................................ WP 0013 

 Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services for MBU ...... 0013-2 

 Figure 1. MBU “Before Operation” PMCS .......................................... 0013-2 

 Figure 2. Power Converter “Before Operation” PMCS ....................... 0013-3 

 Figure 3. Battery Pack “Before Operation” PMCS .............................. 0013-4 

 Figure 4. System Cables “Before Operation” PMCS .......................... 0013-5 

 Figure 5. Fuel Can Adapter and Fuel Hose 

 “Before Operation” PMCS .................................................... 0013-6 

 Figure 6. MBU and Battery Pack “During Operation” PMCS .............. 0013-7 

 Figure 7. MBU “After Operation” PMCS ............................................. 0013-8 

 Figure 8. Battery Pack “After Operation” PMCS ................................. 0013-9 

 Table 2. PMCS Mandatory Replacement Parts.............................0013-10 

 MBU Service ........................................................................................................................... WP 0014 

 Figure 1. Drain the Fuel Tank ............................................................. 0014-2 

 Cable Clips Inspect, Replace ................................................................................................. WP 0015 

 Figure 1. Inspect Chassis Mounted Cable Clips and Hose Clamps ... 0015-2 

 Figure 2. Replace Chassis Mounted Cable Clips and Hose Clamps .. 0015-3 

 Electrical Connector Assembly Inspect .................................................................................. WP 0016 

 Figure 1. Inspect the Electrical Connector Assembly ........................ 0016-1 

 Figure 2. Inspect the Electrical Connector Assembly ........................ 0016-2 

 Controller Assembly Inspect, Calibrate, Replace ................................................................... WP 0017 

 Figure 1. Inspect the Controller Assembly .......................................... 0017-3 
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 

v 

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

WP Sequence No.

Page No.

 Figure 2. Calibrate the Controller Assembly (MBU only) .................... 0017-5 

 Figure 3. Replace the Controller Assembly ........................................ 0017-7 

 Figure 4. Locking Pawl ....................................................................... 0017-8 

 Compressor Assembly Inspect, Test, Replace ....................................................................... WP 0018 

 Figure 1. Inspect the Compressor Assembly ...................................... 0018-1 

 Figure 2. Test the Compressor Assembly .......................................... 0018-3 

 Figure 3. Replace the Compressor Assembly .................................... 0018-6 

 Fuel Delivery Block Assembly Inspect, Test, Remove/Install, Adjust, Replace ...................... WP 0019 

 Figure 1. Inspect the Fuel Delivery Block Assembly ........................... 0019-2 

 Figure 2. Test the Flame Sensor ........................................................ 0019-3 

 Figure 3. Test the Feedback Potentiometer (MBU only) ..................... 0019-5 

 Figure 4. Remove/Install the Fuel Delivery Block Assembly .............. 0019-7 

 Figure 5. Remove/Install the Fuel Delivery Block Assembly from Burner 

 Tube Mounting Studs .......................................................... 0019-9 

 Figure 6. Adjust the Flame Control on the MBU-V3 ......................... 0019-11 

 Figure 7. Adjust the Flame Control on the MBU-V3 ......................... 0019-13 

 Figure 8. Replacing Parts Without Removing Fuel 

 Delivery Block (MBU-V3 shown) ....................................... 0019-14 

 Figure 9. Replace the Control Knob Assembly ................................. 0019-15 

 Figure 10. Replace the Flame Sensor .............................................. 0019-17 

 Figure 11. Replace the Fuel Feeder Line ......................................... 0019-19 

 Figure 12. Replacement of Air/Fill Solenoid Valve 

 (MBU-V3 shown) ............................................................ 0019-21 

 Figure 13. Replace the Fuel Shut-Off Solenoid Valve 

 (MBU-V3 shown) ............................................................ 0019-23 

 Figure 14. Replace the Air Line to Vent Valve .................................. 0019-25 

 Figure 15. Replace the Air Line to Compressor ................................ 0019-27 

 Figure 16. Replace the Fuel Delivery Block Assembly ..................... 0019-29 

 Air Filter Test, Replace ........................................................................................................... WP 0020 

 Figure 1. Replace the Air Filter ........................................................... 0020-2 

 Igniter Replace ....................................................................................................................... WP 0021 

 Figure 1. Replace the Igniter Assembly .............................................. 0021-2 

 Fuel Nozzle Replace .............................................................................................................. WP 0022 

 Figure 1. Replace the Fuel Nozzle ..................................................... 0022-2 
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 

vi 

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

WP Sequence No.

Page No.

 Vent Valve Assembly Inspect, Service ................................................................................... WP 0023 

 Figure 1. Inspect the Vent Valve Assembly ........................................ 0023-1 

 Figure 2. Inspect the Check Valve ...................................................... 0023-3 

 Figure 3. Service the Check Valve ..................................................... 0023-5 

 Figure 4. Replace the Vent Valve Assembly ...................................... 0023-7 

 Figure 5. Replace the Vent Valve Assembly ...................................... 0023-9 

 Burner Assembly and Reflective Heat Shield Assembly Inspect, Replace........................WP 0024 

Figure 1. Inspect the Burner Assembly and Reflective Heat Shield 

Assembly........ .................................................................................... 0024-3 

 Figure 2. Replace the Burner Assembly and Reflective Heat Shield 

 Assembly................................................................................0024-5 

 Figure 3. Replace the Burner Assembly and Reflective Heat Shield 

 Assembly................................................................................0024-7 

 Fuel Regulator Assembly Inspect, Service, Replace .............................................................. WP 0025 

 Figure 1. Inspect the Fuel Regulator Assembly .................................. 0025-2 

 Figure 2. Clean the Fuel Regulator Assembly Air Vent ...................... 0025-3 

 Figure 3. Replace the Fuel Regulator Assembly ................................ 0025-5 

 Fuel Filter Replace ................................................................................................................. WP 0026 

 Figure 1. Replace the Pickup Fuel Filter ............................................. 0026-2 

 Fuel Line Assembly Inspect .................................................................................................... WP 0027 

 Figure 1. Inspect the Fuel Line Assembly ........................................... 0027-2 

 Fuel Interface Fitting Inspect .................................................................................................. WP 0028 

 Figure 1. Inspect the Fuel Interface Fitting ......................................... 0028-2 

 Power Converter Inspect ........................................................................................................ WP 0029 

 Figure 1. Inspect the Power Converter ............................................... 0029-2 

 Battery Pack, Batteries. and Battery Charger Inspect ........................................................... WP 0030 

 Figure 1. Inspect the Battery Pack ...................................................... 0030-2 

 Figure 2. Inspect the Batteries ............................................................ 0030-3 

 Figure 3. Inspect the Battery Charger ................................................. 0030-5 

 Fuel Can Adapter and Fuel Hose Inspect, Replace ............................................................... WP 0031 

 Figure 1. Inspect Fuel Adapter Cap .................................................... 0031-1 

 Figure 2. Inspect Fuel Hose ................................................................ 0031-2 

 Figure 3. Fuel Can Adapter and Fuel Hose ........................................ 0031-3 

 NATO Adapter Cable Inspect ................................................................................................. WP 0032 

 Figure 1. Inspect the NATO Adapter Cable ........................................ 0032-2 

 Cables 24VDC, Extension and Branch Inspect, Replace ....................................................... WP 0033 
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 

vii 

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

WP Sequence No.

Page No.

 Figure 1. Inspect 24VDC Extension and Branch Cables .................... 0033-1 

 Figure 2. Inspect Male and Female Plugs .......................................... 0033-2 

 Figure 3. Replace a Damaged 12-ft MKT Crossway Cable ................ 0033-4 

 Cables 110VAC, Extension Inspect ........................................................................................ WP 0034 

 Figure 1. Inspect 110VAC Extension Cable ....................................... 0034-1 

 Figure 2. Inspect 110VAC Male and Female Plugs ............................ 0034-2 

Chapter 5 – Field Maintenance Instructions 

 Service Upon Receipt ............................................................................................................. WP 0035 

 Figure 1. Overview of MKT Modification ............................................. 0035-2 

 Figure 2. MKT Modification (Crossway Cable) ................................... 0035-3 

 Figure 3. Install the 12-ft MKT Crossway Cable ................................. 0035-4 

 Figure 4. MKT Modification (Feeder Cable Harness) ......................... 0035-5 

 Figure 5. MKT Modification (Power Converter Mounting Bracket) ..... 0035-5 

 Figure 6. Grounding Rod Assembly .................................................... 0035-6 

 MBU Frame Repair ................................................................................................................. WP 0036 

 Cable Clips Replace ............................................................................................................... WP 0037 

 Figure 1. Replace Chassis Mounted Cable Clips and Hose Clamps .. 0037-2 

 Electrical Connector Assembly Test, Replace ........................................................................ WP 0038 

 Figure 1. Test the Electrical Connector Assembly .............................. 0038-1 

 Figure 2. Replace the Electrical Connector Assembly ........................ 0038-2 

 Fuel Line Assembly Replace .................................................................................................. WP 0039 

 Figure 1. Replace the Fuel Line Assembly ......................................... 0039-3 

 Fuel Interface Fitting Replace ................................................................................................. WP 0040 

 Figure 1. Replace the Fuel Interface Fitting ........................................ 0040-3 

 Power Converter Test, Repair ................................................................................................ WP 0041 

 Figure 1. Test the Power Converter (MS0150) ................................... 0041-2 

 Figure 2. Test the Power Converter (MS0160) ................................... 0041-4 

 Figure 3. Replace the Main Power Switch (MS0150) ......................... 0041-6 

 Figure 4. Replace the Main Power Switch (MS0160) ......................... 0041-8 

 Figure 5. Replace the Power Cord (MS0150) ........... ....................0041-10 

 Figure 6. Replace the Power Cord (MS0160) ................................... 0041-12 

 Battery Pack Repair, Replace ................................................................................................ WP 0042 

 Figure 1. Replace the Battery Pack .................................................... 0042-2 

 Batteries Test, Replace .......................................................................................................... WP 0043 

 Figure 1. Test the Batteries ................................................................ 0043-2 
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 

viii 

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

WP Sequence No.

Page No.

 Figure 2. Replace the Batteries .......................................................... 0043-4 

 Battery Charger Test, Replace ............................................................................................... WP 0044 

 Figure 1. Test the Battery Charger ..................................................... 0044-2 

 Figure 2. Replace the Battery Charger ............................................... 0044-4 

 NATO Adapter Cable Replace ............................................................................................... WP 0045 

 Figure 1. Test the NATO Adapter Cable ............................................. 0045-2 

 Figure 2. Replace NATO Adapter Cable Components ....................... 0045-3 

Chapter 6 - Supporting Information 

 Introduction to Repair Parts and Special Tools ...................................................................... WP 0046 

 Table 1. SMR Code ............................................................................. 0046-1 

 Group 01 Frame Assembly ..................................................................................................... WP 0047 

 Figure 1. Frame Assembly .................................................................. 0047-2 

 Group 02 Electrical Connector Assembly ............................................................................... WP 0048

 Figure 2. Electrical Connector Assembly ............................................ 0048-2 

 Group 0301 Controller Assembly ........................................................................................... WP 0049 

 Figure 3. Controller Assembly ............................................................ 0049-2 

 Group 04 Compressor Assembly ........................................................................................... WP 0050 

 Figure 4. Compressor Assembly ........................................................ 0050-2 

 Group 05 Fuel Delivery Block Assembly ................................................................................ WP 0051

 Figure 5. Fuel Delivery Block Assembly (Sheet 1 of 2) ...................... 0051-1 

 Figure 5. Fuel Delivery Block Assembly (Sheet 2 of 2) ...................... 0051-2 

 Group 06 Vent Valve Assembly .............................................................................................. WP 0052 

 Figure 6. Vent Valve Assembly ........................................................... 0052-2 

 Group 07 Burner Assembly .................................................................................................... WP 0053 

 Figure 7. Burner Assembly ................................................................. 0053-2 

 Group 08 Fuel Regulator Assembly ....................................................................................... WP 0054 

 Figure 8. Fuel Regulator Assembly .................................................... 0054-2 

 Group 09 Reflective Heat Shield Assembly ............................................................................ WP 0055 

 Figure 9. Reflective Heat Shield Assembly ......................................... 0055-2 

 Group 10 Fuel Line Assembly ................................................................................................ WP 0056 

 Figure 10. Fuel Line Assembly ........................................................... 0056-2 

 Group 11 Power Converter ..................................................................................................... WP 0057 

 Figure 11. Power Converter for MBU (Sheet 1 of 2) ............................ 0057-1 

 Figure 11. Power Converter for MBU-V3 (Sheet 2 of 2) ...................... 0057-2 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 

ix 

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

WP Sequence No.

Page No.

 Group 12 Battery Pack ........................................................................................................... WP 0058 

 Figure 12. Battery Pack ...................................................................... 0058-2 

 Group 13 Miscellaneous Assemblies 

 Group 1301 Fuel Can Adapter and Fuel Hose ....................................................................... WP 0059 

 Figure 13. Fuel Can Adapter and Fuel Hose ...................................... 0059-2 

 Group 1302 NATO Adapter Cable .......................................................................................... WP 0060 

 Figure 14. NATO Adapter Cable ......................................................... 0060-2 

 Group 1303 24VDC Extension and Branch Cables ................................................................ WP 0061 

 Figure 15. 24VDC Extension and Branch Cables ............................... 0061-2 

 Group 1304 110VAC Extension ............................................................................................. WP 0062 

 Figure 16. 110VAC Extension Cables ................................................ 0062-2 

 Group 99 Bulk Material ........................................................................................................... WP 0063 

 Special Tools List ................................................................................................................... WP 0064 

 National Stock Number Index ................................................................................................. WP 0065 

 Part Number Index ................................................................................................................. WP 0066 

 References ............................................................................................................................. WP 0067 

 Maintenance Allocation Chart (MAC) Introduction ................................................................. WP 0068 

 Maintenance Allocation Chart (MAC) ..................................................................................... WP 0069 

 Table 1. MAC for Modem Burner Unit (MBU and MBU-V3) ............... 0069-1 

 Table 2. Tools and Test Equipment for Modern 

 Burner Unit (MBU and MBU-V3) ........................................... 0069-3 

 Table 3. Remarks for Modern Burner Unit (MBU and MBU-V3) ......... 0069-3 

 Components Of End Item (COEI) List & Basic Issue Items (BII) List ..................................... WP 0070 

 Table 1. Components of End Item List ............................................... 0070-2 

 Table 2. Basic Issue Items List ............................................................ 0070-3 

 Additional Authorization List (AAL) ......................................................................................... WP 0071 

 Table 1. Additional Authorization List .................................................. 0071-2 

 Expendable and Durable Items List ........................................................................................ WP 0072 

 Table 1. Expendable and Durable Items List ...................................... 0072-2 

 Tool Identification List ............................................................................................................. WP 0073 

 Table 1. Tool Identification List. ............................................................... 0073-1 

 Mandatory Replacement Parts List ........................................................................................ WP 0074 

 Table 1. Mandatory Replacement Parts List ...................................... 0074-1 

 Alphabetical Index 
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 

x 

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL 

HOW TO OBTAIN TECHNICAL MANUALS

When a new system is introduced to the Army inventory, it is the responsibility of the receiving units to 

notify and inform the Unit Publications Clerk that a Technical Manual is available for the new system. 

Throughout the life cycle of the new system, the Publications Proponent will also provide updates and 

changes to the Technical Manual. 

To receive new Technical Manuals or change packages to fielded Technical Manuals, provide the Unit 

Publications Clerk the full Technical Manual number, title, date of publication, and number of copies 

required. The Unit Publications Clerk will then justify the request through the Unit Publications Officer. 

When the request is approved, DA Form 12-R is used to order the Technical Manual from the Army 

Publishing Directorate (APD). Obtain the form and request a publications account from the APD Web site 

at http://www.apd.army.mil. Once on the Website, click on the “Orders/Subscriptions/Reports” tab. From 

the dropdown menu, select “Establish an Account,” then select “Tutorial” and follow the instructions in the 

tutorial presentation. 

Complete information for obtaining Army publications can be found in DA PAM 25-33. 

ORGANIZATION OF THIS MANUAL 

In this manual, primary chapters appear in upper case/capital letters; work packages are presented in 

numeric sequence, e.g., 0001, 0002; paragraphs within a work package are not numbered and are 

presented in a titled format. For a first level paragraph, titles are in all upper case/capital letters, e.g., 

FRONT MATTER. Subordinate paragraph titles will have the first letter of the first word of each principle 

word all upper case/capital letters, e.g., Manual Organization and Page Numbering System. The location 

of additional material that must be referenced is clearly marked. Illustrations supporting maintenance 

procedures/text are located underneath, or as close as possible to, their referenced paragraph. 

FRONT MATTER. Front matter consists of front cover, warning summary, title block, table of contents, 

and how to use this manual page. 

CHAPTER 1 – GENERAL INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION, AND THEORY OF 

OPERATION. Chapter 1 Contains introductory information on the Modern Burner Unit and Modern Burner 

Unit-V3 its associated equipment as well as theory of operation. 

CHAPTER 2 – OPERATOR INSTRUCTIONS. Chapter 2 provides the operation requirements of the 

Modern Burner Unit and Modern Burner Unit-V3 its associated equipment.. 

CHAPTER 3 – OPERATOR TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES. Chapter 3 provides malfunction 

symptom index and the procedures to troubleshoot the MBU and MBU-V3 and where the repair procedure 

is found in the manual. 

CHAPTER 4 – OPERATOR MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS. Chapter 4 provides maintenance 

procedures authorized at the operator level that include service upon receipt, inspection, testing and in 

some cases replacement and repair. 

CHAPTER 5 – MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS. Chapter 5 provides maintenance procedures 

authorized at the field service level.

CHAPTER 6 – SUPPORTING INFORMATION. Chapter 6 contains references, maintenance allocation 

chart and expendable and durable items list. 
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 

xi/xii blank 

REAR MATTER. Rear matter consists of alphabetical index, DA Form 2028, authentication page, and 

back cover. 

Manual Organization and Page Numbering System 

The Manual is divided into six major chapters that detail the topics mentioned above. Within each chapter 

are work packages covering a wide range of topics. Each work package is numbered sequentially starting 

at page 1. The work package has its own page numbering scheme and is independent of the page 

numbering used by other work packages. Each page of a work package has a page number of the form 

XXXX YY-ZZ where XXXX is the work package number (e.g. 0010 is work package 10) and YY is the 

revision number for that work package and ZZ represents the number of the page within that work 

package. A page number such as 0010-1/2 blank means that page 1 contains information but page 2 of 

that work package has been intentionally left blank. 

Finding Information 

The Table of Contents permits the reader to find information in the manual quickly. The reader should 

start here first when looking for a specific topic. The Table of Contents lists the topics contained within 

each chapter and the Work Package Sequence Number where it can be found. 

 

Example: If the reader were looking for instructions on “Replacing the Compressor Assembly”, which is an 

Operator Maintenance topic, the Table of Contents indicates that Operator Maintenance information can 

be found in Chapter 4. Scanning down the listings for Chapter 4, “Compressor Assembly” information can 

be found in WP 0018 (Work Package 18). 

An Alphabetical Index can be found at the back of the Manual, and lists specific topics 

with the corresponding work package 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

TM 10-7310-281-13&P 

CHAPTER 1 

GENERAL INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION, 

AND THEORY OF OPERATION 

FOR

MODERN BURNER UNIT 

AND 

MODERN BURNER UNIT-V3

 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0001 

0001-1 

OPERATOR AND FIELD MAINTENANCE 

GENERAL INFORMATION 

SCOPE

Type of Manual 

This Technical Manual contains operator and field maintenance instructions for the Modern Burner Unit 

(MBU and MBU-V3) (Figure 1, Item 1) and its associated equipment. The associated equipment, consists 

of a Power Converter (Figure 1, Item 2), Battery Pack (Figure 1, Item 3), 110VAC extension cord (Figure 

1, Item 4), 24VDC Extension Cables (Figure 1, Item 5), NATO Adapter Cable (Figure 1, Item 6), Fuel Can 

Adapter (Figure 1, Item 7), Fuel Hose (Figure 1, Item 8), and Branch Cables (Figure 1, Item 9). 

An improved Power Converter (Figure 1, Item 10) is available and may be used with all MBUs. 

 

Figure 1. Modern Burner Unit and Associated Equipment. 

1 2

3

10

8 

7

4

9

5 

6
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0001 

0001-2 

Model Number(s) and Equipment Name 

Modern Burner Unit (MBU100) 

Modern Burner Unit-V3 (MBU103) 

Purpose of Equipment 

The MBU is the primary heat source for the kitchen and sanitation equipment found within all Army field 

feeding systems. 

MAINTENANCE FORMS, RECORDS, AND REPORTS 

Department of the Army forms and procedures used for equipment maintenance will be those prescribed 

by DA Pam 750-8 The Army Maintenance Management System (TAMMS) Users Manual. 

REPORTING EQUIPMENT IMPROVEMENT RECOMMENDATIONS (EIR) 

If your MBU needs improvement, let us know. Send us an EIR. You, the user are the only one who can 

tell us what you don’t like about your equipment. Let us know why you don’t like the design or 

performance. 

If you have Internet access, the easiest and fastest way to report problems or suggestions is to go to 

https://aeps.ria.army.mil/aepspublic.cfm (scroll down and choose the “Submit Quality Deficiency Report” 

bar). The Internet form lets you choose to submit an Equipment Improvement (EIR), a Product Quality 

Deficiency Report (PQDR or a Warranty Claim Action). 

You may also submit your information using an SF 368 (Product Quality Deficiency Report). You can 

send your SF 368 via e-mail, regular mail, or facsimile using the addresses/facsimile numbers specified in 

DA Pam 750-8, The Army Maintenance Management System (TAMMS) Users Manual. We will send you 

a reply. 

CORROSION PREVENTION AND CONTROL (CPC) 

Corrosion Prevention and Control (CPC) of Army materiel is a continuing concern. It is important that any 

corrosion problems with this item be reported so that the problem can be corrected and improvements can 

be made to prevent the problem in future items. 

While corrosion is typically associated with rusting of metals, it can also include deterioration of other 

materials, such as rubber or plastic. Unusual cracking, softening, swelling or breaking of these materials 

may be a corrosion problem. 

If a corrosion problem is identified, it can be reported using SF 368, Product Quality Deficiency Report. 

Use of key words such as “corrosion,” “rust,” “deterioration,” or “cracking” will ensure that the information is 

identified as a CPC problem. This form should be submitted to the address specified in DA Pam 750-8. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0001 

0001-3 

DESTRUCTION OF ARMY MATERIEL TO PREVENT ENEMY USE 

GENERAL INFORMATION 

Objective 

Methods of destruction used to inflict damage on food service equipment should make it impossible to 

restore equipment to a usable-condition in a combat zone, by either repair or cannibalization. 

Authority

Destruction of food service equipment that is in imminent danger of capture by an enemy is a command 

decision that must be made by a battalion or higher commander, or the equivalent. 

Implementation plan 

All units that possess food service equipment should have a plan for the implementation of destruction 

procedures. 

Training

All personnel who use or perform such functions as maintenance, or storage food service equipment, 

should receive thorough training on food service equipment destruction procedures and methods. The 

destruction methods demonstrated during training should be simulated. Upon completion of training, all 

applicable personnel should be thoroughly familiar with food service equipment destruction methods and 

be capable of performing destruction without immediate reference to any publication. 

SPECIFIC METHODS

Specific methods of destroying Army materiel to prevent enemy use shall be by mechanical means, fire, or 

by use of natural surroundings. 

Destruction by Mechanical Means 

Food service equipment metal assemblies, parts, and packing aids shall be destroyed using hammers, 

bolt cutters, files, hacksaws, drills, screwdrivers, crowbars, or other similar devices used to smash, break, 

bend, or cut. 

WARNING 

Exercise extreme care when using petroleum products to destroy equipment by fire, as 

these materials are highly flammable. Improper handling may cause injury to personnel. 

Destruction by Fire 

Items that can be destroyed by fire shall be burned. The destruction of equipment by use of fire is an 

effective method of destroying low-melting-point metal items (e.g., side rails, threaded portions of nuts and 

bolts, and platforms). However, mechanical destruction should be completed first, whenever possible, 

before initiating destruction by fire. When items to be destroyed are made of metal, textile materials (or 

some comparable low combustible material), they should be packed under and around the items, then 

soaked with a flammable petroleum product and ignited. Proper concentration of equipment that is 

suitable for burning will provide a hotter and more destructive fire. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0001 

0001-4 

SPECIFIC METHODS – CONTINUED 

 

Destruction by Use of Natural Surroundings 

Small vital parts of assemblies that are easily accessible may be disposed of as follows: Disposal or 

denial of equipment to an enemy may be accomplished through use of natural surroundings. Accessible 

vital parts of assemblies may be removed and scattered through dense foliage, buried in dirt or sand, or 

thrown into a lake, stream, or other body of water. Total submersion of equipment in a body of water will 

provide water damage as well as concealment. Salt water will inflict extensive damage to air delivery 

equipment. 

PREPARATION FOR STORAGE OR SHIPMENT 

WARNING 

Do not attempt service procedures on a burner that has recently been in operation. Let 

the burner cool down before performing these procedures to avoid possibility of burns. 

WARNING 

The Battery Pack weighs approximately 93 pounds (42.3 kg). Two persons must carry 

the Battery Pack. Lift with legs, not back, to prevent injury. 

WARNING 

The MBU weighs approximately 58 pounds fully fueled (26.3 kg). Two persons must carry 

the MBU. Lift with legs, not back, to prevent injury. 

1. Prior to placing the MBU or any component in storage, it must be inspected IAW WP 0013, After 

Operation PMCS, cleaned, and have had all necessary maintenance performed. 

2. Remove all MBUs from appliances. 

3. Drain fuel tank IAW procedures given in WP 0014. 

4. If a battery pack is used, ensure the battery has been recharged to 100% capacity IAW procedures 

given in WP 0005. 

5. Collect 110VAC and 24VDC extension, branch, and NATO adapter cables as applicable. Inspect and 

clean as necessary. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0001 

0001-5 

PREPARATION FOR STORAGE OR SHIPMENT – CONTINUED 

Disconnect Battery Lead 

If a Battery Pack is used, disconnect the battery leads prior to storage as follows: 

1. Remove the six screws and lock washers (Figure 2, Item 1) that secure the outer cover (Figure 2, Item 

2). 

2. Locate the RED wire (Figure 2, Item 3) that extends from the internal charger (Figure 2, Item 4) to the 

battery (Figure 2, Item 5). 

3. Remove the terminal bolt (Figure 2, Item 6) that secures the RED wire (Figure 2, Item 3) to the battery 

(Figure 2, Item 5). Remove the wire and cover the connector at the end of the lead with electrical 

tape. 

4. Tuck the wire between the battery (Figure 2, Item 5) and the internal charger (Figure 2, Item 4) and reinstall the terminal bolt (Figure 2, Item 6). 

5. Install the outer cover (Figure 2, Item 2) on the battery pack with the six screws and lock washers 

(Figure 2, Item 1) removed earlier. 

6. When all components are properly prepared and cleaned, place MBUs, the battery pack, the power 

converter (if not permanently installed in MKT), and all cables into containers. Equipment should be 

dry prior to storage. 

Figure 2. Disconnecting Battery Lead for Storage. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0001 

0001-6 

NOMENCLATURE CROSS-REFERENCE LIST 

Table 1. Nomenclature Cross-Reference List. 

Table 2. List of Acronyms and Abbreviations. 

 

Acronym/Abbreviation Meaning 

AAL Additional Authorization List 

AC Alternating Current 

amps Amperes 

APD Army Publishing Directorate 

BG Bag 

BII Basic Issue Item 

BTU British Thermal Unit 

°C Degrees Celsius; Degrees Centigrade 

COEI Components of End Item 

CPC Corrosion Prevention Control 

cm Centimeter(s) 

CTA Common Table of Allowance 

DA Department of the Army 

DC Direct Current 

DS2 Decontamination Solution Number Two 

EA Each 

e.g. For Example 

EIR Equipment Improvement Recommendations 

Ext. Extension 

°F Degrees Fahrenheit 

ft Foot/feet 

FSC Food Sanitation Center 

gal Gallon(s) 

GFCI Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter 

GR Gross 

hr Hour(s) 

Hz Hertz 

IAW In Accordance With 

ID Inside Diameter 

in Inch(es) 

KCLFF Kitchen, Company Level, Field Feeding 

KCLFF-E Kitchen, Company Level, Field Feeding-Enhanced 

Kg Kilogram(s) 

KW Kilowatt(s) 

lb Pound(s) 

lt Liter(s) 

m Meter(s) 

MAC Maintenance Allocation Chart 

MBU Modern Burner Unit 

MFK Modular Field Kitchen 

Misc. Miscellaneous 

MKT Kitchen, Field, Trailer-Mounted 

MSDS Material Safety Data Sheet 

MTOE Modified Table of Organization and Equipment 

N/A Not Applicable 

 

Common Name Official Nomenclature 

Burner Modern Burner Unit
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0001 

0001-7/8 blank 

Table 2. List of Acronyms and Abbreviations -- CONTINUED. 

QUALITY OF MATERIAL 

Material used for replacement, repair, or modification must meet the requirements of this manual. If 

quality of material requirements are not stated in this manual, the material must meet the requirements of 

the drawings, standards, specifications, or approved engineering change proposals applicable to the 

subject equipment. 

SAFETY, CARE, AND HANDLING 

Always pay attention to Warnings, Cautions and Notes appearing throughout the manual. They will 

appear prior to applicable procedures. Ensure you read and understand their content to prevent serious 

injury to yourself and others, or damage to equipment. 

SUPPORTING INFORMATION FOR REPAIR PARTS, SPECIAL TOOLS, TMDE, AND SUPPORT 

EQUIPMENT

For authorized common tools and equipment, refer to the Modified Table of Organization and Equipment 

(MTOE), CTA 50-970, Expendable/Durable Items (Except Medical, Class V, Repair Parts, and Heraldic 

Items), or CTA 8-100, Army Medical Department Expendable/Durable Items, as applicable to your unit. 

The tools required to perform maintenance on the MBU are available as part of the systems in which the 

MBU is being used (MKT, KCLFF, etc). In cases where those systems tools are not available, the MBU 

Toolkit is available as an additionally authorized item. 

No Special Tools, TMDE, or Support Equipment is required for the MBU. 

Repair parts are listed and illustrated in the repair parts list located in WP 0046 through WP 0066. 

Acronym/Abbreviation Meaning 

NATO North Atlantic Treaty Organization 

NBC Nuclear, Biological, Chemical 

No. number 

OD Outside Diameter 

Pam Pamphlet 

Pgs. pages 

PMCS Preventative Maintenance Checks and Services 

POL Petroleum, Oil and Lubricant 

ppm Parts Per Million 

PR Pair 

QD Quick Disconnect 

RO Roll 

RPSTL Repair Parts and Special Tools List 

SF Standard Form 

SOP Standard Operating Procedure 

TM Technical Manual 

TMDE Test, Measurement, Diagnostic Equipment 

TOE Table of Organization and Equipment 

TU Tube 

U/M Unit of Measure 

UOC Usable On Code 

VAC Volts, Alternating Current 

VDC Volts, Direct Current 

WP Work Package 

 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0002 

0002-1 

OPERATOR AND FIELD MAINTENANCE 

 

EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION AND DATA 

EQUIPMENT CHARACTERISTICS, CAPABILITIES, AND FEATURES 

The MBU features modular construction that allows for easy replacement of malfunctioning components. 

Its external dimensions are similar to the M2A Burner which it replaces. It can be installed into and used 

with the same kitchen and sanitation equipment as the M2A. The MBU features automated ignition and 

uses JP-8 or alternate approved diesel fuel. 

Characteristics 

• Lightweight construction 

• Modular assembly 

• Infrared burner 

Capabilities 

• Generates 22,000 to 52,000 BTU/Hr (MBU) 

• Generates 15,000 to 52,000 BTU/Hr (MBU-V3) 

• Operation in -25°F (-32°C) to 125°F (52°C) 

• Operation in remote locations 

• MBU continuous operation (full fuel tank) (setting max, min) ............................ 4 hrs; 13 hrs 

• MBU-V3 continuous operation (full fuel tank) (setting max, min) ...................... 5 hrs; 20 hrs 

Features 

• Powered ignition 

• Fully adjustable burner temperature 

• Powered refueling 

• Fault detection and fuel level indicators 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0002 

0002-2 

LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS

Frame 

The 3⁄4-inch square aluminum stock frame (Figure 1, Item 1) includes lifting handles (Figure 1, Item 2) and 

base plate (Figure 1, Item 3). 

Reflective Heat Shield and High Temperature Insulation 

The stainless steel reflective heat shield (Figure 1, Item 4) directs radiant heat upward, secures the 

insulation (Figure 1, Item 5) in the burner well (Figure 1, Item 6), and contains food spills during MBU 

operation. The insulation protects components of the MBU from combustion heat. 

Infrared Burner Assembly 

The infrared burner assembly (Figure 1, Item 7) projects through the burner well (Figure 1, Item 6), the 

high temperature insulation (Figure 1, Item 5), and the reflective heat shield (Figure 1, Item 4). 

Fuel Delivery Block Assembly 

The fuel delivery block assembly (Figure 1, Item 8) controls the fuel/air mixture that is provided to the 

burner tube assembly. 

Control Panel 

The hinged control panel (Figure 1, Item 9) opens for access to subassemblies. The control panel 

includes four pushbutton controls, six indicators, and an hour meter. 

Power Receptacle 

The power receptacle (Figure 1, Item 10) is mounted at an angle to facilitate easy connection of the 

24VDC cable. 

Fuel Tank 

The two gallon fuel tank (Figure 1, Item 11) is welded to the frame (Figure 1, Item 1) and contains fuel for 

combustion. A vent valve/level assembly (Figure 1, Item 12) monitors fuel level. The fuel regulator 

(Figure 1, Item 13) maintains zero pressure fuel for delivery to the fuel nozzle during operation and 

contains a replaceable fuel filter (Figure 1, Item 14). The fuel tank has a threaded plug (Figure 1, Item 15) 

for manually filling the fuel tank when the MBU is removed from the appliance. 

Fuel Supply QD Nipple 

The fuel supply QD nipple (Figure 1, Item 16) provides the connection for the fuel line, allowing the flow of 

fuel into and out of the tank. It is also used when draining the tank of fuel. 

Air Compressor 

The air compressor (Figure 1, Item 17), draws air through the air intake filter, which is part of the fuel 

delivery block assembly (Figure 1, Item 8). The compressor also draws fuel through the QD nipple (Figure 

1, Item 16) during refueling. 

DIFFERENCES BETWEEN MODELS 

The MBU and the MBU-V3 are identical with the exception of an improved fuel delivery block on the MBUV3. The feedback potentiometer has been omitted from the MBU-V3. An improved power converter is 

also available for the MBU-V3. 

The MBU-V3 is easily identified by the control panel decal. Refer to WP 0005 for illustrations of the 

control panel decals. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0002 

0002-3 

LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS

 Serial Number Location 

 MBU Data Plate MBU-V3 Data Plate 

Figure 1. Modern Burner Unit Location and Description of Major Components.

1 

2 

3 

6 4 

5 

7 

9 16 

10 

12 

13 

14 

15 

11 

17 

8 

Not 

present on 

MBU-V3 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0002 

0002-4 

LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS – CONTINUED 

The associated components of the MBU are illustrated and described below: 

Power Converter 

Converts 120VAC + 4% to 24VDC. Four MBUs 

can be powered through each of two output 

connectors. Refer to the appropriate power 

configuration schematic beginning in WP 0003. A 

power switch turns the unit on and off. The 

converter is capable of operating within the same 

environmental conditions as the MBU. 

The original power converter (MS0150) (Figure 2) 

is no longer manufactured. The newer power 

converter (MS0160) (Figure 3) is issued as 

replacement and may be used with all MBUs. 

Figure 2. Power Converter MS0150. 

Figure 3. Power Converter MS0160. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0002 

0002-5 

LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS – CONTINUED 

Battery Pack 

Contains two sealed lead acid batteries and an 

internal charger. It provides the electrical storage 

to start and operate three MBUs simultaneously 

for 3 hours at an ambient of 60°F (15.5°C) and a 

period of 2 hours at an ambient of -25°F(-32°C). 

The module is rechargeable through the standard 

NATO vehicle power connector in 3 hours with 

temperatures between 60°F (15.5°C) and 

120°F(49°C) and in 5 hours at -25°F(-32°C). The 

battery charger circuit prevents overcharge. A 

three-position function switch controls the charging 

function as well as the voltage supplied to the 

output connector. Indicator lights show the state 

of the battery charge. The batteries and charger 

are assembled in an aluminum frame with handles 

and a cover. The pack is capable of operating 

within the same environmental conditions as the 

MBU. 

Figure 4. Battery Pack. 

24VDC Power Cables 

Two types of power cable extensions are 

available: a 15-ft length for use in the MKT and 3-ft 

and 25-ft lengths for use with all other systems. 

These cables cannot be connected directly to the 

MBU.

Figure 5. 24VDC Power Cables. 

NATO Adapter Cable 

To facilitate the connection between a vehicle and 

the battery module, or between a vehicle and the 

MBUs directly, a 25-ft adapter cable is available 

that is compatible with the power-in receptacle of 

the MBU and battery module, as well as the 

vehicular output connector. 

Figure 6. NATO Adapter Cable. 

Fuel Can Adapter 

This is a standard fuel can adapter (Figure 7) to 

facilitate fueling and draining of the MBU fuel tank. 

Figure 7. Fuel Can Adapter. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0002 

0002-6 

LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS – CONTINUED 

Fuel Hose 

A 20-ft fuel hose (Figure 8) facilitates fueling and 

draining of the MBU fuel tank and is compatible 

with the MBU quick disconnect and the fuel can 

adapter coupling. 

Figure 8. Fuel Hose. 

Extension Cord 

This 50-ft long extension cord provides the 

interconnection between a 2 kW generator and the 

power converter, as well as commercial power 

sources and the power converter. The extension 

cord is also available in a 25-ft length. 

Figure 9. Extension Cord. 

4-Branch Cable 

This cable (Figure 10) permits the connection of a 

power source to four MBU power-in receptacles.

Figure 10. 4-Branch Cable. 

2-Branch Cable 

This cable (Figure 11) permits the connection of a 

power source to two MBU power-in receptacles.

Figure 11. 2-Branch Cable. 

1-Branch Cable 

This cable (Figure 12) permits the connection of a 

power source to a single MBU power-in 

receptacle.

Figure 12. 1-Branch Cable. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0002 

0002-7 

EQUIPMENT DATA

The following technical and identification data pertains to the MBU and selected support equipment. 

Table 1. Equipment Data. 

WEIGHT:

MBU Fully fueled .......................................................................................... 68 lbs (31.8 Kg) 

MBU Without fuel ......................................................................................... 39 lbs (17.7 Kg) 

MBU-V3 Fully fueled .................................................................................... 68 lbs (31.8 Kg) 

MBU-V3 Without fuel .................................................................................... 39 lbs (17.7 Kg) 

DIMENSIONS:

Height ............................................................................................................ 9.75 in (25 cm) 

Depth ................................................................................................................ 19 in (48 cm) 

Width ................................................................................................................ 23 in (58 cm) 

FUEL CAPACITY (Usable): ..................................................................................... 2 US gal (7.6 lt) 

INPUT CONNECTORS:

Fuel ................................................................... Parker Double Shut-off Coupling, BH2-60Y 

FUEL CONSUMPTION:

Rate of fuel consumption: 

Operating at maximum firing rate ...................................................... 0.34 gal (1.29 l)/hr 

Operating at minimum firing rate ......................................................... 0.1 gal (0.38 l)/hr

 MBU continuous operation (full fuel tank) (setting max, min) ..................... 4 hrs; 13 hrs 

MBU-V3 continuous operation (full fuel tank) (setting max, min) ................ 5 hrs; 20 hrs 

OUTPUTS:

MBU Heat (setting dependent) ....................................................... 22,000 to 52,000 BTU/hr 

MBU-V3 Heat (setting dependent) ................................................. 15,000 to 52,000 BTU/hr 

Carbon monoxide (setting dependent) ........................................................... 50 to 120 ppm 

FUEL REQUIREMENTS: .................................................................. JP-8 and approved diesel fuels

ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS: ............................................................................... 22 - 29.5VDC 

ENVIRONMENTAL:

Operating temperatures ................................................... -25°F to +125°F (-32°C to +52°C) 

 Operating elevations to 10,000 ft above sea level 

POWER CONVERTER: 

Capacity. ....................................... 600 Watts continuous, 1000 Watts for 1 Min. at 26VDC

Input Voltage Range. ...................................................................................... 90 to 132VAC 

Input Frequency. ................................................................................................ 47 to 63 Hz

BATTERY PACK: 

Battery Type. .............................. 2 Sealed Lead Acid Batteries, Genesis 0766-2003B0N01 

Input Voltage Range. ..................................................................................... 22 to 29.5VDC 

The tools required to perform maintenance on the MBU are available as part of the systems in which the 

MBU is being used (MKT, KCLFF, etc). In cases where those systems’ tools are not available, the MBU 

Tool Kit is available as an additionally authorized item. The contents of the MBU Tool Kit are listed in 

table 2. 

Table 2. MBU Tool Kit Contents. 

CONTENTS: QTY: 

Bag, Tool ............................................................................................................................. 1 

Bit Set, Screwdriver ............................................................................................................. 1 

Knife, Utility ......................................................................................................................... 1 

Multimeter, Digital ................................................................................................................ 1 

Nut Driver (7/16”) ................................................................................................................. 1 

Pliers ................................................................................................................................... 1 

Wrench, Adjustable ............................................................................................................. 1 

Wrench, Combination (9/16”) .............................................................................................. 1 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0002 

0002-8 

EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION

The MBU and its associated components are configured depending on the field feeding system in which it 

is used and the power source available. Refer to the system power supply diagrams in WP 0003 and 

identify the configuration for your application. Additional configuration information is provided in WP 0005 

and WP 0035. 

END OF WORK PACKAGE
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0003 

0003-1 

OPERATOR AND FIELD MAINTENANCE 

THEORY OF OPERATION 

Electrical Supply 

A 24VDC supply is connected to the power connector (Figure 1, Item 1). Voltage is then supplied to the 

controller (Figure 1, Item 2), which contains all vital electrical circuits. 

Fuel Supply 

The fuel tank (Figure 1, Item 3) is filled either through the fuel tank fill plug (Figure 1, Item 4), before the 

MBU is installed into an appliance, by connecting a quick disconnect hose to the fuel fill nipple (Figure 1, 

Item 5) and the feed adapter on a fuel can, turning the burner control (Figure 1, Item 6) to HIGH (START), 

then pressing the FUEL button (Figure 1, Item 7). This energizes the air compressor (Figure 1, Item 8) 

and opens the tank fill valve (Figure 1, Item 9) (requires electrical power connection). A full tank of fuel 

allows up to a minimum of five hours of operation before the MBU shuts down. A check valve (Figure 1, 

Item 10) prevents fuel from entering the air line during shipping and handling. 

Power-Up 

MBU power-up is initiated by pressing the power switch (Figure 1, Item 11). This tests the indicator lights 

(Figure 1, Item 12) for three seconds. The hour meter (Figure 1, Item 13) back light illuminates to indicate 

the power-up condition. The digital numbers will sequence before setting on actual accumulated operating 

hours. 

Start-Up 

With burner control (Figure 1, Item 6) in HIGH (START) position, MBU startup is initiated by pressing the 

START button (Figure 1, Item 14), which energizes the igniter (Figure 1, Item 15). After two seconds, the 

compressor (Figure 1, Item 8) starts, and the fuel valve (Figure 1, Item 17) on the fuel delivery block 

assembly (Figure 1, Item 18) opens, allowing fuel to flow to the nozzle (Figure 1, Item 19). The vent valve 

(Figure 1, Item 20) on the fuel tank (Figure 1, Item 3) opens, allowing air to enter the fuel tank. The 

compressor (Figure 1, Item 8) draws air through the air filter (Figure 1, Item 21) on the fuel delivery block 

assembly (Figure 1, Item 18), pressurizing the fuel nozzle (Figure 1, Item 19). Simultaneously, fuel is 

drawn from the fuel tank (Figure 1, Item 3) through a 30-micron filter (Figure 1, Item 22) and a zero 

pressure regulator (Figure 1, Item 23) to the burner control valve (Figure 1, Item 24), which regulates the 

flow to the nozzle (Figure 1, Item 19). This fuel-air mixture is sprayed into the burner (Figure 1, Item 25) in 

a fine mist and ignited. The igniter circuit remains energized for 30 seconds. 

NOTE 

Holding down the START button will override the fault detection circuitry, preventing 

shutdown for two minutes. This allows purging of the fuel lines on new units and on units 

that have been completely drained. It also facilitates troubleshooting.

Actions During Operation (After warm-up is complete) 

Adjust the burner control (Figure 1, Item 6) as necessary. 

Automatic Shutdown 

The following are the usual causes of an automatic shutdown: 

• Loss of combustion. If the flame sensor (Figure 1, Item 26) fails to verify combustion, the MBU shuts 

down immediately and the red SERVICE indicator (Figure 1, Item 27) lights. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0003 

0003-2 

• Low fuel. When the fuel tank level float switch (Figure 1, Item 28) reaches a minimum set point, a 30-

minute shutdown timer is activated. Control Panel indicators will light as follows: LOW FUEL indicator 

(Figure 1, Item 29) blinks green for 15 minutes, changes to blinking amber for 7.5 minutes, and then 

changes to blinking red for 7.5 minutes. The indicator (Figure 1, Item 29) lights steady red at shutdown. 

• Voltage. If input voltage increases to 29.5VDC or greater or decreases to 22VDC or less, the MBU 

will shut down, and the VOLTAGE indicator (Figure 1, Item 30) will light red. 

• Electrical Short. An internal circuit breaker is located in the controller (Figure 1, Item 2). The nominal 

rating of the breaker is 15 amps, depending on ambient temperature. Once the breaker has tripped, it 

can be reset by turning the power off and eliminating the cause of the short circuit. It will then reset 

itself in 30 - 60 seconds, depending on ambient temperature. As breakers are typically thermal 

devices, the point at which they open and close is dependent on the temperature of the internal 

components. The breaker is connected in series with the POWER Button. 

Normal Shutdown 

The MBU is shut down by pressing the STOP button. 

Tools and Tool Kits 

The tools required to perform maintenance on the MBU are available as part of the systems in which the 

MBU is being used (MKT, KCLFF, etc). In cases where those systems tools are not available, the MBU 

Tool Kit is available as an additionally authorized item. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0003 

0003-3 

Figure 1. MBU Operational Schematic. 

1 

4 

28 20 10 

3 22 

23 

8 25 

19 

26 

17 

18 

24 

9 

21

15 

5 

14 

6 

7 

11 

12 

29

30 

27 

13 

2 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0003 

0003-4 

MBU Power Configuration for 110VAC Power Source 

Power is drawn from a 110VAC power source using the 110VAC extension cord connected to the power 

converter. From the converter, power is distributed using a 24VDC power cable extension that is 

connected to a branch cable, which is, in turn, connected to the individual burners. A maximum of four 

burners can be supplied by each of the two power converter outlets, supporting a total of eight burners per 

power converter. 

Figure 2. MBU Power Configuration for 110VAC Power Source. 

110VAC 

Power Source

50-ft 110VAC 

Extension Cord 25-ft 24VDC 

Power Cable 

4-Branch 

Cable 

2-Branch 

Cable 

2-Branch 

Cable 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0003 

0003-5/6 blank

MBU Power Configuration for Vehicular or Battery-Supplied 24VDC Power 

Power is drawn from the vehicle 

using the NATO adapter/cable and 

connected to the battery pack. From 

the battery pack, power is distributed 

using a 25-foot (24VDC) power cable 

extension connected to a branch 

cable, which, in turn, is connected to 

the burner. Up to three MBUs can be 

operated at one time. 

Alternate MBU power configuration 

for 24VDC power source shows 

power drawn from the vehicle using 

the NATO adapter cable and 

connected directly to one or more 

burners using a 25-ft (24VDC) power 

cable extension (as necessary), 

connected to a branch cable which in 

turn is connected to burner(s) This 

configuration can be used if no need 

to employ the battery module is 

foreseen. 

NOTE 

A maximum of seven MBUs 

may be connected to a single 

power source. 

A second alternative configuration 

shows the use of the battery pack 

only. When this power source is 

used, it is directly connected to the 

designated burners using a 25-ft 

(24VDC) extension or if 

necessary,directly to the branch 

cable. 

Figure 3. MBU Power Configuration for Vehicular or Battery 

 Supplied 24VDC Power. 

28VDC

NATO Adapter 

Cable 

25-ft 24VDC 

Power Cable 

2-Branch Cable 

TM 10-7310-281-13&P 

CHAPTER 2 

OPERATOR INSTRUCTIONS 

FOR 

MODERN BURNER UNIT 

AND 

MODERN BURNER UNIT-V3 

 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0004 

0004-1 

OPERATOR AND FIELD MAINTENANCE 

DESCRIPTION AND USE OF OPERATOR CONTROLS AND INDICATORS 

GENERAL 

The following illustrations and tables show the location and list the function of each control and indicator 

on the MBU, power converter, and battery pack:

Figure 1. MBU Controls and Indicators (MBU). 

Table 1. MBU Controls and Indicators (MBU). 

KEY CONTROL OR INDICATOR FUNCTION 

1 START Burner start-up. 

2 STOP Burner shut-down. 

3 Fuel Starts fueling function. 

4 Power Main power on/off button. 

5 Firing Rate Adjustment (HIGH (Start) 

LOW) Adjusts burner firing rate. 

6 Run Indicates burner is operating. 

7 Warm Up Indicates burner is warming up. 

8 Fueling/Fuel Indicates tank is filling (during fueling) or full. 

9 Low Fuel Indicates low fuel shut-down sequence active. 

10 Voltage Indicates incorrect voltage. 

11 Service Indicates mechanical malfunction. 

12 TOTAL HOURS Shows accumulated hours of operation. 

Background light indicates power-on condition. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0004 

0004-2 

Figure 2. MBU Controls and Indicators (MBU-V3). 

Table 2. MBU Controls and Indicators (MBU-V3). 

KEY CONTROL OR INDICATOR FUNCTION 

1 START Burner start-up. 

2 STOP Burner shut-down. 

3 Fuel Starts fueling function. 

4 Power Main power on/off button. 

5 Firing Rate Adjustment (HIGH (Start) 

LOW) Adjusts burner firing rate. 

6 Run Indicates burner is operating. 

7 Warm Up Indicates burner is warming up. 

8 Fueling/Fuel Indicates tank is filling (during fueling) or full. 

9 Low Fuel Indicates low fuel shut-down sequence active. 

10 Voltage Indicates incorrect voltage. 

11 Service Indicates mechanical malfunction. 

12 TOTAL HOURS Shows accumulated hours of operation. 

Background light indicates power-on condition. 

2 

3 

4 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

6 

1 

5 

ULTRA

LOW 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0004 

0004-3

Power Converter – Model MS0150 

POWER CONVERTER

POWER

ON

OFF

OUTPUT

A

OUTPUT

B

26V DC

600W Cont.

1200W (1 Min.)

Power Converter – Model MS0160 

Figure 3. Power Converter Controls and Indicators. 

Table 3. Power Converter Controls and Indicators. 

KEY CONTROL OR INDICATOR FUNCTION 

1 Main Power Switch Activates main power. 

2 Output A 24VDC output connector No.1. 

3 Output B 24VDC output connector No. 2. 

4 Indicator Light Indicates when main power is On. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

3 

2 1 

4 
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0004 

0004-4

Figure 4. Battery Pack Controls and Indicators. 

Table 4. Battery Pack Controls and Indicators. 

KEY CONTROL OR INDICATOR FUNCTION 

1 Three-Position Function Switch Controls charging and run function. 

2 Charging Power In Connector Connects 24VDC power to battery pack for 

charging. 

3 Power-Out Connector Provides 24VDC output to power MBU. 

4 Charging Status Indicators Indicate ready, charging, and fault conditions. 

5 Battery Status Indicators Provides indication of percent charge. 

6 Input Breaker (push to reset) Protects input charging circuit from overload. 

7 Output Breaker (push to reset) Protects output circuit from overload. 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

6 

2 

4 5 

1 

3 

7 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0005 

0005-1 

OPERATOR AND FEILD MAINTENANCE 

OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS 

 

INITIAL SETUP: 

 

Personnel Required References 

 

Food Service Specialist 92G (1) WP 0007, WP 0013, WP 0017 

MOS Non-specific (1) WP 0035, WP 0043, WP 0067 

 

INTRODUCTION 

This section outlines the siting requirements of field feeding systems determined by the MBU power and 

fuel requirements, as well as the installation, preparation, and operation of the MBU under usual 

conditions. 

Read all warnings and cautions within this section and follow procedures outlined herein to ensure safe 

operation of the MBU and associated equipment. 

SECURITY MEASURES FOR ELECTRONIC DATA 

There are no security measures for electronic data required for the MBU or MBU-V3. 

SITING REQUIREMENTS 

Siting of the field feeding system may be influenced by the power and fuel requirements of the MBU. 

When using the primary power (110VAC), the power source must be located within 50ft of the power 

converter. When a 24VDC power source is used, it must be located within 25ft of the MBU (or battery 

pack, depending on the power configuration used). The internal location/distribution of the burners within 

each field feeding system must be in accordance with the prescribed layout for that system so that the 

24VDC power cable extension and branch cables can reach each burner. In some cases, limited 

flexibility is possible or additional burners can be connected to the branch cable end plug. Refer to the 

specific field feeding system technical manual listed in WP 0067. 

ASSEMBLY AND PREPARATION FOR USE

Initial fielding and installation of the MBU and associated equipment into field feeding systems, including 

application of modification work orders for the MKT, will be accomplished through contracting resources. 

Subsequent MBU or component replacements received at the unit level do not require reprocessing and 

can be used in the manner prescribed herein, after unpacking. Assembly is limited to the installation of 

new batteries into the battery pack as described in WP 0043. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0005 

0005-2 

ASSEMBLY AND PREPARATION FOR USE – CONTINUED 

Installing MBU into Appliance 

WARNING 

The MBU weighs approximately 58 pounds fully fueled (26.4 kg). Two persons must 

carry the MBU. Lift with legs, not back, to prevent injury. 

The MBU will fit into all field kitchen appliances designed to accommodate an external burner, that are 

found in current and future field feeding systems. It slides into the burner space (Figure 1, Item 1) of the 

appliances it is intended to be used with in the same manner as the previously used M2 Burner. Install 

the MBU into its appliance after performing Before Operation PMCS and after filling the tank (unless 

power fueling is intended). 

Figure 1. Installing MBU Into an Appliance. 

 

1 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0005 

0005-3 

ASSEMBLY AND PREPARATION FOR USE – CONTINUED 

Kits are available to enable the user to utilize the MBU in the Modular Field Kitchen (MFK), Mobile 

Kitchen Trailer (MKT), Food Sanitation Center (FSC), and the Kitchen, Company Level Field Feeding 

(KCLFF). The following information lists the kits and associated components: 

7310-01-455-5718 MFK MBU KIT 

 (81349) MIL-PRF 44485 

 

NATIONAL STOCK NUMBER DESCRIPTION, CAGEC, AND P/N U/M QTY CHECK 

 

7310-01-453-6513 POWER CONVERTER, MBU EA 1 

 (3AD06) MS0150 

 

 OR 

 

7310-01-502-9455 POWER CONVERTER, MBU EA 1 

 (L4703) MS0160 

 

7310-01-455-0665 CORD LONG, MBU, EA 3 

CABLE A (4), 25 FT EXTENSION 

 (L4703) MS0101 

 

7310-01-455-1017 HARNESS BRANCH, MBU EA 5 

CABLE D (3), 2 BRANCH, (24 VDC) 

 (L4703) MS0104 

 

7310-01-458-5060 EXTENSION CORD SHORT, MBU EA 1 

25 FT (110VAC) 

 (L4703) MS0425 

 

7310-01-455-3736 FUEL ADAPTER, MBU EA 2 

 (L4703) MIS0300 

 

7310-01-455-3735 FUEL LINE, MBU, 20 FT. EA 2 

 (L4703) MS0350 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0005 

0005-4 

ASSEMBLY AND PREPARATION FOR USE – CONTINUED 

7310-01-455-5675 MKT MBU KIT 

(3AD06) MS0450 

 

NATIONAL STOCK NUMBER DESCRIPTION, CAGEC, AND P/N U/M QTY CHECK 

 

7310-01-453-6513 POWER CONVERTER, MBU EA 1 

 (L4703) MS0150 

 

 OR 

 

7310-01-502-9455 POWER CONVERTER, MBU EA 1 

 (L4703) MS0160 

 

7310-01-455-0896 HARNESS BRANCH, MBU EA 1 

CABLE B (1), 4 BRANCH, (24VDC) 

 (L4703) MS0102 

 

6150-01-455-1014 WIRING HARNESS, BRANCHED EA 1 

CABLE C (2), 2 BRANCH, (24VDC) 

 (L4703) MS0103 

 

7310-01-455-1206 CORD SHORT, MBU EA 1 

CABLE E (5), (24VDC)15 FT EXTENSION 

 (L4703) MS0105 

 

7310-01-454-1241 ELECTRICAL ADAPTER, MBU EA 1 

 NATO (24VDC) 

 (L4703) MS0250 

 

7310-01-454-1281 EXTENSION CORD, MBU EA 1 

 50FT,(110VAC) 

 (L4703) MS0400 

 

7310-01-455-3736 FUEL ADAPTER, MBU EA 2 

 (L4703) MS0300 

 

7310-01-455-3735 FUEL LINE, MBU, 20 FT. EA 2 

 (L4703) MS0350 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0005 

0005-5 

ASSEMBLY AND PREPARATION FOR USE – CONTINUED 

7310-01-455-5703 FSC MBU KIT 

(3AD06) MS0500 

 

NATIONAL STOCK NUMBER DESCRIPTION, CAGEC, AND P/N U/M QTY CHECK 

 

7310-01-453-6513 POWER CONVERTER, MBU EA 1 

 (3AD06) MS0150 

 

 OR 

 

7310-01-502-9455 POWER CONVERTER, MBU EA 1 

 (L4703) MS0160 

 

7310-01-455-0665 CORD LONG, MBU, EA 1 

CABLE A (4), 25 FT EXTENSION 

 (L4703) MS0101 

 

7310-01-455-1017 HARNESS BRANCH, MBU EA 1 

CABLE D (3), 2 BRANCH, (24 VDC) 

 (3AD06) MS0104 

 

7310-01-509-4453 MBU EXT CABLE EA 1 

CABLE 6, 3 FT EXTENSION,(24 VDC) 

 (L4703) MS0106 

 

7310-01-454-1281 EXTENSION CORD, MBU EA 1 

 50FT,(110VAC) 

 (L4703) MS0400 

 

7310-01-455-3736 FUEL ADAPTER, MBU EA 1 

 (3AD06) MS0300 

 

7310-01-455-3735 FUEL LINE, MBU, 20 FT. EA 1 

 (L4703) MS0350 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0005 

0005-6 

ASSEMBLY AND PREPARATION FOR USE – CONTINUED 

7310-01-455-5710 KCLFF MBU KIT 

(3AD06) MS0200 

 

NATIONAL STOCK NUMBER DESCRIPTION, CAGEC, AND P/N U/M QTY CHECK 

 

7310-01-453-6565 BATTERY MODULE, MBU EA 1 

 (L4703) MS0200 

 

7310-01-454-1249 BATTERIES, MBU PR 1 

 (L4703) MS0225 

 

7310-01-455-0665 CORD LONG, MBU, EA 1 

CABLE A (4), 25 FT EXTENSION 

 (L4703) MS0101 

 

7310-01-455-1017 HARNESS BRANCH, MBU EA 1 

CABLE D (3), 2 BRANCH, (24 VDC) 

 (L4703) MS0104 

 

7310-01-509-4453 MBU EXT CABLE EA 1 

CABLE 6, 3 FT EXTENSION,(24 VDC) 

 (L4703) MS0106 

 

7310-01-454-1241 ELECTRICAL ADAPTER, MBU EA 1 

 NATO (24VDC) 

 (L4703) MS0250 

 

7310-01-455-3736 FUEL ADAPTER, MBU EA 1 

 (L4703) MS0300 

 

7310-01-455-3735 FUEL LINE, MBU, 20 FT. EA 1 

 (L4703) MS0350 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0005 

0005-7 

ASSEMBLY AND PREPARATION FOR USE – CONTINUED 

Connecting Cables to the MBU Prior to Operation 

Depending on the system in use, ensure that either 110VAC commercial or generator power is available 

and properly connected to the power converter, or a vehicle supplying 28VDC power through the NATO 

adapter is properly connected to a 24VDC cable extension/branch cable, or the battery pack. 

Alternatively, a fully charged battery pack may be used to start and operate up to three MBUs for two to 

three hours, depending on ambient temperatures as described in this WP. 

WARNING 

HIGH VOLTAGE is used in the operation of this equipment. DEATH ON CONTACT may 

result if personnel fail to observe safety precautions. 

Never connect electrical equipment unless there is at least one other person nearby who 

is familiar with the operation and hazards of the equipment. That person should also be 

competent in giving first aid. 

External power must be shut off before connecting any cables or performing 

maintenance. 

For artificial respiration, refer to FM 4-25.11. 

Be careful not to contact high-voltage connections when removing, installing, or operating 

this equipment. 

Whenever possible, keeps one hand away form the equipment to reduce the hazard of 

current flowing through the vital organs of the body. Voltages as low as 50 volts may 

cause death. 

Do not stand in water while handling live power cords or electrical shock may result. 

Position all power cables so that they are out of the way during operation and are not 

lying in water. 

Connect Power Cables in the MKT Using 110VAC Power

1. Be sure that the 12-ft crossway cable has been installed IAW with procedures given in WP 0035. 

2. Be sure that all pre-fielding modifications have been done IAW with procedures given in WP 0035. 

END OF TASK 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0005 

0005-8 

ASSEMBLY AND PREPARATION FOR USE – CONTINUED 

Mounting the Power Converter in the MKT Cooling Cabinet (if not already installed) 

1. Open the MKT cooling cabinet door (Figure 2, Item 1) and remove the cooling trays. Locate the 

power converter mounting bracket (Figure 2, Item 2) on the floor of the cooling cabinet. 

2. Remove the two self-locking nuts (Figure 2, Item 3) and slide the retaining bar (Figure 2, Item 4) off 

the shafts (Figure 2, Item 5). 

3. Place the power converter (Figure 2, Item 6) on the mounting bracket (Figure 2, Item 2) with the front 

of the converter facing the front of the cabinet. Push the converter all the way to the back of the 

cabinet. 

4. Place the retaining bar (Figure 2, Item 4) through the handle of the power converter (Figure 2, Item 6) 

and over the two mounting bracket shafts (Figure 2, Item 5). Be sure to keep the bar level, while 

sliding over the shafts, to prevent binding. 

5. Install the two self locking nuts (Figure 2, Item 3). 

Figure 2. Power Converter Mounting Bracket with Power Converter Installed. 

END OF TASK 

1 (cutaway for clarity) 

2 

3 4 

5 

6 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0005 

0005-9 

ASSEMBLY AND PREPARATION FOR USE – CONTINUED 

Connect Cables in the MKT 

1. With the power converter in position on the mounting bracket, connect the end of the crossway cable 

(Figure 3, Item 1) extending up through the floor of the cooling cabinet to the lower output connector 

(Figure 3, Item 2) on the power converter (Figure 3, Item 3). 

2. Connect the main connector (Figure 3, Item 4) of the 2-branch cable to the upper output connector 

(Figure 3, Item 5) of the power converter (Figure 3, Item 3). 

3. Connect the end of the feedway cable (Figure 3, Item 6) extending up through the floor of the cooling 

cabinet to the power cord (Figure 3, Item 7) of the power converter (Figure 3, Item 3). 

4. Pass the remainder of the 2-branch cable through the left side of the cooling cabinet and distribute it 

under the two M59 Field Ranges (Figure 3, Item 8). 

5. Pull the individual branch cables (Figure 3, Item 9) out the front of each appliance and connect each 

branch to the power-in receptacle (Figure 3, Item 10) of each MBU. 

6. Distribute a 4-branch cable (Figure 3, Item 11) along the floor in front of the appliances (Figure 3, 

Item 12) on the opposite side of the MKT. 

7. Connect the main connector (Figure 3, Item 13) of the branch cable to the end of the crossway cable 

(Figure 3, Item 14), extending up through the floor of the MKT opposite the cooling cabinet. 

8. Hang the 4-branch cable along the front of the appliances with cable clips (Figure 3, Item 15) 

provided with the MBU. 

9. Connect each branch (Figure 3, item 16) of the 4-branch cable to the power-in connector (Figure 3, 

Item 17) of each MBU. 

10. Slide the clips (Figure 3, Item 15) left or right as needed to organize the cable along the front of the 

appliances to help prevent the cable from extending into the work area. 

11. With the power converter main power switch OFF, connect the feedway cable receptacle (Figure 3, 

Item 18), located just below the GFCI outlets (Figure 3, Item 19) mounted to the side of the cooling 

cabinet, to the designated power source using the 50-ft (110VAC) extension cord (Figure 3, Item 20) 

provided. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0005 

0005-10 

ASSEMBLY AND PREPARATION FOR USE – CONTINUED 

Figure 3. Connecting Power Cables to MKT. 

END OF TASK

1 2 

3 4 

5 

7 6

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 14 15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0005 

0005-11 

ASSEMBLY AND PREPARATION FOR USE – CONTINUED 

Connect Power Cables with 110VAC Power 

1. With the power converter input switch (Figure 4, Item 1) OFF, connect the power converter power 

cord (Figure 4, Item 2) to the designated power source using the 50-ft (110VAC) extension cord 

(Figure 4, Item 3) provided. 

2. Connect the 25-ft (24VDC) power cable extension (Figure 4, Item 4), if required, to the power 

converter (Figure 4, Item 2). 

3. Connect the 2 or 4-branch cables (24VDC) (Figure 4, Item 5) to the other end of the 25-ft (24VDC) 

extension (Figure 4, Item 4), if used. 

4. With the MBU Power switches (Figure 4, Item 6) OFF, connect the cable branches (Figure 4, Item 7) 

to the power-in receptacle (Figure 4, Item 8) on the individual burners. 

Figure 4. Connect Power Cables with 110VAC Power for Systems Other Than MKT. 

END OF TASK 

1 

3 

5 

4 

6 

8 

7 

2 

POWER CONVERTER

POWER

ON

OFF

OUTPUT

A

OUTPUT

B

26V DC

600W Cont.

1200W (1 Min.)
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0005 

0005-12 

ASSEMBLY AND PREPARATION FOR USE – CONTINUED 

Connect Power Cables Using Vehicular Power (22-29 VDC) Alone 

1. Connect the 25-ft NATO adapter cable (Figure 5, Item 1) (24VDC) between the vehicle supplying 

power (Figure 5, Item 2) and a 2-branch power cable (Figure 5, Item 3). If additional length is 

required, connect the 25-ft (24VDC) extension cable (Figure 5, Item 4) between the branch cable and 

the NATO adapter cable. 

2. Connect the cable branches (Figure 5, Item 5) (24VDC) to the individual burner power connectors 

(Figure 5, Item 6). 

Figure 5. Connect Power Cables Using Vehicular Power Alone. 

END OF TASK 

2 

3

4

5 

6 

1 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0005 

0005-13 

ASSEMBLY AND PREPARATION FOR USE – CONTINUED 

Connecting Power Cables Using Vehicular Power and Battery Pack 

WARNING 

The battery pack weighs approximately 93 pounds (42.2 kg). Two persons must carry 

the battery pack. Lift with legs, not back, to prevent injury. 

1. If the battery pack (Figure 6, Item 1) is used to supplement vehicular power, connect the NATO 

adapter cable (Figure 6, Item 2) to the power input connector (Figure 6, Item 3) of the battery pack. 

2. With the battery pack 3-position function switch (Figure 6, Item 4) OFF, connect one end of the 25-ft 

(24VDC) extension (Figure 6, Item 5) (if required for additional length) to the Battery Pack Power 

Output Connector (Figure 6, Item 6). 

3. The 2-branch cable (Figure 6, Item 7) can then be connected to the opposite end of the 25-ft 

extension cable (Figure 6, Item 5). 

4. The cable branches (Figure 6, Item 8) are then connected to the power-in receptacle of the 

individual burners (Figure 6, Item 9). 

 

Figure 6. Connecting Power Cables Using Vehicular Power and Battery Pack. 

END OF TASK 

1 

2 

5

3 

4 6 

7 

8 

9 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0005 

0005-14 

ASSEMBLY AND PREPARATION FOR USE – CONTINUED 

Connecting Power Cables Using the Battery Pack Alone 

WARNING 

The battery pack weighs approximately 93 pounds (42.2 kg). Two persons must carry 

the battery pack. Lift with legs, not back, to prevent injury. 

1. With the battery pack 3-position function switch (Figure 7, Item 1) in the OFF position, connect one 

end of the 25-ft extension cable (if used for additional length) (Figure 7, Item 2) to the battery pack 

power output connector (Figure 7, Item 3). 

2. Connect the opposite end of the 25-ft extension cable (Figure 7, Item 2) to one end of a 2-branch 

power cable (Figure 7, Item 4). 

3. If the extension cable (Figure 7, Item 2) is not used, connect one end of the branch cable (Figure 7, 

Item 4) directly to the power output connector (Figure 7, Item 3) of the battery pack. 

4. Connect the cable branches (Figure 7, Item 5) to the power-in receptacles (Figure 7, Item 6) of the 

individual burners. 

5. In order to recharge the batteries, a 24VDC power source, such as a vehicle or power converter, 

should be made available during operation of the MBUs. When the battery pack is used as the power 

source to operate the MBUs, the charge indicator lights (Figure 7, Item 7) should be checked 

frequently to monitor the condition of the batteries. To recharge the batteries, connect the 25-ft 

NATO adapter cable to a vehicle equipped with a NATO connector and the power-in connector on the 

battery pack as described later in this work package. 

Figure 7. Connecting Power Cables Using the Battery Pack Alone. 

END OF TASK

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0005 

0005-15 

ASSEMBLY AND PREPARATION FOR USE – CONTINUED 

Pre-Operational Check 

Perform this visual check of the MBU after its installation into an appliance but prior to system power-up. 

This check is particularly important where MBUs have been left installed and are being used after a 

period of inactivity. 

1. Slide the MBU (Figure 8, Item 1) halfway out of the appliance (Figure 8, Item 2). 

2. Check the burner well (Figure 8, Item 3) for debris or the remains of spilled food. 

3. Inspect interior of burner well (Figure 8, Item 3) for debris and clean as needed. Refer to WP 0013 

for cleaning instructions. 

4. Slide MBU (Figure 8, Item 1) back into appliance. 

5. Be sure that the system cables (Figure 8, Item 4) are securely attached. 

Figure 8. MBU Pre-operational Check. 

END OF TASK 

1 

2 

3 

4 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0005 

0005-16 

OPERATING PROCEDURES 

Power-Up Sequence 

When the power cables are properly connected and a pre-operational check has been performed, the 

system is ready for power-up. The power-up sequence should occur as follows: 

1. Ensure power is available at the source (Figure 9, Item 1). If 110VAC is used, be sure that 

commercial power is available or that the generator is running. If a vehicle is being used, be sure that 

it is running. 

2. If 110VAC is used, place power converter switch (Figure 9, Item 2) to ON. 

3. If the battery pack is used, make sure the 3-position function switch (figure 9, item 3) is in the “RUN” 

position. 

NOTE 

When powering up the MBU, press the POWER button just long enough to activate the 

indicator lights on the right side of the Control Panel. Holding the Power button in longer 

than 3 seconds will cause the MBU to enter a Calibration mode that is used for the 

maintenance of certain assemblies within the MBU. The calibration procedure is 

explained in WP 0017. 

If the MBU enters the Calibration function, the hour meter will display “CAL?” To exit the 

Calibration function and return to normal standby mode, either WAIT 10 SECONDS or 

press the STOP button. Pressing the STOP button will immediately return the MBU to 

normal standby condition. After returning to standby, resume normal operation. 

4. Push POWER button (Figure 9, Item 4) on individual MBUs. 

5. Verify that the MBU is under power: Indicator lights (Figure 9, Item 5) will flash for about three 

seconds, and the hour meter background light (Figure 9, Item 6) will illuminate. The hour meter will 

display a series of characters before displaying the actual accumulated number of operating hours. 

6. Observe hour meter reading (Figure 9, Item 7). Note that all required service must be done before 

operation. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0005 

0005-17 

OPERATING PROCEDURES – CONTINUED 

Figure 9. MBU and Associated Equipment Power-up Sequence. 

END OF TASK

1 

2 3 

4 

6 

7 

5 

POWER CONVERTER

POWER

ON

OFF

OUTPUT

A

OUTPUT

B

26V DC

600W Cont.

1200W (1 Min.)
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0005 

0005-18 

OPERATING PROCEDURES – CONTINUED 

Powered Fueling 

The preferred method of refueling the MBU is through the use of the built-in powered fueling function. 

To use the powered refueling feature, proceed as follows: 

WARNING 

The MBU has been designed to operate with JP-8 and certain approved diesel fuels. 

The use of gasoline is STRICTLY PROHIBITED and will create a fire danger and 

potential for explosion. Failure to observe safety precautions may result in injury or death 

to personnel. 

WARNING 

Do not attempt to connect a fuel line to the MBU in the vicinity of any open flame. Ensure 

that the fuel hose connections are made properly to avoid fuel spillage. Prevent a 

possible fire hazard by having rags on hand to absorb any spillage. Failure to observe 

safety precautions may result in injury or death to personnel. 

NOTE 

When refueling, using the built-in powered fuel function, the unit must be under power, 

with the burner turned OFF. 

1. Position fuel container (Figure 10, Item 1) containing JP-8 fuel, equipped with a fuel can adapter 

(Figure 10, Item 2), within 20ft of the MBU to be fueled. If refueling an MBU on a MKT, the fuel can 

must be kept on the ground outside the MKT. The fuel can is NOT to be brought onto the MKT. 

2. Connect the coupling (Figure 10, Item 3) on the fuel supply hose to the fuel fill nipple (Figure 10, 

Item 4) on the MBU, then connect the connector on the other end of the fuel supply hose to the 

hose connector (Figure 10, Item 5) on the fuel can adapter (Figure 10, Item 2). The couplings of 

the fuel hose should snap onto the fuel fill nipple and adapter hose securely. Ensure that a positive 

connection is made to avoid fuel spill and ensure proper operation. 

3. Open the manual vent cap (Figure 10, Item 6) of the fuel can adapter (Figure 10, Item 2). 

4. Be sure that the MBU is connected to a power source as described earlier and press the POWER 

button (Figure 10, Item 7) on the MBU. Check that the indicators flash and the hour meter 

illuminates. 

5. Set the burner control (Figure 10, Item 8) to HIGH. 

6. Press the FUEL button (Figure 10, Item 9). Check that the air compressor starts and that the 

Fueling/Full indicator blinks as the fuel tank fills. The Fueling/Full indicator will stop blinking and 

remain steadily lit when tank is full. The air compressor will also turn off when fueling is complete. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0005 

0005-19 

OPERATING PROCEDURES – CONTINUED 

7. When finished refueling, disconnect the fuel hose connector (Figure 10, Item 3) from the fuel fill 

nipple (Figure 10, Item 4) and adapter hose (Figure 10, Item 5). Connect the two ends of the fuel 

supply hose together when not in use to prevent spillage and avoid contamination. 

Figure 10. Powered Fueling of MBU. 

END OF TASK 

1 

2 

3 4 

5 

6 

7 9 

8 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0005 

0005-20 

OPERATING PROCEDURES – CONTINUED 

Manual Fueling 

The MBU fuel tank may be filled manually through the fill plug, prior to installation into an appliance, or as 

a field expedient if the fuel hose has been damaged. If the MBU is to be fueled manually, proceed as 

follows: 

WARNING 

Do not attempt to connect a fuel line to the MBU in the vicinity of any open flame. Ensure 

that the fuel hose connections are made properly to avoid fuel spillage. Prevent a 

possible fire hazard by having rags on hand to absorb any spillage. Failure to observe 

safety precautions may result in injury or death to personnel. 

WARNING 

The MBU weighs approximately 58 pounds fully fueled (26.4 kg). Two persons must 

carry the MBU. Lift with legs, not back, to prevent injury. 

1. In cases where the MBU is required to be fueled manually, petroleum absorbent material (Figure 11, 

Item 1) will be placed under the burner to catch any fuel that may be spilled. 

2. In the event that fuel is spilled on the ground, immediate action will be taken to contain the spill and 

the appropriate environmental personnel notified. 

3. To fuel manually, place the MBU (Figure 11, Item 2) on the absorbent material on its side so that the 

fill plug (Figure 11, Item 3) is on top as shown. Remove the fill plug. 

4. Fill fuel tank, using a fuel can equipped with spout (Figure 11, Item 4), to the bottom of filler neck 

opening with JP-8 or approved alternate diesel fuel, and re-install fill plug (Figure 11, Item 3). 

5. Clean up any spilled fuel with a rag. Dispose of rag and/or absorbent material in accordance with 

local Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) procedure. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0005 

0005-21 

OPERATING PROCEDURES – CONTINUED 

Figure 11. Manual Fueling Procedure. 

END OF TASK 

1 

3 

4 

2 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0005 

0005-22 

OPERATING PROCEDURES – CONTINUED 

WARNING 

During operation, the MBU produces harmful carbon monoxide (CO) and other gases. 

Carbon monoxide is a colorless, odorless, and tasteless gas. Mild cases of carbon 

monoxide poisoning can cause symptoms such as nausea, dizziness, or headaches. 

Severe cases of carbon monoxide poisoning can result in brain damage, heart damage, 

or death. Although CO has no telltale odor, it may mix with other odors which mask its 

presence; therefore, CO can be present within a mix of seemingly harmless odors. 

To prevent CO poisoning, ensure that the MBU operating space is well ventilated during 

burner operation. Under no circumstances should an MBU be operated in any enclosure 

with all vents closed. 

Start-up 

To start a burner that has been properly prepared, proceed as follows: 

1. Push the POWER Button. The indicator lights will flash on and off for three seconds, and the hour 

meter background light will illuminate. The hour meter will display a series of characters before 

displaying the actual number of hours the MBU has been in operation. 

2. Turn burner control to HIGH (START) position. 

NOTE 

Holding down the START button will override the fault detection circuitry, preventing shut 

down for two minutes. This allows purging the fuel lines on new units and on units that 

have been completely drained. It also facilitates troubleshooting. 

3. Press START button. The WARM UP indicator will light for approximately two minutes. 

4. When RUN indicator lights, MBU is ready for operation. 

Burner Control Temperature Adjustment 

The MBU Burner Control has a LOW and a HIGH setting indicator and can be set anywhere in 

between. The minimum and maximum settings correspond to a heat output from approximately 22,000 

BTUH to 52,000 BTUH (15,000 BTUH to 52,000 BTUH for MBU-V3). 

Each cooking situation is different, and the correct burner control setting for that situation must be 

determined by trial. The correct settings will become apparent with experience and ongoing use of the 

burners. 

Normal Shutdown 

When the burner is no longer required, it should be shut down. To do so, simply push the STOP 

button. This will stop the fuel flow, and the burner will shut down immediately. 

Automatic System Shutdown 

The MBU is programmed to shut down automatically when the following conditions exist (appropriate 

indicator lights will be illuminated). Refer to Table 1 for a detailed description of fault indicators. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0005 

0005-23 

OPERATING PROCEDURES – CONTINUED 

Voltage

This indicator lights when the power requirements of the MBU are not being met. The power being 

supplied to the MBU is either below 22VDC or greater than 29.5VDC. The indicator will light red and 

the system will shut down. The power source should immediately be checked in the sequence listed 

below: 

1. If commercial or generator supplied power is used: 

a. Verify that power source is supplying 110VAC. 

b. Verify that power converter main power switch is ON. 

c. With power converter switch temporarily in the OFF position, check 24VDC power cable 

connections between the power converter, 24VDC extension, branch cables, and MBU. 

d. If problem cannot be resolved, refer to troubleshooting index in WP 0007. 

 

2. If vehicle or battery power is used: 

a. Verify that vehicle is supplying between 22VDC and 29.5VDC, as measured with a multimeter. 

b. Verify that battery pack 3-position function switch is in the “RUN” position. 

c. Verify that the battery pack is operating correctly by checking the Charging Status indicators on 

the front control panel. 

d. With battery pack 3-position function switch temporarily in the OFF position, check all 24VDC 

power cable connections between the battery pack, branch cable, and MBU. 

3. If problem cannot be resolved, refer to troubleshooting index in WP 0007. 

Service 

A fault has occurred in the burner circuitry or mechanical systems that prevent normal operation. The 

immediate and proper operator response is to check the troubleshooting index in WP 0007. 

Low Fuel 

This indicator will light GREEN, AMBER, and RED as indicated in Table 1. The burner will shut down 

when it has run out of fuel. The MBU must be refueled before proceeding. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0005 

0005-24 

Table 1. MBU Fault Indicators. 

Indicator - color Indicator Normally Lit If Lit 

Before 

Operation

If Lit While MBU Is 

Operating

If Lit After 

Automatic 

Shutdown

WARMUP - amber First two minutes of 

MBU operation. 

N/A Normal first two 

minutes of 

operation, abnormal 

after two minutes. 

N/A 

RUN - green After two minutes of 

operation. WARMUP 

indicator turns off at the 

same time. 

N/A Abnormal first two 

minutes of 

operation, normal 

after two minutes. 

N/A 

FUELING/FULL 

 (green) 

blinking/steady 

When fuel tank is 

filling/full. 

N/A N/A N/A 

LOW FUEL – 

indicators light as 

follows: 

After approximately 31⁄2 

hours of operation and 

for 1⁄2 hour thereafter, for 

the times indicated: 

Fuel tank needs to be filled. 

NOTE 

If the MBU is manually shut down while the Low 

Fuel indicator is lit, it will not restart until it is 

refueled. 

- green (blinking) For 15 minutes 

- amber (blinking) For 7-1/2 minutes 

- red (blinking) For 7-1/2 minutes 

- red (steady) On MBU shutdown, 1⁄2 

hour from when LOW 

FUEL initially blinked 

green. 

VOLTAGE - red At an automatic 

shutdown, when supply 

voltage falls to less than 

22VDC or greater than 

29.5VDC. 

Check 

power 

source for 

proper 

operation. 

N/A Check power 

source for 

proper 

operation. 

SERVICE - red Troubleshoot the problem (WP 0007). Attempt a 

restart of MBU. 

HOUR METER 

BACK LIGHT 

- green 

When power is on. 

N/A N/A N/A 

END OF TASK
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0005 

0005-25 

DECALS AND INSTRUCTION PLATES 

The following labels, decals, and instruction plates are found on the MBU components as indicated. 

MBU 

Figure 12. MBU Control Panel Set Up, Operation, and Shut-Down Label. 

Figure 13. MBU-V3 Control Panel Set Up, Operation, and Shut-Down Label. 

 

Figure 14. Control Panel Indicator Label. Figure 15. Burner Control Valve Label. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0005 

0005-26 

DECALS AND INSTRUCTION PLATES – CONTINUED 

Power Converter 

Figure 16. Power Converter Front Panel Label (Model MS0150). 

POWER CONVERTER

POWER

ON

OFF

OUTPUT

A

OUTPUT

B

26V DC

600W Cont.

1200W (1 Min.)

Figure 17. Power Converter Front Panel Label (Model MS0160). 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0005 

0005-27 

DECALS AND INSTRUCTION PLATES – CONTINUED 

Battery Pack 

Figure 18. Battery Pack Control Panel Label. 

Figure 19. Battery Pack Non-Spillable Battery Outer Cover Label. 

Figure 20. Battery Pack Identification Plate.
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0005 

0005-28 

OPERATING AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 

Battery Pack Operating Procedures 

WARNING 

The battery pack weighs approximately 93 pounds (42.2 kg). Two persons must carry 

the battery pack. Lift with legs, not back, to prevent injury. 

The battery pack is issued only with the KCLFF and KCLFF-E field feeding systems. When used by 

itself, it allows operation of MBUs in forward locations as described below. Whenever possible, a 

vehicle equipped with a NATO connector should be made available should the battery pack require 

recharging. Recharging is desirable when the Charging Status indicator reads 40-60% or below. 

The battery pack contains two sealed lead acid batteries and an internal charger. When fully charged, 

it provides the electrical storage to start and operate three MBUs simultaneously for three hours at an 

ambient temperature of 60°F (15.5°C) and a period of two hours at an ambient temperature of -250

F 

(-32°C). The batteries are rechargeable through the standard NATO vehicle power connector in three 

hours in temperatures between 60°F (15.5°C) and 120°F (49°C) and in five hours at -25°F (-32°C). The 

charger has circuitry that prevents overcharge. A 3-position function switch controls the voltage being 

supplied to the output connector. The battery status lights indicate the status of the batteries. The 

percentage displayed indicates the amount of charge remaining. 

1. To use the battery pack, proceed as follows: 

a. Flip the 3-position function switch to the OFF position. Connect the main connector of the branch 

cable to the POWER OUTPUT connector. 

b. Connect the individual branches of the cable to the MBU power-in receptacle. 

c. Flip the 3-position function switch to the ON position. 

2. To recharge the battery pack, proceed as follows: 

a. Turn the 3-position function switch to the RUN position and note the battery status. 

b. If the status shows 40-60% or CHARGING REQUIRED, proceed with charging. 

c. Using the NATO adapter cable, connect the battery pack POWER-INPUT connector to a vehicle. 

d. Start the vehicle engine. 

e. Turn 3-position function switch to the CHARGE position (The Charging Status indicator light 

labeled “CHARGING” will illuminate (yellow) to indicate that the batteries are charging). 

f. The CHARGING STATUS indicator light READY will illuminate (green) to indicate when the 

batteries are fully charged. 

g. When charging is complete, return the 3-position function switch to the OFF position. 

END OF TASK
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0005 

0005-29/30 blank 

PREPARATION FOR MOVEMENT 

When preparing to move from one field location to another for continued operation, the MBU can be left 

installed in the appliance. In situations where the field feeding system and the MBUs will be placed in 

storage or left for longer periods of inactivity, the MBUs should be removed from the appliances and the 

system components placed in appropriate containers. These should be stored in a dry place, protected 

from environmental extremes such as dust and rain. 

System Shutdown 

1. Shut the burners down in a normal manner as described previously. Depending on the situation, 

perform the following steps to disassemble the MBU system, as desired. 

2. Push the POWER button to turn off power to the MBU (the hour meter background light will turn off). 

3. Place power converter (or battery pack) switch to the OFF position. 

4. Disconnect power converter (or battery pack) from power source. 

5. Disconnect battery pack from vehicle (if NATO Adapter Cable is used). 

6. Disconnect 110VAC extension cord from power converter. 

7. Disconnect NATO adapter cable from battery pack. 

8. Disconnect 24VDC extension and branch cables. 

END OF TASK 

END OF WORK PACKAGE

 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0006 

0006-1 

OPERATOR AND FIELD MAINTENANCE 

OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS 

 

INITIAL SETUP: 

 

Personnel Required 

 

Food Service Specialist 92G (1) 

MOS Non-specific (1) 

 

SECURITY MEASURES FOR ELECTRONIC DATA 

There are no security measures for electronic data required for the MBU or MBU V-3. 

UNUSUAL ENVIRONMENT/WEATHER 

Precautions can be taken to protect the MBU and its associated equipment from the effects of severe 

weather and to minimize potentially dangerous conditions. The following steps are designed to prevent 

damage and avoid possible injury to personnel: 

High Winds/Dust 

During operation in windy and dusty conditions: 

1. If possible, position burner with the control panel facing into the wind. 

2. Keep burners and associated equipment under cover or indoors when not in use. 

3. Follow service procedures; inspect air filter after every use, and replace air filter as necessary. Clean 

fuel nozzle at every air filter change. 

4. Ensure fuel storage cans are tightly capped to prevent fuel from being contaminated by dust. 

5. Wipe equipment down more frequently. 

6. Check air vents on fuel regulator and vent valve orifice frequently; clean if necessary. 

Rain/Wet Climate 

During operation in rain and in wet climates: 

1. Check cables for secure connections. 

2. Avoid letting cable connections remain in running or standing water. 

3. Keep components protected from rain wherever possible. 

4. Follow service procedures. Replace air filter and fuel nozzle more frequently as needed. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0006 

0006-2 

Snow and Extreme Cold 

During operation in snow and extreme cold: 

1. Keep battery pack under cover whenever possible. 

2. Protect fuel supply from exposure to extreme cold whenever possible. 

3. Clean fuel nozzle as often as necessary. 

4. Check air vents on fuel regulator and vent valve orifice frequently; clean if necessary. 

5. Do not touch cold metal surfaces with bare hands. 

Extreme Heat 

During operation in extremely hot conditions: 

1. Keep equipment shaded whenever possible. 

2. Do not touch hot metal surfaces with bare hands. 

3. Be aware that fuel expands as the temperature rises. Do not store fully fueled burners where they are 

exposed to the sun for long periods. 

MULTISERVICE TACTICS, TECHNIQUES, AND PROCEDURES FOR CHEMICAL, BIOLOGICAL, 

RADIOLOGICAL, AND NUCLEAR DECONTAMINATION (CBRN) 

WARNING 

For immediate decontaminating procedures, use ONLY hot, soapy water for spot 

decontamination of hot surfaces of the MBU. Shut down and cool the MBU for any 

additional decontamination procedures. DO NOT spray DS2 or any other combustible 

decontamination solutions or compounds on an operating MBU. DO NOT spray DS2 or 

any other combustible decontamination solutions or compounds on any equipment 

surfaces or components where the operating temperatures reach or exceed the flashpoint 

of DS2 (160o Fahrenheit or 71.1o

 Celsius). 

Perform Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and Nuclear Decontamination (CBRN) procedures in 

accordance with FM 3-11.5 as the mission, resources, and tactical situation permit. 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 

CHAPTER 3 

OPERATOR TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES 

FOR 

MODERN BURNER UNIT 

AND 

MODERN BURNER UNIT-V3

 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0007

0007-1/2 blank 

OPERATOR MAINTENANCE 

TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES 

MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM INDEX 

MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM INDEX

The malfunction/symptom index is a quick reference index for finding troubleshooting procedures. 

Associated with each symptom name is a procedure sequence number representing the starting point in a 

troubleshooting sequence. Should any one symptom require more than one troubleshooting sequence, to 

arrive at the most likely area of investigation, the additional starting point numbers are also provided. 

As the troubleshooting activity progresses through to the conclusion of a particular sequence, a reference 

is made to the next logical troubleshooting sequence by procedural sequence number or by referring to 

the malfunction/symptom index to locate the next failure symptom procedure. This type of activity 

continues until successful fault isolation is achieved. 

Table 1. Malfunction Symptom Index. 

MALFUNCTION/SYMPTOM WORK PACKAGE 

 

1. Controller error codes. 0008 

2. Burner will not start or shuts down during operation. 0009 

3. Burner will not refuel. 0010 

4. Burner runs poorly but does not shut down. 0011 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0008 

0008-1/2 blank 

OPERATOR MAINTENANCE 

TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES 

MBU CONTROLLER ERROR CODES 

INITIAL SETUP: 

 

None Required 

TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE 

Controller Error Codes

If any of the internal systems of the MBU experiences a malfunction, an error code may appear on the 

hour meter display of the control panel. The following table lists the expected error codes and internal 

systems that may be the cause of various malfunctions. These error codes are not designed to 

specifically pinpoint the actual MBU assembly at fault but will serve as an aid in narrowing down the 

source of the malfunction. 

Table 1. Controller Error Codes. 

Code Meaning Suggested Action 

ER01 No Flame or flameout See troubleshooting procedure “Burner fails to start or shuts 

down during operation.” 

ER02 Overvoltage Check voltage at power source. Check cables and connections 

between power source and MBU. 

ER03 Undervoltage Check voltage at power source. Check cables and connections 

between Power source and MBU. 

ER04 Tank not full after 

four minutes of 

fueling 

See troubleshooting procedure “MBU fails to refuel.” 

ER05 Flame detected If there is a flame in the burner (when there should NOT be), then 

extinguish it, or allow to burn out before attempting to operate 

burner again. If no flame is present, then check flame sensor. 

NOTE 

This error may also be caused by a faulty external ground. 

ER06 Fuel sensor Check fuel sensor connection and wiring. Check fuel sensor. 

ER07 Invalid key entry Press STOP button to cancel error. Proceed with MBU 

operation. If error persists, then check for sticking buttons. 

ER09 Fuel solenoid valve 

or Vent solenoid 

valve 

Check fuel solenoid connection and wiring. Check vent solenoid 

connection and wiring. Check fuel solenoid. Check vent 

solenoid. 

ER0A Air solenoid valve Check air solenoid connection and wiring. Check air solenoid. 

ER11 Compressor Check compressor connection and wiring. Check compressor. 

ER12 Igniter Check igniter connection and wiring. Check igniter. 

ER13 Compressor or Igniter Check compressor connection and wiring. Check igniter 

connection and wiring. Check compressor. Check igniter. 

ER80 

Controller Cycle power. Attempt operation again. If error persists, replace 

controller. ER81 

ER82 

TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0009 

0009-1 

OPERATOR MAINTENANCE 

TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES 

BURNER WILL NOT START OR SHUTS DOWN DURING OPERATION 

INITIAL SETUP: 

 

Tools and Special Tools Personnel Required 

MBU Tool Kit (WP 0073, Item 1) Food Service Specialist 92G (1) 

 

References Equipment Condition 

WP 0017, WP 0018, WP 0019, WP 0020 MBU Shut down and cool (WP 0005) 

WP 0021, WP 0022, WP 0023, WP 0026 Power disconnected (WP 0005) 

 

TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE 

BURNER WILL NOT START OR SHUTS DOWN DURING OPERATION 

NOTE 

The controller will display the following error codes for the condition of “Burner Will Not 

Start Or Shuts Down During Operation.” 

1. ER01 is a general fault condition of no flame detected. 

2. ER02 indicates a supply voltage overvoltage fault. 

3. ER03 indicates a power supply under voltage. 

4. ER05 indicates a flame detected prior to start-up or improper electrical 

grounding. 

5. ER06 indicates a faulty vent valve assembly. 

6. ER07 is an invalid key entry. 

7. ER09 indicates that either the fuel solenoid valve or the vent solenoid valve on 

the vent valve assembly have failed. 

8. ER0A indicates that the air solenoid vent valve has failed. 

9. ER11 indicates a bad compressor. 

10. ER12 indicates the igniter has failed. 

11. ER13 indicates a compressor connection or wiring malfunction. 

12. ER80, ER81, and ER82 indicate control panel malfunction. 

STEP 

1. Do the sub steps below: 

a. Make sure the burner has fuel and electrical power at the MBU connector. 

b. Check color coding on wiring connections. 

c. Press power button. Burner should cycle through self check. If no lights come 

on, try another MBU that is known to work on the same connector. If this one 

works, follow all troubleshooting procedures in this section. 

d. If the burner that is known to work does not come on, find the fault in the power 

supply system. 

e. Once burner has power and fuel, press and hold the start button for 30 seconds 

to purge air from the fuel line. 

CONDITION 

Does burner start and keep operating? 

DECISION 

NO – Step 2. Yes – Operate burner as normal. 
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0009 

0009-2 

TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE – CONTINUED 

STEP 

2. Do the sub steps below: 

a. Retry starting burner by pressing and releasing start button. If the burner goes out 

cleanly after a few seconds, the flame sensor is probably bad. 

b. Test flame sensor IAW WP 0019. The most likely cause of ER01 is a dirty nozzle. If 

there is some fuel mist spraying from nozzle, but the flame does not sustain itself, replace 

the nozzle IAW WP 0022. 

c. Test air filter IAW WP 0020 and/or change fuel filter IAW WP 0026. 

CONDITION 

Does burner start and keep operating? 

DECISION 

NO – Step 3. Yes – Operate burner as normal. 

STEP 

3. Do the sub steps below: 

a. Too many MBUs may be hooked up to the power converter, or the power converter has 

overheated. Decrease number of MBUs on power converter. 

b. Check battery pack state of charge indicator. Recharge battery pack if necessary or refer 

to generator mechanic to adjust generator voltage output. 

CONDITION 

Does burner start and keep operating? 

DECISION 

NO – Step 4. Yes – Operate burner as normal. 

STEP 

4. Check for flame in burner well or burner tube. If present, extinguish flame or let it burn out if the fire 

does not present a safety hazard. 

CONDITION 

Does burner start and keep operating? 

DECISION 

NO – Step 5. Yes – Operate burner as normal. 

STEP 

5. Have a qualified maintainer check voltage and grounding of power supply. 

CONDITION 

Does burner start and keep operating? 

DECISION 

NO – Step 6. Yes – Operate burner as normal. 

STEP 

6. Do the sub steps below: 

a. The most likely cause is a bad connection. Check vent valve assembly connections. 

b. If problem persists, replace the vent valve IAW WP 0023. 

CONDITION 

Does burner start and keep operating? 

DECISION 

NO – Step 7. Yes – Operate burner as normal. 
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0009 

0009-3 

TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE – CONTINUED 

STEP 

7. Do the sub steps below: 

a. Press STOP button and wait five seconds, then proceed with operation. 

b. If error persists, verify you are entering a valid key combination. 

c. If you are entering a valid key combination and the error code is still present, replace the 

controller assembly IAW WP 0017. 

CONDITION 

Does burner start and keep operating? 

DECISION 

NO – Step 8. Yes – Operate burner as normal. 

STEP 

8. Check connections for the fuel solenoid valve and the vent solenoid valve. Make sure they are 

plugged in properly and the color coding of the wires on both connectors match. 

CONDITION 

Does burner start and keep operating? 

DECISION 

NO – Step 9. Yes – Operate burner as normal. 

STEP 

9. Do the sub steps below: 

a. Check wire connections to ensure they are tight. 

b. Check the colors of the wires from matching connectors, they should match. If 

necessary, replace air/fill solenoid valve IAW WP 0019. 

CONDITION 

Does burner start and keep operating? 

DECISION 

NO – Step 10. Yes – Operate burner as normal. 

STEP 

10. Do the sub steps below: 

a. Ensure compressor connectors are tight and color coding of wires on both connectors 

matches. 

b. If the connection is not the problem, replace compressor IAW WP 0018. 

CONDITION 

Does burner start and keep operating? 

DECISION 

NO – Step 11. Yes – Operate burner as normal. 

STEP 

11. Replace igniter IAW WP 0021. 

CONDITION 

Does burner start and keep operating? 

DECISION 

NO – Step 12. Yes – Operate burner as normal. 
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0009 

0009-4 

TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE – CONTINUED 

STEP 

12. Replace controller assembly IAW WP 0017. 

CONDITION 

Does burner start and keep operating? 

DECISION 

NO – Replace MBU. Yes – Operate burner as normal. 

END OF TASK 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0010 

0010-1 

OPERATOR MAINTENANCE 

TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES 

BURNER WILL NOT REFUEL 

INITIAL SETUP: 

 

Tools and Special Tools Personnel Required 

MBU Tool Kit (WP 0073, Item 1) Food Service Specialist 92G 

 

References Equipment Condition 

WP 0002, WP 0017, WP 0018, WP 0023 MBU Set up and ready to operate (WP 0005) 

 

TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE 

BURNER WILL NOT REFUEL 

STEP 

1. Press stop button, wait 5 seconds, then reattempt refueling. 

CONDITION 

Will the burner refuel? 

DECISION 

NO – Step 2. Yes – Operate burner as normal.

STEP 

2. When refueling the burner and it will not take fuel, check the following steps first: 

a. Make sure the fuel can is full with JP8. 

b. Make sure the fuel connectors are fully engaged. 

c. Make sure the fuel cap is in place with a good gasket. 

CONDITION 

Will the burner refuel? 

DECISION 

NO – Step 3. Yes – Operate burner as normal. 
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0010 

0010-2 

TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE – CONTINUED 

NOTE 

If none of the above faults are identified, the controller will display the following error 

codes for the condition of “Burner Will Not Refuel”: 

1. ER03 indicates an under voltage condition. 

2. ER04 is shown when the refueling process takes longer than four minutes. 

3. ER05 indicates a flame detected prior to start-up. 

4. ER06 or ER09 indicate fault in the connectors to vent valve assembly. 

5. ER07 means buttons were pressed out of sequence. 

6. ER11 indicates fault in the connectors to compressor assembly. 

7. For ER80, ER81, and ER82 indicate controller assembly malfunction. 

STEP 

3. Do the sub steps below: 

a. Make sure the fuel can is full with JP8. 

b. Make sure the white dip tube is in place on the suction feed adapter and it reaches the 

fuel. 

c. Check fuel can vent valve. 

CONDITION 

Will the burner refuel? 

DECISION 

NO – Step 4. Yes – Operate burner as normal. 

STEP 

4. Push fuel connectors completely on. Fuel connectors should hold tight when pulled on. 

CONDITION 

Will the burner refuel? 

DECISION 

NO – Step 5. Yes – Operate burner as normal.

STEP 

5. Do the sub steps below: 

a. Inspect gasket on burner fuel tank and replace if necessary. 

b. Tighten fuel cap. 

CONDITION 

Will the burner refuel? 

DECISION 

NO – Step 6. Yes – Operate burner as normal.

STEP 

6. Do the sub steps below: 

a. There are too many burners operating from the power supply or battery pack. 

b. Battery pack may require recharging. 

c. Decrease number of burners on power supply or recharge battery pack. 

d. Generator may not be outputting correct voltage. Have generator serviced. 

e. If no fault can be found with the power supply, replace controller assembly IAW WP 

0017. 

CONDITION 

Will the burner refuel? 

DECISION 

NO – Step 7. Yes – Operate burner as normal.
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0010 

0010-3 

TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE – CONTINUED 

STEP 

7. Do the sub step below: 

a. Make sure connectors to vent valve assembly are pushed in all the way and color 

coding on wires match. 

CONDITION 

Will the burner refuel? 

DECISION 

NO – Step 8. Yes – Operate burner as normal.

STEP 

8. Check vent valve assembly IAW WP 0023. Replace if necessary. 

CONDITION 

Will the burner refuel? 

DECISION 

NO – Step 9. Yes – Operate burner as normal.

STEP 

9. Check for flame in burner well or burner tube. Extinguish flame or let it burn out if the fire does not 

present a safety hazard. 

CONDITION 

Will the burner refuel? 

DECISION 

NO – Step 10. Yes – Operate burner as normal.

STEP 

10. This fault can also occur when the power supply is not grounded properly. Have qualified person 

check grounding of power supply. 

CONDITION 

Will the burner refuel? 

DECISION 

NO – Step 11. Yes – Operate burner as normal.

STEP 

11. Press stop button, wait 5 seconds, then reattempt refueling. 

CONDITION 

Will the burner refuel? 

DECISION 

NO – Step 12. Yes – Operate burner as normal.

STEP 

12. Do the sub steps below: 

a. Ensure connectors to compressor assembly (see WP 0002, Figure 1, Item 17) are 

secure and color coding on wires match. 

b. If this does not solve the problem, replace compressor assembly IAW WP 0018. 

CONDITION 

Will the burner refuel? 

DECISION 

NO – Step 13. Yes – Operate burner as normal.
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0010 

0010-4 

TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE – CONTINUED 

STEP 

13. Replace controller assembly IAW WP 0017. 

CONDITION 

Will the burner refuel? 

DECISION 

NO – Replace MBU. Yes – Operate burner as normal.

END OF TASK 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0011 

0011-1 

OPERATOR MAINTENANCE 

TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES 

BURNER RUNS POORLY BUT DOES NOT SHUT DOWN 

INITIAL SETUP: 

 

Tools and Special Tools Personnel Required 

MBU Tool Kit (WP 0073, Item 1) Food Service Specialist 92G (1) 

 

References Equipment Condition 

WP 0017, WP 0018, WP 0020, WP 0022 MBU Set up and ready to operate (WP 0005) 

WP 0026 

 

TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE 

BURNER RUNS POORLY BUT DOES NOT SHUT DOWN 

STEP 

1. Do the sub steps below: 

a. Operate the burner on low for 15 minutes. If the buildup is minor, it will burn off. 

b. If carbon build up does not burn off, turn the burner off, let cool, and stand on back end. 

The burner tube can then be rinsed out with a hose. 

CONDITION 

Will the burner run correctly? 

DECISION 

NO – Step 2. Yes – Operate burner as normal.
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0011 

0011-2 

TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE – CONTINUED 

CAUTION 

When rinsing burner tube, do not use a high pressure washer and only spray water into 

the burner tube. 

NOTE 

• Carbon buildup in the burner tube is normal, but excessive amounts can cause 

malfunctioning. Carbon is usually burned off when the burner is operated at low, but if 

the burner is operated on high for extended periods, excessive amounts of carbon can 

build up. 

• When the burner runs poorly but does not shut down, check for and correct the 

following items: 

1. Carbon buildup in the burner tube. 

2. Burner sputters. 

3. Clogged air filter. 

4. Clogged fuel filter. 

5. Clogged fuel nozzle 

6. Faulty compressor. 

7. Burner requires recalibration. 

STEP 

2. Test the air filter IAW WP 0020. Replace an air filter that fails test. 

CONDITION 

Will the burner run correctly? 

DECISION 

NO – Step 3. Yes – Operate burner as normal.

STEP 

3. Replace the fuel nozzle IAW WP 0022. 

CONDITION 

Will the burner run correctly? 

DECISION 

NO – Step 4. Yes – Operate burner as normal.

STEP 

4. Replace the fuel filter IAW WP 0026. 

CONDITION 

Will the burner run correctly? 

DECISION 

NO – Step 5. Yes – Operate burner as normal. 
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0011 

0011-3/4 blank 

TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE – CONTINUED 

STEP 

5. Test the compressor IAW WP 0018. Replace the compressor if the test fails. 

CONDITION 

Will the burner run correctly? 

DECISION 

NO – Step 6. Yes – Operate burner as normal.

STEP 

6. Calibrate controller IAW WP 0017. 

CONDITION 

Will the burner run correctly? 

DECISION 

NO – Step 7. Yes – Operate burner as normal. 

STEP 

7. Adjust flame to eliminate sputtering. 

CONDITION 

Will the burner run correctly? 

DECISION 

NO – Return burner for replacement. Yes – Operate burner as normal. 

END OF TASK 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

TM 10-7310-281-13&P 

CHAPTER 4 

OPERATOR MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS 

FOR 

MODERN BURNER UNIT 

AND 

MODERN BURNER UNIT-V3

 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0012 

0012-1 

OPERATOR AND FIELD MAINTENANCE 

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES (PMCS) INTRODUCTION 

GENERAL 

The following information describes PMCS procedures for the Modern Burner Unit (MBU). The PMCS 

table has been provided to ensure the MBU is in proper operating condition, and ready for use. 

 

SCOPE 

The following work package (WP 0013) contains maintenance procedures that are authorized by the 

Maintenance Allocation Chart (MAC), and the Source, Maintenance, and Recoverability (SMR) coded 

items that are identified in the Repair Parts and Special Tools List (RPSTL). 

MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS/PROCEDURES 

The work packages above identify maintenance functions specified in the MAC. All maintenance 

procedures required to complete a maintenance function are identified under PROCEDURE: in the order 

in which the work is most logically accomplished. 

INTRODUCTION 

Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) are performed to keep the Modern Burner Unit 

(MBU) in good operating condition and ready for its primary mission. The checks are used to find, correct, 

and report problems. PMCS is performed every day the Modern Burner Unit (MBU) is in operation, and is 

done according to the PMCS table provided. Pay attention to WARNING, CAUTION, and NOTE

statements. A WARNING indicates that someone could be hurt or killed. A CAUTION indicates that 

equipment could be damaged. A NOTE may make your maintenance or repair task easier. 

Be sure to perform scheduled PMCS. Always perform PMCS in the same order so it becomes habit. With 

practice, you will quickly recognize problems with the equipment. 

Use DA Form 2404 or DA Form 5998, Equipment Inspection and Maintenance Worksheet, to record any 

discovered faults. Do not record faults that you fix. 

PMCS PROCEDURES

Table 1 lists inspections and care required to keep your equipment in good operating condition. It is 

arranged so that you can perform before operation checks as you walk around the equipment. 

Explanation of Table 1 Columns 

Item Number. Indicates the reference number. When completing DA Form 2404 or DA Form 5998, 

Equipment Inspection and Maintenance Worksheet, include the item number for the item to check/service 

indicating a fault. Item numbers appear in the order you must perform the checks/services listed.

Interval. Indicates when you must perform the procedure in the procedure column. 

before - perform before equipment operation 

during - perform during equipment operation 

after - perform after equipment has been operated 

weekly - perform every week 

monthly - perform each month 

hours - perform at the noted hourly interval 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0012 

0012-2 

PMCS PROCEDURES – CONTINUED 

Item to Check/Service. Indicates the item to be checked or serviced.

Procedure. Indicates the procedure you must perform on the item listed in Item to Check/Service column. 

You must perform the procedure at the time specified in the Interval column.

Not Fully Mission Capable If: Indicates faults that will prevent your equipment from performing its 

primary mission. If you perform procedures listed in Procedure column that show faults listed in this 

column, do not operate the equipment. Follow standard procedures for maintaining the equipment or 

reporting equipment failure. 

Other Special Entries. Observe all special information and notes that appear in Table 1. 

When a check/service procedure is required for both weekly and before intervals, it is not necessary to 

perform the procedure twice if the equipment is operated during the weekly period. 

LEAKAGE DEFINITION FOR PERFORMING PMCS 

It is necessary for you to know how fluid leakage affects the status of the equipment. The following are 

the types/classes of leakage an operator needs to know to be able to determine the status of the fuel 

system. Learn these leakage definitions and remember - when in doubt, notify your supervisor. 

CAUTION 

Equipment operation is allowable with minor leakages (Class I or II). Of course, 

consideration must be given to safety of personnel and equipment. When in doubt, notify 

your supervisor. 

Class III leaks, cease all operations and report immediately to your supervisor.

Class I - Seepage of fluid (as indicated by wetness or discoloration) not great enough to form drops. 

Class II - Leakage of fluid great enough to form drops but not enough to cause drops to drip from item 

being checked/inspected.

Class III - Leakage of fluid great enough to form drops that fall from items being checked/inspected.

END OF WORK PACKAGE 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0013 

0013-1 

OPERATOR AND FIELD MAINTENANCE 

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES (PMCS) 

 

INITIAL SETUP: 

 

Tools and Special Tools Personnel Required 

MBU Tool Kit (WP 0073, Item 1) Food Service Specialist 92G (1) 

MOS Non-specific (1) 

 

Materials/ Parts References 

Brush, Acid Swabbing (WP 0072, Item 2) DA Form 2404 or 5988E 

Rag, Wiping (WP 0072, Item 5) DA PAM 750-8 

WP 0007, WP 0020, WP 0021, WP 0022 

 WP 0026 

 

INTRODUCTION

Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) are performed to keep the MBU and its associated 

equipment in good operating condition. The checks are used to find, correct, or report problems. 

Operator personnel are to do the PMCS jobs as shown in the PMCS table. PMCS are done every day the 

MBU is operated, using the PMCS table. Pay attention to WARNING and CAUTION statements. A 

WARNING means someone could be hurt. A CAUTION means equipment could be damaged. 

Before you begin using the MBU, do Before PMCS.

During use of the MBU, do During PMCS.

After using the MBU, do After PMCS.

If you find something wrong when performing PMCS, fix it using troubleshooting and/or maintenance 

procedures. 

The right-hand column of the PMCS table lists conditions that make the MBU not fully mission capable. 

Write up the faults that cannot be repaired on DA Form 2404 or 5988E. For further information on how to 

use this form, see DA PAM 750-8. 

If tools required to perform PMCS are not listed in procedures, notify your supervisor. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0013 

0013-2 

Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services for MBU. 

ITEM 

NO. 

INTERVAL ITEM TO BE 

CHECKED OR 

SERVICED

PROCEDURE EQUIPMENT NOT READY/ 

AVAILABLE IF: 

1 Before/ 

During/ 

After 

MBU WARNING 

The MBU weighs approximately 58 

pounds (26.3 kg) fully fueled. Two 

persons must carry the MBU when fully 

fueled. Lift with legs, not back, to prevent 

injury. 

Inspect frame (Figure 1, Item 1) for damage, such as 

bent frame members, cracks, dents or broken welds. 

Check for damage to fuel connection (Figure 1, Item

2) and power connector (Figure 1, Item 3). Check 

burner well (Figure 1, Item 4) for debris or food 

waste. Inspect fuel lines (Figure 1, Item 5) for leaks. 

Check control panel (Figure 1, Item 6) for damage. 

Check fuel cap (Figure 1, Item 7) to ensure the 

gasket is serviceable and in place and the cap is 

tight. Check fuel hoses and wiring to ensure they are 

securely connected and not damaged. 

Broken frame weld, fuel 

quick connect or power 

connector damaged or not 

secure. Food waste or 

debris in burner well. Fuel 

leak or control panel 

damaged. 

Figure 1. MBU “Before Operation” PMCS. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0013 

0013-3 

Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services for MBU – Continued. 

ITEM 

NO. 

INTERVAL ITEM TO BE 

CHECKED OR 

SERVICED

PROCEDURE EQUIPMENT NOTREADY/ 

AVAILABLE IF:

2 Before Power 

Converter Power Converter turned OFF. 

Visually inspect the converter (Figure 2, Item 1) for 

external damage, missing or frayed power cord 

(Figure 2, Item 2), damaged control panel (Figure 2,

Item 3) , connectors (Figure 2, Item 4), or power 

switch. 

Converter damaged, cooling 

fins bent, power cord 

missing or frayed, control 

panel or power connectors 

damaged. 

Figure 2. Power Converter “Before Operation” PMCS. 

1 

2 

3 4 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0013 

0013-4 

Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services for MBU – Continued. 

ITEM 

NO.

INTERVAL ITEM TO BE 

CHECKED 

OR 

SERVICED

PROCEDURE EQUIPMENT NOT READY/ 

AVAILABLE IF:

3 Before Battery Pack 

WARNING 

The Battery Pack weighs approximately 93 

pounds (42.2 kg). Two persons must carry 

the Battery Pack. Lift with legs, not back, to 

prevent injury. 

Inspect battery pack cover (Figure 3, Item 1), control 

panel (Figure 3, Item 2), and power connectors (Figure 

3, Item 3) for damage. Check condition and charge 

status of batteries (Figure 3, Item 4). Flip selector to 

“RUN” and observe charge status. 

Control panel or power 

connectors damaged. Battery 

charge less than 40%. 

Figure 3. Battery Pack “Before Operation” PMCS. 

1 

2 

3 

4 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0013 

0013-5 

Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services for MBU – Continued. 

ITEM 

NO.

INTERVAL ITEM TO BE 

CHECKED OR 

SERVICED

PROCEDURE EQUIPMENT NOT READY/ 

AVAILABLE IF:

4 Before 110VAC, 24VDC 

extension and 

branch cables. 

NATO adapter 

cable. 

Inspect the power cables for frayed cable and 

damaged or dirty connectors. 

Frayed cable. Missing or 

damaged power connectors. 

Figure 4. System Cables “Before Operation” PMCS. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0013 

0013-6 

Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services for MBU – Continued. 

ITEM 

NO. 

INTERVAL ITEM TO BE 

CHECKED OR 

SERVICED

PROCEDURE EQUIPMENT NOT READY/ 

AVAILABLE IF:

4 Before Fuel Can 

Adapter and 

Fuel Hose 

removed from 

fuel can. 

WARNING 

Fuel is toxic and highly flammable. Wear 

protective gloves and be sure to wipe up 

any spills with rags. Dispose of rags in 

accordance with Unit SOP and local 

environmental regulations. Avoid contact 

with skin, eyes, and clothes and don’t 

breathe vapors. Failure to observe this 

warning may cause injury or death to 

personnel.

Inspect the Fuel Can Adapter (Figure 5, Item 1) for 

cracks. Inspect the gasket inside the adapter (Figure

5, Item 2) for any cracks that would prevent a proper 

seal. Inspect the hose (Figure 5, Item 3) and fuel 

connector (Figure 5, Item 4) at the top of the adapter 

to ensure that they are securely connected and that 

the hoses are not cracked or otherwise damaged. If 

equipped, check the condition of the manual relief 

valve (Figure 5, Item 5) for proper operation. 

Inspect the Fuel Hose (Figure 5, Item 6) for any 

cracking or other deterioration that would cause the 

hose to leak. Check the condition of the connection 

(Figure 5, Item 7) between the hose and the QD 

fitting (Figure 5, Item 8) for a secure seal. 

Cracked or leaking fuel can 

adapter housing; cracked, 

cut, or leaking hose; broken 

vent cap; broken QD 

connector. 

Cut, cracked or leaking fuel 

hose. Broken QD fittings. 

 

Figure 5. Fuel Can Adapter and Fuel Hose “Before Operation” PMCS. 

1 

2 (on underside) 

3 5 

6 

7 

4 

8 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0013 

0013-7 

Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services for MBU – Continued. 

ITEM 

NO.

INTERVAL ITEM TO BE 

CHECKED OR 

SERVICED

 PROCEDURE EQUIPMENT NOT READY/ 

AVAILABLE IF:

5 During MBU and 

Battery Pack. 

MBU system in 

operation. 

 WARNING 

 

Use caution when performing 

maintenance tasks on an operating 

burner. Serious injury or death from 

burns may result if safety precautions are 

not observed. 

Monitor the control panel (Figure 6, Item 1) of the 

MBU for any fault indicators lit up. Respond as 

described in WP 0007. Check battery charge (Figure 

6, Item 2) frequently. Recharge as necessary by 

leaving charger connected to power. Check charging 

status indicators (Figure 6, Item 3) for Over-temp or 

Low Charging Voltage fault indicator. 

 

MBU out of fuel. 

Battery charge less than 

40%. 

Battery Over-Temp indicator 

lit. 

Indicator lit. Low Charging 

Voltage. 

 

Figure 6. MBU and Battery Pack “During Operation” PMCS. 

1 

2 

3 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0013 

0013-8 

Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services for MBU – Continued. 

ITEM 

NO.

INTERVAL ITEM TO BE 

CHECKED OR 

SERVICED

PROCEDURE EQUIPMENT NOT READY/ 

AVAILABLE IF:

6 After MBU and 

Battery Pack. 

MBU System 

shut down and 

cooled off. 

WARNING 

Let the MBU cool down before performing 

After Operation PMCS. Serious injury or 

death from burns may result if safety 

precautions are not observed. 

WARNING 

The Battery Pack and MBU weigh 

approximately 93 and 58 pounds 

respectively. Two persons must carry 

each unit. Lift with legs, not back, to 

prevent injury. 

Inspect the MBU burner well (Figure 7, Item 1) for 

spilled food waste. 

Check the MBU for evidence of fuel leaks (Figure 7,

Item 2). 

Check Regulator Assembly Air Vent (Figure 7, Item

3), and clean if necessary. Check Vent Valve 

Assembly Orifice and filter (Figure 7, Item 4), and 

clean if necessary. 

Flip selector to “RUN” and check the battery charge

(Figure 8, Item 1). Clean equipment components 

and re-charge batteries if necessary by leaving 

battery pack connected to power. Check cables for 

any damage, and replace if necessary. 

MBU burner well dirty. 

Any fuel leaks in MBU. 

Clogged Fuel Regulator or 

Vent Valve Assembly Orifice 

air vents. 

Battery charge less than 

40%. Cables damaged. 

 

Figure 7. MBU “After Operation” PMCS. 

1 

2 

4 (Top of fuel tank) 

3 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0013 

0013-9 

Figure 8. Battery Pack “After Operation” PMCS. 

Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services for MBU – Continued. 

ITEM 

NO.

INTERVAL ITEM TO BE 

CHECKED OR 

SERVICED

PROCEDURE EQUIPMENT NOT READY/ 

AVAILABLE IF:

7 

8 

300 Hours 

2000 Hours 

Air Inlet Filter. 

Fuel Filter. 

Igniter 

Fuel Nozzle 

Replace the air filter IAW WP 0020. 

Replace the fuel filter IAW WP 0026. 

Replace the igniter IAW WP 0021. 

Replace the fuel nozzle IAW WP 0022. 

Damaged or excessively 

worn air inlet filter or fuel 

filter preventing proper 

operation. 

Damaged or excessively 

worn igniter or fuel nozzle 

preventing proper operation. 

1 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0013 

0013-10 

Table 2. PMCS Mandatory Replacement Parts. 

Item 

No.

Part Number/ 

(CAGEC) 

National Stock 

Number (NSN) Nomenclature Qty 

 300 HOURS 

1 349930K 7310-01-462-4913 Filter, Air Inlet 1 

2 953451K 7310-01-462-6765 Fuel Filter, Pickup (In-Tank Filter) 1 

2000 HOURS 

3 980260K 7310-01-462-4915 MBU Assembly, Igniter 1 

4 928329K 7310-01-462-4919 Fuel Nozzle Assembly 1 

Lubrication Instructions 

There are no specific lubrication instructions required for the operation and maintenance of the MBU. 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0014 

0014-1 

OPERATOR MAINTENANCE 

MBU 

SERVICE 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Materials/Parts Personnel Required 

 

Absorbent Material (WP 0072, Item 1) Food Service Specialist 92G (1) 

Rag, Wiping (WP 0072, Item 5) MOS Non-specific (1) 

 

Equipment Condition 

 

MBU shut down and cool (WP 0005) 

SERVICE 

Drain the Fuel Tank 

The fuel tank should be drained prior to any service operation that would cause fuel to leak from the 

system. The tank must also be drained prior to sending to Field or Support Maintenance. 

WARNING 

Have rags on hand to clean up fuel spillage that may occur, to prevent contamination. 

Do not perform this procedure near an open flame, to prevent fire. Failure to observe 

safety precautions may result in injury or death to personnel. 

WARNING 

The MBU weighs approximately 58 pounds fully fueled (26.4 kg). Two persons must 

carry the MBU. Lift with legs, not back, to prevent injury. 

1. Place MBU on its left side so the fuel tank fill cap (Figure 1, Item 1) is on top. 

2. Connect the fuel hose (Figure 1, Item 2) to the fuel fill quick disconnect (Figure 1, Item 3) on the 

burner, and connect the other end to the fuel can adapter (Figure 1, Item 4). The fuel can (Figure 1, 

Item 6) must be located close to and lower than the MBU to allow the fuel to drain out. Coil the 

excess fuel hose and place on table beside MBU. 

3. Remove tank fill cap (Figure 1, Item 1). Open manual relief vent (Figure 1, Item 5) on Fuel Can 

Adapter (Figure 1, Item 4). 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0014 

0014-2 

SERVICE – CONTINUED 

NOTE 

Ensure the fill cap seal (Figure 1, Item 7) is serviceable. The fill cap seal must fully seal 

for the MBU to operate. Replace a worn or damaged seal. 

4. When fully drained, replace fill cap (Figure 1, Item 1) and disconnect fuel hose (Figure 1, Item 2). 

Close manual relief vent (Figure 1, Item 5). 

Figure 1. Drain the Fuel Tank. 

END OF TASK 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

1 

2 

3 

4 

6 

1 

7 

5 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0015 

0015-1 

OPERATOR MAINTENANCE 

CABLE CLIPS 

INSPECT, REPLACE 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Personnel Required Equipment Condition 

 

Food Service Specialist 92G (1) MBU shut down and cool (WP 0005) 

MOS Non-specific (1) Power disconnected (WP 0005) 

References 

 

WP 0037 

 

INSPECT 

WARNING

Do not attempt service procedures on a burner that has recently been in operation. Let 

the burner cool down before performing these procedures. Failure to observe safety 

precautions may result in injury or death to personnel. 

WARNING

The MBU weighs approximately 58 pounds fully fueled (26.4 kg). Two persons must 

carry the MBU. Lift with legs, not back, to prevent injury. 

Inspect the Cable Clips and Hose Clamps 

1. Inspect each chassis cable clip (Figure 1, Item 1) secured to the MBU frame to ensure that they are 

not cracked, cut, or otherwise damaged. Refer to field maintenance to replace any unserviceable 

chassis cable clips IAW WP 0037. 

2. Inspect each cable clip (Figure 1, Item 2) securing wires to the copper fuel line to ensure that they 

are not cracked, cut, or otherwise damaged. Replace any unserviceable cable clips IAW this WP. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0015 

0015-2 

INSPECT – CONTINUED 

Figure 1. Inspect Chassis Mounted Cable Clips and Hose Clamps. 

END OF TASK 

NOTE 

Assemblies are shown 

removed from the 

MBU frame for clarity. 

1 

2 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0015 

0015-3/4 blank 

REPLACE 

WARNING

Do not attempt service procedures on a burner that has recently been in operation. Let 

the burner cool down before performing these procedures. Failure to observe safety 

precautions may result in injury or death to personnel. 

WARNING

The MBU weighs approximately 58 pounds fully fueled (26.4 kg). Two persons must 

carry the MBU. Lift with legs, not back, to prevent injury. 

1. Locate the two cable clamps (Figure 2, Item 1) that secure the hose and electrical wires to the fuel 

line (Figure 2, Item 2). 

2. Replace the fuel line cable clamp by removing the damaged clamp. 

3. Slide the replacement clamp over the fuel line, hose, and wire assembly. 

4. Engage the locking mechanism of the clamp so as to retain the hoses and cables securely without 

squeezing or otherwise deforming them. 

Figure 2. Replace Chassis Mounted Cable Clips and Hose Clamps. 

END OF TASK 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

1 

2 

 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0016 

0016-1 

OPERATOR MAINTENANCE 

ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY 

INSPECT 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Equipment Condition Personnel Required 

 

MBU shut down and cool (WP 0005) Food Service Specialist 92G (1) 

Power disconnected (WP 0005) MOS Non-specific (1) 

 

INSPECT 

Inspect the Electrical Connector Assembly 

WARNING 

The MBU weighs approximately 58 pounds fully fueled (26.4 kg). Two persons must 

carry the MBU. Lift with legs, not back, to prevent injury. 

1. Inspect the electrical connector (Figure 1, Item 1) for dents, loose or missing fasteners, and other 

damage that may prevent proper connection of a power cable. 

2. Follow the wire from the connector and inspect the quick disconnect (QD) (Figure 1, Item 2) 

connector at the opposite end of the cable for secure connection. 

Figure 1. Inspect the Electrical Connector Assembly. 

1 

2 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0016 

0016-2 

INSPECT – CONTINUED 

3. Inspect the connector assembly (Figure 2, Item 2) for loose wires and frayed insulation. 

Figure 2. Inspect the Electrical Connector Assembly. 

END OF TASK 

END OF WORK PACKAGE

2 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0017 

0017-1 

OPERATOR MAINTENANCE 

CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY 

INSPECT, CALIBRATE, REPLACE 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools and Special Tools Personnel Required 

 

MBU Tool Kit (WP 0073, Item 1) Food Service Specialist 92G (1) 

 MOS Non-specific (1) 

References Equipment Condition 

 

WP 0037 MBU shut down and cool (WP 0005) 

 Power disconnected (WP 0005) 

 

INSPECT 

Inspect the Controller Assembly 

 

Procedures for the inspection of the Controller Assembly begin on the next page. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0017 

0017-2 

INSPECT – CONTINUED 

WARNING 

The MBU weighs approximately 58 pounds fully fueled (26.4 kg). Two persons must 

carry the MBU. Lift with legs, not back, to prevent injury. 

1. Inspect the cross-tip screw head on the face of the locking pawl (Figure 1, Item 1) and attempt to 

open with a cross-tip screwdriver. If it cannot be opened without the screwdriver slipping and the 

screw head is worn, the locking pawl will need to be replaced IAW the section of this WP entitled 

“Replace the Locking Pawl.” 

2. Inspect condition of controller assembly including the control panel (Figure 1, Item 2), harness and 

connector housing (Figure 1, Item 3), and hinge pins (Figure 1, Item 4) for damage such as a broken 

or cracked housing, or loose, missing or bent hinge pins, frayed insulation, loose or exposed wires or 

broken connector on harness. If there is visible damage which prevents normal operation of the 

MBU, replace the controller assembly. 

3. Connect power. 

4. Push the POWER Button (Figure 1, Item 5). The indicator lights will flash on and off for 3 seconds, 

and the hour meter (Figure 1, Item 6) background light will illuminate. The hour meter will display a 

series of characters before displaying the actual number of hours the MBU has been in operation. If 

the background light does not come on, or if the display appears faded, black, or otherwise illegible, 

replace the controller assembly. 

5. Disconnect power. 

6. If the pawl operates correctly but does not lock into place, inspect the pawl arm (Figure 1, Item 7) to 

see if it is straight or excessively worn. If the pawl arm is bent or excessively worn, the locking pawl 

will need to be replaced IAW the section of this WP entitled “Replace the Locking Pawl.” 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0017 

0017-3 

INSPECT – CONTINUED 

Figure 1. Inspect the Controller Assembly. 

END OF TASK

4 

3 

4 

5 

6 

1 

2 

7 

FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0017 

0017-4 

CALIBRATE 

Calibrate the Controller Assembly (MBU only) 

NOTE 

The calibration procedure outlined below is NOT REQUIRED if the controller assembly 

software version is 2.0 or higher. The software version is displayed on the liquid crystal 

display on the lower right front corner of the controller assembly on power-up. 

To check the software version, be certain that the MBU is powered down, then press the 

power button on the front of the MBU. After the normal power-up display sequence, the 

software version will be displayed if the version is 2.0 or higher. If the software version is 

NOT displayed on power-up, the calibration procedure detailed below MUST be 

performed. 

If the Calibration function is selected in error (by pressing and holding the Power button 

longer than 3 seconds), either wait 10 seconds or press the STOP button to return to 

standby mode. 

1. After replacing the controller assembly, perform a calibration procedure by first making sure that the 

MBU is set up with power connected, powered down, and cool. 

2. Press and HOLD the Power button (Figure 2, Item 1) until the power-up routine is complete 

(approximately 3 seconds) and the hour meter (Figure 2, Item 2) displays “CAL?.” 

3. Release the Power button (Figure 2, Item 1). 

4. Press the Start button (Figure 2, Item 3). The hour meter (Figure 2, Item 2) will display “CAL.” 

5. Turn the Burner Control Knob (Figure 2, Item 4) through its complete rotation from HIGH (Start) to 

LOW. 

6. Wait approximately 3 seconds for automatic return to standby. 

The MBU is now ready to use. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0017 

0017-5 

CALIBRATE – CONTINUED 

Figure 2. Calibrate the Controller Assembly (MBU only). 

END OF TASK 

2 1 3 

4 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0017 

0017-6 

REPLACE 

Replace the Controller Assembly

1. Ensure power is disconnected, and open hinged controller assembly (Figure 3, Item 1). 

2. Follow the cable harness (Figure 3, Item 2) from the back of the controller assembly into the MBU. 

Note that the wires exiting each connector are color coded. Disconnect the eight connectors (Figure 

3, Item 3) at the opposite end of the harness. 

3. Remove ground screw (Figure 3, Item 4) on door panel using an adjustable wrench. 

4. Remove snap rings (Figure 3, Item 5) from hinge pins (Figure 3, Item 6) with flathead screwdriver and 

remove hinge pins from frame (Figure 3, Item 6). 

5. Remove the entire controller assembly (Figure 3, Item 1) from system. 

NOTE 

The replacement controller assembly may come with replacement hinge pins. 

6. To install new hinge pins (Figure 3, Item 6), place controller assembly (Figure 3, Item 1) into position 

and insert hinge pins through frame (Figure 3, Item 7). 

7. Secure hinge pins (Figure 3, Item 6) with snap rings (Figure 3, Item 5). 

8. Reinstall the connectors (Figure 3, Item 3) at the end of the controller harness assembly (Figure 3,

Item 2). Be sure to follow the color coding of the wires. 

9. Attach ground screw to door panel with an adjustable wrench. 

10. Close and secure the hinged controller assembly (Figure 3, Item 1). 

NOTE 

The calibration procedure presented in this WP is NOT REQUIRED if the controller 

assembly software version is 2.0 or higher. The software version is displayed on the 

liquid crystal display on the lower right front corner of the Controller Assembly on powerup. 

To check the software version, be certain that the MBU is powered down, then press the 

power button on the front of the MBU. After the normal power-up display sequence, the 

software version will be displayed if the version is 2.0 or higher. If the software version is 

NOT displayed on power-up, the calibration procedure detailed below MUST be 

performed. 

If the Calibration function is selected in error (by pressing and holding the Power button 

longer than 3 seconds), either wait 10 seconds or press the STOP button to return to 

standby mode. 

11. If required, calibrate the controller assembly as described in this WP. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0017 

0017-7 

REPLACE – CONTINUED 

Figure 3. Replace the Controller Assembly. 

END OF TASK 

1 

7 

3 

2 

6 

5 

4 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0017 

0017-8 

REPLACE – CONTINUED 

Replace the Locking Pawl 

1. Take note of the position and orientation of the locking pawl before removing. When correctly 

installed, the pawl should be facing the left and fully extended. 

2. Loosen the mounting nut (Figure 4, Item 1) with a suitable wrench. 

3. Slide the mounting nut (Figure 4, Item 2) and the lock washer (Figure 4, Item 3) over the end of the 

pawl body and over the pawl. 

4. Withdraw the pawl body and trim washer (Figure 4, Item 4) outwards and pivot to allow the pawl to 

clear the mounting hole in the controller body. 

5. Install the new pawl body and trim washer by pivoting it through the hole in the mounting plate in the 

controller body (Figure 4, Item 5). Ensure the pawl is in the same position and orientation as noted 

during disassembly. Ensure the arm is fully extended. 

6. Slide the lock washer and the mounting nut over the pawl and onto the pawl body. 

7. Position the lock washer and mounting nut over the threaded area and tighten the mounting nut with 

a suitable wrench. 

 

Figure 4. Locking Pawl. 

END OF TASK 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

4 3 

2 

1 

5 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0018 

0018-1 

OPERATOR MAINTENANCE 

COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY 

INSPECT, TEST, REPLACE 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools and Special Tools Personnel Required 

 

MBU Tool Kit (WP 0073, Item 1) MOS Non-specific (2) 

Materials/Parts Equipment Condition 

Rag, Wiping (WP 0072, Item 5) MBU shut down and cool (WP 0005) 

 Power disconnected (WP 0005) 

References Fuel tank drained (WP 0014) 

 

WP 0005 

INSPECT 

Inspect the Compressor Assembly 

WARNING 

The MBU weighs approximately 58 pounds fully fueled (26.4 kg). Two persons must 

carry the MBU. Lift with legs, not back, to prevent injury.

Inspect compressor assembly (Figure 1, Item 1) for damage, excessive rust or contamination to the 

compressor housing, mounting plate, hose clamps, vibration grommets, or mounting hardware. Also 

inspect the compressor wires for frayed insulation or exposed wires. 

Figure 1. Inspect the Compressor Assembly. 

END OF TASK

1 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0018 

0018-2 

TEST 

Test the Compressor Assembly 

WARNING 

Do not perform this procedure near an open flame to prevent fire. Failure to observe 

safety precautions may result in injury or death to personnel. 

1. If necessary to gain access to the compressor assembly, remove the four carriage bolts, washers and 

self-locking nylon nuts holding the reflective heat shield assembly to the frame. Lift the reflective heat 

shield assembly away from the MBU frame to gain access to the compressor assembly. 

NOTE 

The air compressor has two different size hose fittings that accommodate two different 

size neoprene air hoses. Note that the upper fitting requires a 3/8-inch ID neoprene hose 

and that the lower fitting requires a 1/4-inch ID neoprene air hose. If the connectors are 

fused, cut the hose close to the compressor to remove.

2. Disconnect air lines (Figure 2, Item 1) from compressor (Figure 2, Item 2) by compressing the spring 

clips with a pair of pliers. 

3. Connect power to the MBU and press FUEL. The compressor (Figure 2, Item 2) should start, and air 

should discharge from the compressor air line fittings (Figure 2, Item 3). 

4. If air discharges from the compressor air line fittings (Figure 2, Item 3), reconnect the air lines (Figure

2, Item 1) and reassemble the Reflective Heat Shield and Burner Assembly. 

5. If the compressor (Figure 2, Item 2) does not start, listen for indications of a locked or damaged 

compressor, such as a loud humming sound, or uneven or unusually noisy operation. If these 

indications are present, the compressor must be replaced. 

6. If the compressor (Figure 2, Item 2) does not start and there are no indications of mechanical damage 

to the compressor, disconnect the compressor power wire harness connector (Figure 2, Item 4). 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0018 

0018-3 

TEST – CONTINUED 

Figure 2. Test the Compressor Assembly. 

1 

2 

3 

4 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0018 

0018-4 

TEST – CONTINUED 

7. Use a multimeter to test for resistance between the two disconnected leads. 

NOTE 

• You may need to turn on your multimeter before selecting ohms (Ω). On some 

models, the selector and power switch are combined. 

• Resistance is a measurement of the ability to resist electrical current. The 

compressor assembly should have some resistance. Infinite resistance or “no 

continuity” indicates an open circuit and a defective compressor assembly. 

a. Turn the selector to the ohms (Ω) setting. If there is a range of values, select the maximum range 

or value. 

b. Connect the red test lead plug to the input terminal labeled for use with volts (V) and ohms (Ω). 

Your multimeter may have other symbols on this terminal but should at the least have the (V) and 

(Ω) symbols. 

c. Connect the black test lead plug to the input terminal labeled for ground or common ground. The 

symbols (-) or (COM) will be shown on this terminal. 

d. Place a multimeter lead tip into each of the holes in the disconnected lead plug. 

e. Hold the leads in place until a steady value can be seen on the display of the multimeter. 

f. There should be continuity between the two leads and a numeric value should be read on the 

display. Replace a Compressor Assembly that indicates “no continuity.” No continuity can be 

identified by the display reading “OL” or “- - - -. “ 

8. Reconnect the compressor power wire harness connector. 

9. Reconnect the air lines to the compressor. 

10. If the reflective heat shield was removed at the beginning of this procedure, install the four carriage 

bolts, washers, and self-locking nylon nuts securing the reflective heat shield assembly to the frame. 

11. Operate the MBU IAW procedures given in WP 0005 and monitor for normal operation. 

END OF TASK
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0018 

0018-5 

REPLACE 

Replace the Compressor Assembly 

WARNING 

Do not perform this procedure near an open flame to prevent fire. Failure to observe 

safety precautions may result in injury or death to personnel. 

1. If necessary to gain access to the compressor assembly, remove the four carriage bolts, washers, 

and self-locking nylon nuts holding the reflective heat shield assembly to the frame. Lift the reflective 

heat shield assembly away from the MBU frame to gain access to the compressor assembly. 

2. Disconnect compressor power wire harness connector (Figure 3, Item 1). 

NOTE 

The air compressor has two different size hose fittings that accommodate two different 

size neoprene air hoses. Note that the upper fitting requires a 3

/8-inch ID neoprene hose 

and that the lower fitting requires a 1⁄4-inch ID neoprene air hose. If the connectors are 

fused, cut the hose to remove. 

3. Disconnect air lines (Figure 3, Item 2) from compressor (Figure 3, Item 3) by compressing the spring 

clips with a pair of pliers. 

4. Loosen and remove two hose clamps (Figure 3, Item 4) and lift compressor (Figure 3, Item 3) off the 

mounting plate (Figure 3, Item 5). 

NOTE 

The replacement compressor may be installed in the existing mounting plate if a 

replacement mounting plate is not needed. Continue to Step 7.

5. To replace the compressor mounting plate (Figure 3, Item 5), remove four self locking nuts and 

washers (Figure 3, Item 6) securing the mounting plate to the threaded studs mounted to the MBU 

base plate (Figure 3, Item 7). 

6. Slide new vibration grommets (Figure 3, Item 8) onto mounting plate (Figure 3, Item 5), insert 

spacers, and secure assembly with four self locking nuts and washers (Figure 3, Item 6) to the 

threaded studs mounted to the MBU base plate (Figure 3, Item 7). 

7. Place two hose clamps onto mounting plate before placing new compressor onto mounting plate. 

8. Place new compressor onto mounting plate (Figure 3, Item 5) and secure with two hose clamps 

(Figure 3, Item 4). Connect air lines (Figure 3, Item 2) previously removed. Note that the 3/8-inch ID 

hose installs on the larger fitting. 

9. Connect compressor power wire harness connector (Figure 3, Item 1). 

10. If the reflective heat shield was removed at the beginning of this procedure, install the four carriage 

bolts, washers, and self-locking nylon nuts securing the reflective heat shield assembly to the frame. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0018 

0018-6 

REPLACE – CONTINUED 

Figure 3. Replace the Compressor Assembly. 

END OF TASK 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

1 

2 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0019 

0019-1 

OPERATOR MAINTENANCE 

FUEL DELIVERY BLOCK ASSEMBLY 

INSPECT, TEST, REMOVE/INSTALL, ADJUST, REPLACE 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools and Special Tools Personnel Required 

 

MBU Tool Kit (WP 0073, Item 1) Food Service Specialist 92G (1) 

 MOS Non-specific (1) 

Materials/Parts 

References 

Gloves, Chemical (WP 0072, Item 3) 

Mask, Disposable (WP 0072, Item 4) WP 0005, WP 0014, WP 0020 

Rag, Wiping (WP 0072, Item 5) 

Sealing Compound (WP 0072, Item 6) Equipment Condition 

Tags, Marking (WP 0072, Item 7) 

 MBU shut down and cool (WP 0005) 

 Power disconnected (WP 0005) 

 Fuel tank drained (WP 0014) 

 

INSPECT 

WARNING 

Have rags on hand to clean up fuel spillage that may occur to prevent contamination. Do 

not perform this procedure near an open flame to prevent fire. Failure to observe safety 

precautions may result death to personnel. 

WARNING 

The MBU weighs approximately 58 pounds fully fueled (26.4 kg). Two persons must 

carry the MBU. Lift with legs, not back, to prevent injury.

1. Ensure the MBU is cool, disconnected from power, and has been drained of fuel IAW instructions 

given in WP 0014. 

2. Open control panel Figure 1, Item 1) to gain access to the fuel delivery block assembly (Figure 1, 

Item 2). 

3. Inspect the fuel delivery block assembly for damage to individual components, including leaking or 

loose fuel hoses (Figure 1, Item 3), frayed or loose electrical connections (Figure 1, Item 4), damage 

to the solenoids (Figure 1, Item 5), flame sensor (Figure 1, Item 6), igniter (Figure 1, Item 7), and air 

filter (Figure 1, Item 8). Check the control knob (Figure 1, Item 9) for free movement. 

4. Close the control panel (Figure 1, Item 1). 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0019 

0019-2 

INSPECT – CONTINUED 

Figure 1. Inspect the Fuel Delivery Block Assembly. 

END OF TASK

3 

4 

4 

6 

7 

8 

9 

5 

1 

2 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0019 

0019-3 

TEST 

Test the Flame Sensor 

1. Set up the MBU for operation IAW WP 0005. 

2. Attempt to start the MBU by pressing and releasing the start button (Figure 2, Item 1). 

3. Begin counting when the start button is pushed. If the flame sensor is bad, the burner will attempt to 

light, but shut itself down in approximately 8 seconds. The controller checks for the proper signal 

from the flame sensor. If the flame sensor is bad, error message ER01 will be displayed. 

4. Press the stop button (Figure 2, Item 2) to clear the error code. 

5. Press and hold the start button (Figure 2, Item 1). Wait for the MBU to ignite and continue holding the 

start button for another 20 seconds. If the flame sensor is bad, the burner should shut off 

immediately when the button is released. The burner will display error message ER01. 

6. Replace the flame sensor if the MBU does not start and displays error message ER01 during this 

test. 

Figure 2. Test the Flame Sensor. 

END OF TASK 

1 

2 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0019 

0019-4 

TEST – CONTINUED 

Test the Feedback Potentiometer (MBU only) 

NOTE 

The following procedure is not applicable to the MBU-V3. The MBU-V3 does not employ 

a feedback potentiometer. 

1. Ensure the MBU is cool and disconnected from power. 

2. Open control panel (Figure 3, Item 1) to gain access to the fuel delivery block assembly (Figure 3, 

Item 2). 

3. Disconnect the feedback potentiometer wiring connector (Figure 3, Item 3) by separating the 

connector at the end of the harness. 

4. Turn the control knob (Figure 3, Item 4) fully counterclockwise. 

5. Use a multimeter to test for resistance between the two disconnected leads (Figure 3, Item 5). 

NOTE 

• You may need to turn on your multimeter before selecting ohms (Ω). On some 

models, the selector and power switch are combined. 

• Resistance is a measurement of the ability to resist electrical current. The 

compressor assembly should have some resistance. Infinite resistance or “no 

continuity” indicates an open circuit and a defective compressor assembly. 

a. Turn the selector to the ohms (Ω) setting. If there is a range of values, select the range that 

includes or exceeds 600 Ω. 

b. Connect the red test lead plug to the input terminal labeled for use with volts (V) and ohms (Ω). 

Your multimeter may have other symbols on this terminal but should at the least have the (V) and 

(Ω) symbols. 

c. Connect the black test lead plug to the input terminal labeled for ground or common ground. The 

symbols (-) or (COM) will be shown on this terminal. 

d. Place a multimeter lead tip into each of the holes in the disconnected lead plug. 

e. Hold the leads in place until a steady value can be seen on the display of the multimeter. 

f. There should be approximately 0-500 ohms (Ω) resistance. A feedback potentiometer that reads 

over 525 ohms (Ω) is unserviceable. 

6. Turn the control knob (Figure 3, Item 4) fully clockwise. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0019 

0019-5 

TEST – CONTINUED 

Figure 3. Test the Feedback Potentiometer (MBU only). 

1 

2 

3 

2 

4 

4 5 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0019 

0019-6 

TEST – CONTINUED 

7. Use a multimeter to test for resistance between the two disconnected leads. 

NOTE 

• You may need to turn on your multimeter before selecting ohms (Ω). On some 

models, the selector and power switch are combined. 

• Resistance is a measurement of the ability to resist electrical current. The 

compressor assembly should have some resistance. Infinite resistance or “no 

continuity” indicates an open circuit and a defective compressor assembly. 

a. Turn the selector to the ohms (Ω) setting. If there is a range of values, select the range that 

includes or exceeds 10,000 or 10K ohms (Ω). 

b. Place a multimeter lead tip into each of the holes in the disconnected lead plug. 

c. Hold the leads in place until a steady value can be seen on the display of the multimeter. 

d. There should be approximately 9500 – 10,000 ohms (Ω) resistance. A feedback potentiometer 

that reads under 9480 ohms (Ω) or over 10,000 ohms (Ω) in this position is unserviceable. 

NOTE 

If the fuel delivery block is replaced in an MBU, the new fuel delivery block will update the 

MBU to an MBU-V3. Each replacement fuel delivery block is shipped with labels and 

decals that indicate that the MBU is now an MBU-V3. 

8. If the feedback potentiometer is unserviceable, replace the fuel delivery block IAW the REPLACE 

procedures in this WP. 

END OF TASK
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0019 

0019-7 

REMOVE/INSTALL 

Remove/Install the Fuel Delivery Block 

WARNING

Have rags on hand to clean up fuel spillage that may occur, to prevent contamination. 

Do not perform this procedure near an open flame, to prevent fire. Failure to observe 

safety precautions may result in injury or death to personnel. 

NOTE 

The fuel delivery block assembly (Figure 4, Item 1) MUST BE TEMPORARILY 

REMOVED from the burner tube mounting shafts when replacing the igniter (Figure 4, 

Item 2), fuel line (Figure 4, Item 3), or air lines (Figure 4, Item 4).

1. Ensure the MBU is cool, disconnected from power, and has been drained of fuel IAW instructions 

given in WP 0014. 

2. To remove the fuel delivery block assembly, proceed as follows: 

a. Open control panel (Figure 4, Item 5) for access to the fuel delivery block assembly (Figure 4, 

Item 1). 

b. Disconnect the fuel line (Figure 4, Item 3). 

c. Remove the ground screw (Figure 4, Item 6) with a suitable wrench. 

Figure 4. Remove/Install the Fuel Delivery Block Assembly. 

1 2 

3 

4 

4 

5 

6 

1 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0019 

0019-8 

REMOVE/INSTALL – CONTINUED 

d. To remove fuel delivery block assembly (Figure 5, Item 1), remove two self-locking nuts and 

washers (Figure 5, Item 2 and Item 3) that secure the fuel delivery block assembly to the burner 

tube mounting shafts (Figure 5, Item 4). 

e. Slide the fuel delivery block assembly (Figure 5, Item 1) off the threaded studs of the burner tube 

mounting shafts (Figure 5, Item 4). 

f. Tag and remove the three air lines by squeezing the tabs on hose clamp (Figure 5, Item 5) with a 

pair of pliers and slide the clamp off the fuel delivery block fitting (Figure 5, Item 6) and onto the 

neoprene line (Figure 5, Item 7). It may be necessary to cut or replace the hose to remove it. 

g. Disconnect electrical connections for the air fill solenoid valve (Figure 5, Item 8), fuel solenoid 

valve (Figure 5, Item 9), flame sensor (Figure 5, Item 10) and igniter (Figure 5, Item 11). 

 

3. To install the fuel delivery block assembly, proceed as follows: 

a. Reconnect the ground wire. 

b. Reconnect the three air lines to the fuel delivery block fittings (Figure 5, Item 6) as tagged. 

c. Reconnect the electrical connections according to the color coding of the connectors. 

d. Slide the fuel delivery block assembly (Figure 5, Item 1) onto the burner tube mounting shafts 

(Figure 5, Item 4). 

e. Install two self-locking nuts and washers (Figure 5, Item 2 and Item 3) to retain the fuel delivery 

block assembly (Figure 5, Item 1) to the burner tube mounting shafts (Figure 5, Item 4). 

f. Reconnect the fuel line (Figure 5, Item 12). 

g. Close and secure the control panel. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0019 

0019-9 

REMOVE/INSTALL – CONTINUED 

Figure 5. Remove/Install the Fuel Delivery Block Assembly from Burner Tube Mounting Studs. 

END OF TASK 

1 

4 

6 

2 

3 6 

12 

11 

9 

8 

10 

5 7 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0019 

0019-10 

ADJUST 

Adjust the Flame Control 

WARNING 

HIGH VOLTAGE is used in the operation of this equipment. This procedure must be 

performed with power connected. DEATH ON CONTACT may result if personnel fail to 

observe safety precautions. Do not attempt this maintenance unless there is at least one 

other person nearby who is familiar with the operation and hazards of the equipment. 

That person should also be competent in giving first aid. Failure to observe this warning 

may result in injury or death to personnel.

WARNING 

This maintenance is performed with a flame in the burner tube. Ensure the area is clear 

of fuel and other combustibles. Be aware of hot, metallic surfaces as they may burn you. 

Failure to observe this warning may result in injury or death to personnel. 

NOTE 

• If the MBU you are using has not been updated to an MBU-V3, do not perform this 

procedure. Upgrade your MBU by replacing the fuel delivery block IAW this WP. 

• This procedure is not exact. It relies on the maintainer’s judgment for what is a good 

flame. Do not adjust the flame control on a burner unless it is necessary. Using a 

properly functioning MBU-V3 burner as a guide is helpful in achieving the proper 

flame adjustment. 

1. Set up the MBU for operation IAW WP 0005. 

2. Open control panel (Figure 6, Item 1) to gain access to the fuel delivery block assembly (Figure 6, 

Item 2). 

3. Remove the control knob (Figure 6, Item 3), by removing the cap (Figure 6, Item 4), and loosening 

the retaining nut (Figure 6, Item 5) ONLY enough to release the knob from the fuel delivery block 

(Figure 6, Item 6). Do not disassemble the knob components. 

4. Remove the control knob (Figure 6, Item 3) taking care not to drop the spring (Figure 6, Item 7) 

located behind the knob. 

5. Using your fingers, turn the brass castle nut (Figure 6, Item 8) clockwise until it stops. 

6. Locate the steel ball (Figure 6, Item 9) embedded in the fuel delivery block body at the 3 o’clock 

position. 

7. If a notch on the brass castle nut does not line up with this ball, turn the castle nut counterclockwise 

until the closest one does. As an aid, mark this notch with a permanent marker or dab of paint. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0019 

0019-11 

ADJUST – CONTINUED 

NOTE 

When finished, the marked notch will be the first notch to the left of the notch in the 12 

o’clock position, as shown in Figure 6. 

8. Rotate the castle nut (Figure 6, Item 8) counterclockwise and count four notches. 

9. Hold in the control knob (Figure 6, Item 3) with the pointer in the 3 o’clock position. The tabs on the 

back of the control knob will align with the notches at the 6 and 12 o’clock positions on the castle nut. 

10. Press the control knob onto the flame control shaft. Once the knob has engaged the castle nut, turn it 

clockwise until it stops. 

11. Tighten the control-knob retaining nut (Figure 6, Item 5). 

12. Set the burner to high by rotating the control knob (Figure 6, Item 3) counterclockwise until it stops. 

Figure 6. Adjust the Flame Control on the MBU-V3. 

1 

4 

3 

2 

3 

5 

8 

6 

7 

Final position of 

notch 

Fuel delivery block 

Initial position of 

notch 

9 

8 

7 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0019 

0019-12 

ADJUST – CONTINUED 

13. Press the start button (Figure 7, Item 1). 

14. If the burner starts, wait for the 2-minute warm-up cycle to complete and the green “RUN” button 

(Figure 7, Item 2) to illuminate and proceed to step 17 of this procedure. 

15. If the burner does not start: 

a. While holding the control knob in place, loosen the control knob retaining nut (Figure 7, Item 3). 

b. Using a suitable screwdriver, turn the flame control valve (Figure 7, Item 4) 1⁄2 turn 

counterclockwise. 

c. Tighten the control knob retaining nut (Figure 7, Item 3). 

d. Press the start button (Figure 7, Item 1). 

16. If the burner starts, wait for the warm up cycle to complete and the green light on the control panel 

(Figure 7, Item 2) to illuminate. If the burner will still not start, go back to step 15 of this section. 

17. Set the burner to low by rotating the control-knob (Figure 7, Item 5) clockwise until it stops. 

18. If the burner stays lit, go to step 20 of this section. 

19. If the burner goes out: 

a. While holding the control knob in place, loosen the 5/16-inch control knob retaining nut (Figure 7, 

Item 3). 

b. Using a suitable screwdriver, turn the flame control valve (Figure 7, Item 4) 1⁄2 turn 

counterclockwise. 

c. Tighten the control knob retaining nut (Figure 7, Item 3). 

d. Go back to step 12. 

20. While holding the control knob in place, loosen the control knob retaining nut (Figure 7, Item 3). 

NOTE 

The flame should be as small as possible without producing an odor or irritating combustion gas. 

A properly adjusted flame will only be a few inches long, but this will vary from burner to burner. 

There will be very little or no smell at all. The flame should be stable and should not go out or 

sputter. 

21. Using a suitable screwdriver, turn the flame control valve (Figure 7, Item 4) to adjust the flame level. 

22. Tighten the control knob retaining nut (Figure 7, Item 3). 

23. Rotate the flame control knob (Figure 7, Item 5) throughout its entire range for low to high. The flame 

should vary smoothly from low to high and should not produce smoke or smell at any setting, if so the 

adjust procedure is complete. If the low firing rate cannot be adjusted to achieve an acceptable 

flame, continue to the next step. 

24. Place the control knob in the 12 o’clock position as shown in Figure 7. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0019 

0019-13 

ADJUST – CONTINUED 

25. Loosen the control knob retaining nut and pull it slightly away from the castle nut. Rotate the control 

knob clockwise until it lines up with the next set of notches on the castle nut. Push the control knob 

into these slots and tighten the control knob retaining nut. 

26. Go back to step 12 of this procedure. 

Figure 7. Adjust the Flame Control on the MBU-V3. 

END OF TASK

5 

5 

5 

3 

4 

1 

2 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0019 

0019-14 

REPLACE 

NOTE 

The air filter (Figure 8, Item 1), control knob assembly (Figure 8, Item 2), 

flame sensor (Figure 8, Item 3), fuel feeder line (Figure 8, Item 4), and 

fuel shut-off solenoid (Figure 8, Item 5) may be removed and replaced 

WITHOUT removing the entire fuel delivery block assembly from the frame. 

Replacement of all other components requires removing the fuel delivery 

block (Figure 8, Item 6) from the burner tube mounting shafts while still 

connected to all wire harnesses and hoses. 

The replacement procedure for the air filter (Figure 8, Item 1) is described in 

WP 0020. 

Figure 8. Replacing Parts Without Removing Fuel Delivery Block (MBU-V3 shown). 

1 

3 2 4 

5 

6 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0019 

0019-15 

REPLACE – CONTINUED 

Replace the Control Knob Assembly 

1. Ensure the MBU is cool and disconnected from power IAW instructions given in WP 0005. Turn the 

control knob to point to the 12 o’clock position. 

2. Open control panel (Figure 9, Item 1) to gain access to the fuel delivery block assembly (Figure 9,

Item 2). 

3. To replace the control knob assembly (Figure 9, Item 10), remove the cap (Figure 9, Item 4), and 

loosen the retaining nut (Figure 9, Item 5) ONLY enough to release the knob from the fuel delivery 

block (Figure 9, Item 6). Do not remove the retaining nut or disassemble the other knob components. 

4. Remove the control knob (Figure 9, Item 3), taking care not to drop the spring (Figure 9, Item 7) 

located behind the knob. 

5. Loosen the retaining nut (Figure 9, Item 5) on the new knob until it is just held in place. Make sure 

that the spring (Figure 9, Item 7) is in place. 

6. Using a screwdriver, or nut driver, placed in the slot of the retaining nut to hold it steady, position the 

new control knob assembly (Figure 9, Item 3) at a 12 o’clock position and press onto the needle valve 

shaft (Figure 9, Item 8). 

7. Press the control knob until the collet (Figure 9, Item 9) on the back of the control knob is firmly 

engaged on the needle valve shaft (Figure 9, Item 8). 

8. Secure the control knob assembly (Figure 9, Item 3) by tightening the retaining nut (Figure 9, Item 5). 

9. Replace the cap (Figure 9, Item 4). 

10. Close the control panel (Figure 9, Item 1). 

Figure 9. Replace the Control Knob Assembly. 

END OF TASK

6 

9 

8 

5 

7 

4 

3 

1 

2 

10 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0019 

0019-16 

REPLACE – CONTINUED 

Replace the Flame Sensor 

1. Ensure the MBU is cool and disconnected from power. 

2. Open the control panel (Figure 10, Item 1) to gain access to the fuel delivery block assembly (Figure 

10, Item 2). 

3. To replace the flame sensor (Figure 10, Item 3), remove the two screws (Figure 10, Item 4) with a 

suitable screwdriver. 

4. Disconnect the flame sensor wiring harness (Figure 10, Item 5) by opening the clamp and separating 

the connector at the end of the harness. 

5. Remove the flame sensor assembly (Figure 10, Item 3). 

6. Install a new flame sensor assembly (Figure 10, Item 3) on the fuel delivery block (Figure 10, Item 6). 

7. Ensure the lock washers (Figure 10, Item 7) are in place, and secure the two screws (Figure 10, Item 

4) with a suitable screwdriver. 

8. Reconnect the flame sensor wiring harness assembly connector (Figure 10, Item 5). 

9. Close the control panel (Figure 10, Item 1).
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0019 

0019-17 

REPLACE – CONTINUED 

Figure 10. Replace the Flame Sensor. 

END OF TASK 

3 

4 

5 

6 

1 

2 

7 

8
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0019 

0019-18 

REPLACE – CONTINUED 

Replace the Fuel Feeder Line

WARNING 

Before proceeding with this procedure, the MBU fuel tank must be drained completely as 

described in WP 0014. Have rags on hand to clean up fuel spillage that may occur to 

prevent contamination. Do not perform this procedure near an open flame to prevent fire. 

Failure to observe safety precautions may result in injury or death to personnel.

1. Ensure the MBU is cool, disconnected from power IAW 0005, and has been drained of fuel IAW WP 

0014. 

2. Open control panel (Figure 11, Item 1) to gain access to the fuel delivery block assembly (Figure 11,

Item 2). 

3. Loosen the nut (Figure 11, Item 3) attached to the fuel delivery block fitting (Figure 11, Item 4) with a 

wrench. Drain any fuel remaining in the line into an approved container. Wipe up any fuel that may 

have spilled. 

4. Remove the opposite end of the fuel feeder line (Figure 11, Item 5) by loosening the nut (Figure 11,

Item 6) attached to the regulator assembly fitting (Figure 11, Item 7). 

5. Remove the fuel feeder line (Figure 11, Item 5). 

6. Install a serviceable fuel feeder line (Figure 11, Item 5) by threading the nut (Figure 11, Item 3) onto 

the fitting (Figure 11, Item 4) of the fuel delivery block (Figure 11, Item 8). Tighten using a wrench. 

7. Install the nut (Figure 11, Item 6) on the opposite end of the fuel feeder line (Figure 11, Item 5) onto 

the regulator assembly fitting (Figure 11, Item 7). Tighten using a wrench. 

8. Close the control panel (Figure 11, Item 1). 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0019 

0019-19 

REPLACE – CONTINUED 

 

Figure 11. Replace the Fuel Feeder Line. 

END OF TASK 

3 

4 

6 7 

8 

5 

1 

2 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0019 

0019-20 

REPLACE – CONTINUED 

Replace the Air/Fill Solenoid Valve

1. Ensure the MBU is cool and disconnected from power. 

2. Remove the fuel delivery block IAW the procedures in the REMOVE/INSTALL section of this WP. 

3. To replace the air/fill solenoid valve (Figure 12, Item 3), grasp air filter (Figure 12, Item 4) and rotate 

counterclockwise (hold body of solenoid to prevent turning) to unscrew air filter from the threaded 

fitting on the air/fill solenoid valve (Figure 12, Item 3). 

4. Disconnect the solenoid valve wiring (Figure 12, Item 5) by separating the connector at the end of the 

harness. 

5. Loosen and remove the retaining screw (Figure 12, Item 6) securing the air/fill solenoid valve (Figure 

12, Item 3) to the fuel delivery block (Figure 12, Item 7) with a flat blade screwdriver. It may be 

necessary to grasp the body of the solenoid valve to keep it from turning. Note the position of the 

wires exiting the solenoid for proper reconnection later in the procedure. 

6. A small spring tensioned plunger (Figure 12, Item 8) is located inside the solenoid valve (Figure 12, 

Item 3). Take care not to drop the plunger into the MBU. Carefully remove the solenoid valve 

assembly by pulling straight out. 

7. Install a serviceable air/fill solenoid valve (Figure 12, Item 3) in the fuel delivery block (Figure 12, Item 

7). Be certain that the plunger (Figure 12, Item 8) is installed in the solenoid body so that the end of 

the plunger with the spring is inserted into the solenoid body first. The end of the plunger with the 

small rubber pad should face out of the solenoid. 

8. The base of the solenoid valve (Figure 12, Item 3) should be flush with the fuel delivery block (Figure 

12, Item 7) when properly installed. Rotate the body of the solenoid so that the wiring (Figure 12, 

Item 5) is oriented as it was prior to removal. 

9. Reinstall the retaining screw (Figure 12, Item 6) through the body of the solenoid (Figure 12, Item 3) 

and tighten. Reconnect the connector at the end of the solenoid wiring (Figure 12, Item 5). 

10. Screw the air filter (Figure 12, Item 4) onto the air/fill solenoid valve (Figure 12, Item 3) until it is 

securely in place. Hand tighten the air filter. 

11. Close the control panel (Figure 12, Item 1). 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0019 

0019-21 

REPLACE – CONTINUED 

Figure 12. Replacement of Air/Fill Solenoid Valve (MBU-V3 shown). 

END OF TASK

3 

5 

7 

8 

4 

1 

2 

6 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0019 

0019-22 

REPLACE – CONTINUED 

Replace the Fuel Shut-Off Solenoid Valve

WARNING 

Have rags on hand to clean up fuel spillage that may occur to prevent contamination. Do 

not perform this procedure near an open flame to prevent fire. Failure to observe safety 

precautions may result in injury or death to personnel.

1. Ensure the MBU is cool and disconnected from power. 

2. Open control panel (Figure 13, Item 1) to gain access to the fuel delivery block assembly (Figure 13, 

Item 2). 

3. To replace the fuel shut-off solenoid valve (Figure 13, Item 3), disconnect the solenoid valve wiring 

(Figure 14, Item 4) by separating the connector at the end of the harness. 

4. Loosen and remove the nut (Figure 13, Item 5) on the end of the solenoid valve (Figure 13, Item 3). It 

may be necessary to grasp the body of the solenoid valve to keep it from turning. 

5. Loosen and remove the retaining screw (Figure 13, Item 6) securing the fuel shut-off solenoid valve 

(Figure 13, Item 3) to the fuel delivery block (Figure 13, Item 7) with a suitable screwdriver. It may be 

necessary to grasp the body of the solenoid valve to keep it from turning. Take note of the orientation 

of the wiring (Figure 13, Item 4) so that it may be installed in its proper position later in this procedure. 

6. A small spring tensioned plunger is located inside the solenoid valve (Figure 13, Item 3). Take care 

not to drop the plunger into the MBU. Carefully remove the solenoid valve assembly by pulling 

straight out. 

7. Install a serviceable fuel shut-off solenoid valve (Figure 13, Item 3) in the fuel delivery block (Figure 

13, Item 7). Be certain that the plunger is installed in the solenoid body so that the end of the plunger 

with the spring is inserted into the solenoid body first. The end of the plunger with the small rubber 

pad should face out of the solenoid. 

8. The base of the solenoid valve (Figure 13, Item 3) should be flush with the fuel delivery block (Figure 

13, Item 7) when properly installed. Rotate the body of the solenoid so that the wiring harness 

assembly (Figure 13, Item 4) is as it was prior to removal. 

9. Reinstall the retaining screw (Figure 13, Item 6) through the body of the solenoid and tighten. 

10. Reinstall the nut (Figure 13, Item 5) and tighten. 

11. Reconnect the connector at the end of the solenoid wiring (Figure 13, Item 4). 

12. Close the control panel (Figure 13, Item 1). 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0019 

0019-23 

REPLACE – CONTINUED 

Figure 13. Replace the Fuel Shut-Off Solenoid Valve (MBU-V3 shown). 

END OF TASK

3 

4 

6 

7 

5 

1 

2 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0019 

0019-24 

REPLACE – CONTINUED 

Replace the Air Line to Vent Valve 

WARNING 

Have rags on hand to clean up fuel spillage that may occur to prevent contamination. Do 

not perform this procedure near an open flame to prevent fire. Failure to observe safety 

precautions may result in injury or death to personnel. 

1. To replace the air line (Figure 14, Item 1), temporarily remove the fuel delivery block (Figure 14, Item 

2) from the burner tube mounting studs IAW procedures given in the section of this WP entitled 

“Remove/Install the Fuel Delivery Block.” 

2. Squeeze the tabs on hose clamp (Figure 14, Item 3) with a pair of pliers and slide the clamp off the 

elbow fitting (Figure 14, Item 4) on the fuel delivery block and onto the neoprene line (Figure 14, Item 

1). If it is necessary to replace the fitting, remove with a wrench and install a new fitting. 

3. Squeeze the tabs on hose clamp (Figure 14, Item 5) with a pair of pliers and slide the clamp off the 

elbow fitting (Figure 14, Item 4) on the fuel delivery block and onto the air line (Figure 14, Item 1). 

4. After removing the clamp, grasp the end of the air line (Figure 14, Item 1) connected to the elbow 

fitting (Figure 14, Item 4) on the fuel delivery block and pull, while wiggling from side to side, until the 

line is free. 

5. Remove the end of the air line (Figure 14, Item 1) connected to the vent valve fitting (Figure 14, Item 

6) in a similar manner. If the vent valve fitting needs replacement, unscrew and install a new vent 

valve fitting. 

6. Using the damaged air line (Figure 14, Item 1) as a size guide, cut a new piece of fuel line of the 

same length from the bulk supply of neoprene hose. 

7. Remove the clamps (Figure 14, Items 3 and 5) from the damaged air line and install on the new line, 

sliding each about 1-1/2 to 2 inches from the end. 

8. Install the serviceable line, pushing one end fully onto the elbow fitting (Figure 14, Item 4) on the fuel 

delivery block and the other end onto the vent valve fitting (Figure 14, Item 6). 

9. Squeeze the tabs on the clamps (Figure 14, Items 3 and 5) with a pair of pliers and slide one clamp 

up on the elbow fitting (Figure 14, Item 4) on the fuel delivery block and the other end onto the vent 

assembly fitting (Figure 14, Item 6). Be sure to position the tabs so that they can be easily accessed 

should service be required at a later date. 

10. Install the fuel delivery block (Figure 14, Item 2) onto the burner tube mounting studs IAW procedures 

given in this WP entitled “Remove/Install the Fuel Delivery Block.”
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0019 

0019-25 

REPLACE – CONTINUED 

Figure 14. Replace the Air Line to Vent Valve. 

END OF TASK 

1 

1 

5 

3 

6 

4 

2 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0019 

0019-26 

REPLACE – CONTINUED 

Replace Air Line to Compressor 

NOTE

There are two neoprene air lines extending from the fuel delivery block assembly to the 

air compressor. Note that the two lines are different sizes. The replacement procedure 

for both air lines is identical. 

1. Ensure the MBU is cool, disconnected from power IAW WP 0005, and has been drained of fuel IAW 

WP 0014. 

2. Open control panel (Figure 15, Item 1) to gain access to the fuel delivery block assembly (Figure 15, 

Item 2). Remove the fuel delivery block IAW the section of this WP titled “Remove/Install Fuel 

Delivery Block.” 

3. To replace either of the neoprene air lines (Figure 15, Item 3), squeeze the tabs on hose clamp 

(Figure 16, Item 4) with a pair of pliers and slide the clamp off the fuel delivery block fitting (Figure 16, 

Item 5) and onto the air line. 

4. Squeeze the tabs on hose clamp (Figure 15, Item 6) with a pair of pliers and slide the clamp off the 

air compressor fitting (Figure 15, Item 7) and onto the air line (Figure 15, Item 3). 

5. After removing the clamp, grasp the end of the air line (Figure 15, Item 3) connected to the fuel 

delivery block fitting (Figure 15, Item 5) and pull while wiggling from side to side, until the line is free. 

If any of the fuel delivery block fittings require replacement, simply loosen with an open end wrench 

and install a new fitting. 

6. Remove the end of the air line (Figure 15, Item 3) connected to the air compressor fitting (Figure 15, 

Item 7) in a similar manner. If any of the air compressor fittings require replacement, simply loosen 

with an open end wrench and install a new fitting. 

NOTE 

The neoprene air line connected to the upper fitting on the compressor is 3

/8-inch ID. The 

neoprene air line connected to the lower fitting on the compressor is 1⁄4-inch ID. 

7. Using the damaged air line (Figure 15, Item 3) as a size guide, cut a new piece of air line of the same 

length from the bulk supply of neoprene hose. Remove the clamps (Figure 15, Items 4 and 6) from 

the damaged air line and install on the new line, sliding each about 1.5 to 2 inches from the end. 

8. Install the serviceable line, pushing one end fully onto the fuel delivery block fitting (Figure 15, Item 5) 

and the other end onto the air compressor fitting (Figure 15, Item 7). 

9. Squeeze the tabs on the clamps (Figure 15, Item 4 and Item 6) with a pair of pliers and slide one 

clamp up on the fuel delivery block fitting (Figure 15, Item 5) and the other end onto the air 

compressor fitting (Figure 15, Item 7). Be sure to position the tabs so that they can be easily 

accessed should service be required at a later date. 

10. Close the control panel (Figure 15, Item 1). 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0019 

0019-27 

REPLACE – CONTINUED 

 

Figure 15. Replace the Air Line to Compressor. 

END OF TASK

4 

6 7 

2 

3 

5 

1 

2 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0019 

0019-28 

REPLACE – CONTINUED 

Replace the Fuel Delivery Block Assembly 

WARNING 

Have rags on hand to clean up fuel spillage that may occur to prevent contamination. Do 

not perform this procedure near an open flame to prevent fire. Failure to observe safety 

precautions may result in injury or death to personnel.

NOTE 

There are no field serviceable items within the fuel delivery block. 

1. Remove fuel delivery block (Figure 16, Item 1) from the burner tube mounting studs IAW procedures 

given in this WP entitled “Remove/Install the Fuel Delivery Block.” 

2. To replace the entire fuel delivery block assembly (Figure 16, Item 1), disconnect the fuel line (Figure 

16, Item 2), fuel feeder line (Figure 16, Item 3), and air hoses (Figure 16, Items 4 and 5) from the fuel 

delivery block assembly. 

3. Disconnect the air/fill solenoid harness connector (Figure 16, Item 6) and the fuel shut-off solenoid 

harness connector (Figure 16, Item 7). 

4. Disconnect the flame sensor harness connector (Figure 16, Item 8). 

5. Disconnect the feedback potentiometer, if fitted (MBU only) (Figure 16, Item 9). 

6. Disconnect the igniter assembly (Figure 16, Item 10). Remove the control knob (Figure 16, Item 11) 

and the ground wire (Figure 16, Item 12). 

7. Remove the fuel delivery block assembly from the MBU frame (Figure 16, Item 13). 

8. To install the serviceable fuel delivery block assembly (Figure 16, Item 1), place the assembly in the 

MBU frame (Figure 16, Item 13) with the control knob (Figure 16, Item 11) facing toward the front of 

the MBU. 

NOTE 

The air line connected to the upper fitting on the compressor is 3

/8-inch ID. The air line 

connected to the lower fitting on the compressor is 1⁄4-inch ID. 

9. Connect the fuel line (Figure 16, Item 2), fuel feeder line (Figure 16, Item 3) and air hoses (Figure 16, 

Items 4 and 5) to the fuel delivery block assembly (Figure 16, Item 1). Note that neoprene hoses are 

two sizes. Install correct size hose on correct size fitting. 

10. Connect the air/fill solenoid harness connector (Figure 16, Item 6) and the fuel shut-off solenoid 

harness connector (Figure 16, Item 7). 

11. Connect the feedback potentiometer, if fitted (MBU only) (Figure 16, Item 9). 

12. Connect the flame sensor harness connector (Figure 16, Item 8). This will not be connected after 

replacement with a MBU-V3 fuel delivery block.
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0019 

0019-29/30 blank 

REPLACE – CONTINUED 

13. Install the ground wire (Figure 16, Item 12). 

14. Install the fuel delivery block (Figure 16, Item 1) onto the burner tube mounting studs IAW procedures 

given in this WP entitled “Remove/Install the Fuel Delivery Block.” 

Figure 16. Replace the Fuel Delivery Block Assembly. 

END OF TASK 

END OF WORK PACKAGE

1 

2 

5 

7 

8 

11 

13 

10

12 4 

6 

3 

9 

(MBU only) 

 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0020 

0020-1 

OPERATOR MAINTENANCE 

AIR FILTER 

TEST, REPLACE 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Personnel Required Equipment Condition 

 

Food Service Specialist 92G (1) MBU shut down and cool (WP 0005)

MOS Non-specific (1) 

 

TEST 

Air Filter Test 

1. Start the MBU and observe the flame quality. 

2. Open the control panel. 

3. Loosen and remove air filter while the MBU is operating. 

4. If the flame quality improves, shut down the MBU and replace air filter. 

5. If flame quality remains constant, air filter does not require replacement. 

END OF TASK 

REPLACE 

Replace the Air Filter 

The air filter is to be replaced after 300 hours of operation. Replace the air filter more often in dusty or 

extremely humid conditions or whenever recommended as part of the troubleshooting procedures. 

WARNING 

The MBU weighs approximately 58 pounds fully fueled (26.4 kg). Two persons must 

carry the MBU. Lift with legs, not back, to prevent injury. 

1. Turn locking latch (Figure 1, Item 1) on top of front panel (Figure 1, Item 2) counterclockwise. Lower 

front panel of MBU to gain access to fuel delivery block (Figure 1, Item 3) and Air Filter (Figure 1,

Item 4). 

2. Grasp air filter (Figure 1, Item 4) and rotate counterclockwise (hold body of solenoid to prevent 

turning) to unscrew from the threaded fitting (Figure 1, Item 5) on the air/fill solenoid valve of the fuel 

delivery block (Figure 1, Item 3). 

3. Screw the new air filter (Figure 1, Item 4) onto the threaded fitting (Figure 1, Item 5) until it is securely 

in place. Hand tighten the air filter. 

4. Close and secure front panel (Figure 1, Item 1).
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0020 

0020-2 

REPLACE – CONTINUED 

Figure 1. Replace the Air Filter. 

END OF TASK 

END OF WORK PACKAGE

1 

3

5 

2 

4 

Feedback Potentiometer 

and connections shown 

here are not present on 

MBU-V3. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0021 

0021-1 

OPERATOR MAINTENANCE 

IGNITER 

REPLACE 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools and Special Tools Personnel Required 

 

MBU Tool Kit (WP 0073, Item 1) Food Service Specialist 92G (1) 

 MOS Non-specific (1) 

 

Materials/Parts Equipment Condition 

Rag, Wiping (WP 0072, Item 5) MBU shut down and cool (WP 0005) 

REPLACE 

Replace the igniter every 2000 Hrs of operation or whenever recommended as part of a troubleshooting 

procedure. 

WARNING 

Do not attempt service procedures on a burner that has recently been in operation. Let 

the burner cool down before performing these procedures to avoid the possibility of 

burns.

1. Turn the locking latch counterclockwise and open MBU control panel (Figure 1, Item 1) to gain access 

to the fuel delivery block (Figure 1, Item 2). 

2. Remove two hex nuts and washers (Figure 1, Item 3) securing fuel delivery block (Figure 1, Item 2) to 

the burner tube (Figure 1, Item 4). 

3. Disconnect igniter assembly wire (Figure 1, Item 6). 

4. Move fuel delivery block (Figure 1, Item 2) to expose igniter (Figure 1, Item 5). 

5. Remove igniter retainer screw (Figure 1, Item 7) and remove igniter (Figure 1, Item 5) and bracket 

from the fuel delivery block (Figure 1, Item 2). Note routing of igniter cable. 

CAUTION 

When replacing the nozzle, be careful not to damage the igniter. 

6. Open electrical cable clamp to release igniter assembly wire. 

7. Disconnect igniter power lead. 

8. Install new igniter assembly (Figure 1, Item 5), and tighten the retainer screw (Figure 1, Item 7). 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0021 

0021-2 

REPLACE – CONTINUED 

9. Connect the igniter power lead into light blue connector (Figure 1, Item 6). Route igniter cable as 

previously noted. 

10. Move fuel delivery block (Figure 1, Item 2) into position and replace and tighten two hex nuts and 

washers (Figure 1, Item 3) while holding the block against the burner tube assembly (Figure 1, Item 

4). 

11. Close control panel (Figure 1, Item 1), and secure. 

Figure 1. Replace the Igniter Assembly. 

END OF TASK 

END OF WORK PACKAGE

3 1 

5 

7 

2 

4

6 

2 

The feedback potentiometer 

and connections shown here 

are not present on the MBU-V3 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0022 

0022-1 

OPERATOR MAINTENANCE 

FUEL NOZZLE 

REPLACE 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools and Special Tools Personnel Required 

 

MBU Tool Kit (WP 0073, Item 1) Food Service Specialist 92G (1) 

 MOS Non-specific (1) 

Materials/Parts 

 Equipment Condition 

Rag, Wiping (WP 0072, Item 5) 

 MBU shut down and cool (WP 0005) 

References Power disconnected (WP 0005) 

Fuel tank drained (WP 0014) 

WP 0014 

 

REPLACE 

Replace the nozzle every 2000 hours of operation or whenever recommended as part of a 

troubleshooting procedure. 

WARNING 

Before proceeding with this procedure, the MBU fuel tank must be drained completely as 

described in WP 0014. Have rags on hand to clean up fuel spillage that may occur to 

prevent contamination. Do not perform this procedure near an open flame to prevent fire. 

Failure to observe safety precautions may result in injury or death to personnel. 

WARNING 

Do not attempt service procedures on a burner that has recently been in operation. Let 

the burner cool down before performing these procedures to avoid the possibility of 

burns. 

1. Open control panel (Figure 1, Item 1) to gain access to fuel delivery block (Figure 1, Item 2). 

2. Remove two hex nuts and washers (Figure 1, Item 3) securing fuel delivery block

(Figure 1, Item 2) to the burner tube assembly (Figure 1, Item 4). 

3. Move fuel delivery block (Figure 1, Item 2) out of the way to gain access to the nozzle 

(Figure 1, Item 5). 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0022 

0022-2 

REPLACE – CONTINUED 

CAUTION 

When replacing the nozzle, be careful not to damage the igniter. 

4. Unscrew the nozzle (Figure 1, Item 5) from the fuel delivery block (Figure 1, Item 2). 

5. Lubricate the O-ring (Figure 1, Item 6) on the replacement fuel nozzle (Figure 1, Item 5) with a small 

amount of clean fuel. The O-ring is supplied in place on the fuel nozzle. 

6. Screw the replacement fuel nozzle (Figure 1, Item 5) into the fuel delivery block (Figure 1, Item 2). 

7. With the replacement nozzle (Figure 1, Item 5) installed, move the fuel delivery block (Figure 1, Item

2) into position. Replace tighten two hex nuts and washers (Figure 1, Item 3) securing them tightly to 

the burner tube (Figure 1, Item 4). 

8. Close control panel (Figure 1, Item 1) and secure. 

Figure 1. Replace the Fuel Nozzle. 

END OF TASK 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

5 

7 

6 

3 1 

4

2 

The feedback potentiometer and 

connections shown here are not 

present on the MBU-V3. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0023 

0023-1

OPERATOR MAINTENANCE 

VENT VALVE ASSEMBLY 

INSPECT, TEST, SERVICE, REPLACE 

 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools and Special Tools Personnel Required 

 

MBU Tool Kit (WP 0073, Item 1) 

Punch, Drive Pin (WP 0071) 

Wrench, Box and Open End, Combination (WP 0071) 

Food Service Specialist 92G (1) 

MOS Non-specific (1) 

Materials/Parts Equipment Condition 

Rag, Wiping (WP 0072, Item 5) MBU shut down and cool (WP 0005) 

 Power disconnected (WP 0005) 

References Fuel tank drained (WP 0014) 

WP 0005, WP 0014 

INSPECT 

Inspect the Vent Valve Assembly 

WARNING 

The MBU weighs approximately 58 pounds fully fueled (26.4 kg). Two persons must 

carry the MBU. Lift with legs, not back, to prevent injury.

Inspect the vent valve assembly (Figure 1, Item 1) for proper seating on the fuel tank (Figure 1, Item 2). 

Check for damage to the valve head (Figure 1, Item 3), and solenoid (Figure 1, Item 4). Check for loose 

power leads (Figure 1, Item 5) to the solenoid and float switch. Ensure vent orifice (Figure 1, Item 6) is 

not clogged.

 

Figure 1. Inspect the Vent Valve Assembly. 

END OF TASK

1 

3 

4 

2 

5 

6 

4 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0023 

0023-2

TEST 

WARNING 

Before proceeding with this procedure, the MBU fuel tank must be drained completely as 

described in WP 0014. Wear protective equipment to keep fuel out of eyes and away 

from skin. Have rags on hand to clean up fuel spillage that may occur to prevent 

contamination. Do not perform this procedure near an open flame to prevent fire. Failure 

to observe safety precautions may result in injury or death to personnel. 

WARNING 

Do not attempt service procedures on a burner that has recently been in operation. Let 

the burner cool down before performing these procedures to avoid the possibility of 

burns. 

WARNING 

The MBU weighs approximately 58 pounds fully fueled (26.4 kg). Two persons must 

carry the MBU. Lift with legs, not back, to prevent injury. 

1. Set up the MBU IAW WP 0005. 

2. Ensure the gasket is in serviceable condition on the fuel tank filler cap and that the cap is tight. If this 

gasket leaks or is missing, the MBU will operate, but it cannot be refueled because air will be drawn 

into the tank instead of fuel. 

3. With the fuel line adapter disconnected from the MBU, press the fuel button. The fuel cycle will start 

and the MBU should pull air from the tank. After a few seconds, depress the middle of the fuel fill 

quick-connector on the MBU. You should hear a hiss as the air rushes into the tank. The noise is 

hard to detect, so listen closely to hear the momentary sound. 

4. If you hear the air rushing into the tank, the check valve is functioning properly. If no air rushes into 

the fitting, the check valve is more than likely stuck. 

5. Press the Stop button and disconnect power to the MBU. 

6. Remove the four carriage bolts, washers, and self-locking nylon nuts holding the reflective heat shield 

assembly to the frame, and set the hardware aside for reassembly. 

7. Lift the top pan of the reflective heat shield and position it to the side. The pan does not have to be 

completely removed. The fuel delivery block may stay attached. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0023 

0023-3

TEST – CONTINUED 

8. Remove the air hose by squeezing the tabs on hose clamp (Figure 2, Item 1) with a pair of pliers and 

slide the clamp off the vent valve fitting (Figure 2, Item 2) and onto the neoprene line (Figure 2, Item 

3). It may be necessary to cut or replace the hose to remove it. 

9. Remove the check valve (Figure 2, Item 4) by holding the solenoid fitting (Figure 2, Item 5) with a 

suitable wrench while turning the check valve with another suitable wrench. Be careful not to turn the 

fitting on the solenoid valve. 

10. Connect power and press the POWER button on the MBU control panel. 

11. Place the check valve back into the air line and press the FUEL button on the MBU control panel. 

CAUTION 

DO NOT press the start button or the MBU will attempt to start. 

12. If air is not drawn in through the check valve, it is not functioning properly. Press STOP, then 

POWER on the MBU control panel. Disconnect power to the MBU. Service the check valve IAW 

procedures in this WP. If the check valve is damaged, replace it IAW the REPLACE procedures in 

this WP. 

13. If air is drawn through the check valve, it is serviceable. Remove the check valve (Figure 2, Item 4) 

from the air line (Figure 2, Item 3). 

14. Install the check valve (Figure 2, Item 4) by holding the solenoid fitting (Figure 2, Item 5) with a 

suitable wrench and turn the check valve with another suitable wrench. Be careful not to turn the 

fitting on the solenoid valve. 

15. Connect the air line (Figure 2, Item 3) to the vent valve fitting (Figure 2, Item 2). 

16. Replace the reflective heat shield assembly on the MBU frame and secure with the hardware 

removed earlier. 

17. Connect power to the MBU and operate IAW procedures in WP 0005. Monitor for normal operation. 

Figure 2. Inspect the Check Valve. 

END OF TASK

3 

4 

5 

1 

2 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0023 

0023-4

SERVICE 

Check Valve 

WARNING 

The MBU weighs approximately 58 pounds fully fueled (26.4 kg). Two persons must 

carry the MBU. Lift with legs, not back, to prevent injury. 

NOTE 

• The check valve is a component of the vent valve assembly. It may be sticking or 

damaged, causing the vent valve assembly to malfunction. The following service 

procedures may correct the malfunction, allowing the vent valve to operate correctly. 

• This service procedure begins with the check valve removed from the vent valve 

assembly IAW the TEST procedure in this WP. If you have not removed the check 

valve, perform the TEST procedures listed in this WP before beginning service. 

1. Remove the check valve (Figure 3, Item 3) from the air line (Figure 3, Item 1). 

2. Locate the plunger on the inside of the check valve (Figure 3, Item 3). Use a pin punch (Figure 3, 

Item 5) to gently push the plunger in from the threaded side of the check valve. If it is stuck, it should 

take slight pressure to get it to move in freely. The plunger is spring loaded and should return to the 

closed position automatically. 

3. Ensure the plunger moves in and out freely. If it does not, replace the check valve. 

4. Install the check valve (Figure 3, Item 3) by holding the solenoid (Figure 3, Item 4) with a suitable 

wrench and turn the check valve with another suitable wrench. Be careful not to turn the fitting on the 

solenoid valve. 

5. Connect the air line (Figure 3, Item 1) to the barb fitting on the vent valve assembly (Figure 3, Item 2). 

6. Replace the reflective heat shield assembly on the MBU frame and secure with the hardware 

removed earlier. 

7. Connect power to the MBU and operate IAW procedures in WP 0005. Monitor for normal operation. 

END OF TASK 

Clean the Vent Valve Assembly Orifice 

1. Locate the Vent Valve Assembly (Figure 3, Item 2) on the top surface of the fuel tank (Figure 3, Item 

6). The Air Vent Orifice (Figure 3, Item 7) is the 3/8-inch diameter hole located on the side of the 

assembly facing the rear of the MBU. 

2. Ensure that the orifice (Figure 3, Item 7) is clear of any dust or debris, as this would prevent venting 

of the fuel tank and affect fuel flow. Use a small cleaning brush to clean the debris out of the orifice. 

DO NOT use any tool or object that would push any debris further into the orifice. 

END OF TASK 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0023 

0023-5

SERVICE – CONTINUED 

Figure 3. Service the Check Valve. 

END OF TASK

1 

2 

4 3 

5 

3 

6 

7 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0023 

0023-6

REPLACE 

WARNING 

HIGH VOLTAGE is used in the operation of this equipment. Ensure power is 

disconnected before attempting this maintenance procedure. DEATH ON CONTACT

may result if personnel fail to observe safety precautions.

WARNING 

Before proceeding with this procedure, the MBU fuel tank must be drained completely as 

described in WP 0014. Have rags on hand to clean up fuel spillage that may occur to 

prevent contamination. Do not perform this procedure near an open flame to prevent fire. 

Failure to observe safety precautions may result in injury or death to personnel. 

WARNING 

Do not attempt service procedures on a burner that has recently been in operation. Let 

the burner cool down before performing these procedures to avoid the possibility of 

burns. 

WARNING 

The MBU weighs approximately 58 pounds fully fueled (26.4 kg). Two persons must 

carry the MBU. Lift with legs, not back, to prevent injury. 

1. Remove the four carriage bolts (Figure 4, Item 1), washers, and self-locking nylon nuts holding the 

reflective heat shield assembly to the frame and set the hardware aside for reassembly. 

2. Remove the retainer clamps (Figure 4, Item 2) from the fuel line assembly. Retain the clamps for 

reassembly. 

3. Remove the four screws (Figure 4, Item 3) securing the vent assembly to the fuel tank (Figure 4, Item 

4). Retain the fasteners for reassembly. 

4. Remove the air hose (Figure 4, Item 5) by squeezing the tabs on hose clamp (Figure 4, Item 6) with a 

pair of pliers and slide the clamp off the vent valve fitting (Figure 4, Item 7) and onto the air hose 

(Figure 4, Item 5). It may be necessary to cut or replace the hose to remove it. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0023 

0023-7

REPLACE – CONTINUED 

 

Figure 4. Replace the Vent Valve Assembly.

3 

4 

5 6 

7 

1 2 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0023 

0023-8

REPLACE – CONTINUED 

5. Remove the check valve (Figure 5, Item 1) by holding the solenoid fitting (Figure 5, Item 2) with a 

suitable wrench while turning the check valve with another suitable wrench. Be careful not to turn the 

fitting on the solenoid valve. 

6. Disconnect the wiring connector (Figure 5, Item 3) from end of the harness (Figure 5, Item 4). 

7. Remove the vent valve assembly (Figure 5, Item 5) from the fuel tank (Figure 5, Item 6). 

8. Discard the old O-ring (Figure 5, Item 7). 

9. Lubricate the new O-ring (Figure 5, Item 7) with clean fuel and install. 

10. Place the serviceable vent valve assembly (Figure 5, Item 5) into position into the fuel tank (Figure 5, 

Item 6). Ensure the vent is facing the rear of the MBU. 

11. Install the four screws (Figure 5, Item 8) that secure the vent valve assembly to the fuel tank (Figure 

5, Item 6). 

12. Install the check valve (Figure 5, Item 1) by holding the solenoid fitting (Figure 5, Item 2) with a 

suitable wrench and turn the check valve with another suitable wrench. Be careful not to turn the 

fitting on the solenoid valve. 

13. Connect the wiring connector (Figure 5, Item 3) from end of the harness (Figure 5, Item 4). 

14. Connect the air line (Figure 5, Item 9) to the check valve (Figure 5, Item 1). 

15. Install the retainer clamps (Figure 5, Item 10) around the fuel line assembly (Figure 5, Item 5), air line 

(Figure 5, Item 9), and wire leading to the wiring connector (Figure 5, Item 3). 

16. Replace the reflective heat shield assembly on the MBU frame and secure with the hardware 

removed earlier. 

17. Connect power to the MBU and operate IAW procedures in WP 0005. Monitor for normal operation. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0023 

0023-9/10 blank

REPLACE – CONTINUED 

Figure 5. Replace the Vent Valve Assembly. 

END OF TASK 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

3 

5 

6 

1 

2 

4 

7 

9 8 

10 

 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0024 

0024-1

OPERATOR MAINTENANCE 

BURNER ASSEMBLY AND REFLECTIVE HEAT SHIELD ASSEMBLY 

INSPECT, REPLACE 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools and Special Tools Personnel Required 

 

MBU Tool Kit (WP 0073, Item 1) 

Materials/Parts 

Gloves, Chemical (WP 0072, Item 3) 

Food Service Specialist 92G (1) 

 MOS Non-specific (1) 

 

Equipment Condition References 

 

MBU shut down and cool (WP 0005) WP 0014 

Power disconnected (WP 0005) 

 

INSPECT 

Inspection procedures for the reflective heat shield assembly and burner assembly begin on the next 

page. 

 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0024 

0024-2

INSPECT – CONTINUED 

WARNING 

Do not attempt service procedures on a burner that has recently been in operation. Let 

the burner cool down before performing these procedures to avoid the possibility of 

burns. 

WARNING 

The MBU weighs approximately 58 pounds fully fueled (26.4 kg). Two persons must 

carry the MBU. Lift with legs, not back, to prevent injury. 

CAUTION 

When rinsing burner tube, do not use a high-pressure washer and only spray water into 

the burner tube. 

NOTE 

Carbon buildup in the burner tube is normal, but excessive amounts can cause 

malfunctioning. Carbon is usually burned off when the burner is operated at low, but if 

the burner is operated on high for extended periods, excessive amounts of carbon can 

build up. 

Inspect the reflective heat shield (Figure 1, Item 1) and burner tube assembly (Figure 1, Item 2) for 

physical damage, such as dents, perforations, or severe warping. Check mounting hardware (Figure 1, 

Item 3) for security. Check for carbon buildup in the burner tube. Clean if necessary by burning off or 

washing. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0024 

0024-3

INSPECT – CONTINUED 

Figure 1. Inspect the Burner Assembly and Reflective Heat Shield Assembly. 

END OF TASK 

2 1 

3 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0024 

0024-4

REPLACE – CONTINUED 

WARNING 

Before proceeding with this procedure, the MBU fuel tank must be drained completely as 

described in WP 014. Have rags on hand to clean up fuel spillage that may occur to 

prevent contamination. Do not perform this procedure near an open flame to prevent fire. 

Failure to observe safety precautions may result in injury or death to personnel.

WARNING 

Do not attempt service procedures on a burner that has recently been in operation. Let 

the burner cool down before performing these procedures to avoid the possibility of 

burns.

WARNING 

The MBU weighs approximately 58 pounds fully fueled (26.4 kg). Two persons must 

carry the MBU. Lift with legs, not back, to prevent injury.

1. Ensure the MBU is cool, disconnected from power, and has been drained of fuel IAW instructions 

given in WP 0014. 

2. Open control panel (Figure 2, Item 1) for access to the fuel delivery block assembly (Figure 2, Item 2). 

3. To remove fuel delivery block assembly (Figure 2, Item 2), remove two self-locking nuts and washers 

(Figure 2, Item 3 and Item 4) that secure the fuel delivery block assembly to the burner tube mounting 

shafts (Figure 2, Item 5). 

4. Slide the fuel delivery block assembly (Figure 2, Item 2) off the burner tube mounting shafts (Figure 2, 

Item 5). 

5. To replace any part of the reflective heat shield assembly (Figure 2, Item 6) or burner tube assembly 

(Figure 2, Item 7), remove the four carriage bolts (Figure 2, Item 8), washers (Figure 1, Item 9) and 

self-locking nylon nuts (Figure 2, Item 10) holding the reflective heat shield assembly to the frame 

(Figure 2, Item 11). 

6. Lift the reflective heat shield and burner tube assembly (Figure 2, Item 6 and Item 7) off the MBU 

frame (Figure 2, Item 11) and place face down on a flat surface. 

7. Remove the burner tube assembly by removing the four screws (Figure 2, Item 12). Set screws aside 

for reassembly. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0024 

0024-5

REPLACE – CONTINUED 

 

Figure 2. Replace the Burner Assembly and Reflective Heat Shield Assembly. 

6 

8 

11 

9 

10 

7 

12 

2 

2 

3 

5 

4 

1 

5 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0024 

0024-6

REPLACE – CONTINUED 

WARNING 

The reflective heat shield assembly insulation (Figure 3, Item 5) is made of fiberglass. 

Wear gloves to protect hands and a respirator to prevent inhalation of fiberglass particles. 

8. If replacing the reflective heat shield assembly (Figure 3, Item 1), put a replacement reflective heat 

shield (Figure 3, Item 2) into position, making sure that the flange (Figure 3, Item 3) of the reflective 

heat shield (Figure 3, Item 2) fits through the opening on the burner well (Figure 3, Item 4) and that 

the insulation (Figure 3, Item 5) is not entering the well of the reflective heat shield (Figure 3, Item 2). 

9. Flip the entire assembly face down on a work surface and press down on the burner well to expose 

the flange (Figure 3, Item 3). 

10. Install the burner tube assembly (Figure 3, Item 6), making sure that the holes in the burner tube face 

out of the reflective heat shield when the assembly is mounted back on the MBU frame (Figure 3, 

Item 7). Secure burner tube with screws retained earlier. 

11. Place the entire reflective heat shield and burner tube assembly back in place on the MBU frame 

(Figure 3, Item 7). 

12. Install the four carriage bolts (Figure 3, Item 8), washers (Figure 3, Item 9), and self-locking nylon 

nuts (Figure 3, Item 10) securing the reflective heat shield assembly (Figure 3, Item 1) to the frame 

(Figure 3, Item 7). 

13. Slide the fuel delivery block assembly (Figure 3, Item 11) onto the burner tube mounting shafts and 

secure with the hardware retained earlier. 

14. Close and secure the control panel (Figure 3, Item 12). 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0024 

0024-7/8 blank

REPLACE – CONTINUED 

Figure 3. Replace the Burner Assembly and Reflective Heat Shield Assembly. 

END OF TASK 

END OF WORK PACKAGE

1 

8 

7 

9 

10 

2 

5 

4 

11 

12 

2 

3 

6 

5 

2 

3 

5 

2 

 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0025 

0025-1

OPERATOR MAINTENANCE 

FUEL REGULATOR ASSEMBLY 

INSPECT, SERVICE, REPLACE 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools and Special Tools Personnel Required 

 

MBU Tool Kit (WP 0073, Item 1) Food Service Specialist 92G (1) 

 MOS Non-specific (1) 

Materials/Parts 

 Equipment Condition 

Rag, Wiping (WP 0072, Item 5) 

Wrench, Box and Open End, Combination (WP 0071) 

 MBU shut down and cool (WP 0005) 

References Power disconnected (WP 0005) 

Fuel tank drained (WP 0014) 

WP 0014 

 

INSPECT 

Inspection procedures for the fuel regulator assembly begin on the next page. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0025 

0025-2

INSPECT – CONTINUED 

WARNING 

The MBU weighs approximately 58 pounds fully fueled (26.4 kg). Two persons must 

carry the MBU. Lift with legs, not back, to prevent injury.

Inspect the regulator assembly (Figure 1, Item 1) for proper seating on the fuel tank (Figure 1, Item 2). 

Check for security of the valve head, and fuel line fitting. Ensure vent is not clogged. 

Figure 1. Inspect the Fuel Regulator Assembly. 

END OF TASK 

1 

2 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0025 

0025-3

SERVICE 

1. Locate the regulator assembly air vent (Figure 2, Item 1) on the right side of the fuel tank (Figure 2, 

Item 2) just below and to the left of the fuel tank filler cap. The air vent is located on the top center of 

the assembly and is a gold colored metallic material. 

2. Ensure that the vent (Figure 2, Item 1) is clean and unobstructed by using a small cleaning brush to 

gently remove any dirt or debris that might be found. 

Figure 2. Clean the Fuel Regulator Assembly Air Vent. 

END OF TASK

1 

2 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0025 

0025-4

REPLACE 

Replace the Fuel Regulator Assembly 

WARNING 

Before proceeding with this procedure, the MBU fuel tank must be drained completely as 

described in WP 0014. Have rags on hand to clean up fuel spillage that may occur to 

prevent contamination. Do not perform this procedure near an open flame to prevent fire. 

Failure to observe safety precautions may result in injury or death to personnel. 

WARNING 

Do not attempt service procedures on a burner that has recently been in operation. Let 

the burner cool down before performing these procedures to avoid the possibility of 

burns. 

WARNING 

The MBU weighs approximately 58 pounds fully fueled (26.4 kg). Two persons must 

carry the MBU. Lift with legs, not back, to prevent injury.

1. Disconnect power to the MBU. 

2. Drain the fuel tank IAW WP 0014. 

3. To replace the fuel regulator assembly (Figure 3, Item 2), disconnect the fuel feeder line (Figure 3, 

Item 6) by loosening the compression fitting nut (Figure 3, Item 5) from the fuel regulator fitting 

(Figure 3, Item 4). 

4. Remove the four retaining screws (Figure 3, Item 3) with a suitable screwdriver. 

5. Remove the fuel regulator assembly (Figure 3, Item 2) from the fuel tank (Figure 3, Item 10). 

6. Discard O-ring (Figure 3, Item 1). 

7. Pull the fuel filter (Figure 3, Item 9) of the fuel regulator assembly. 

8. Using two wrenches, loosen the fuel pickup tube nut (Figure 3, Item 8) from the tube adapter (Figure 

3, Item 7). 

9. Remove the tube adapter (Figure 3, Item 7), with fuel pickup tube still attached, from the fuel 

regulator. Retain the tube adapter and fuel pickup tube for reassembly. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0025 

0025-5/6 blank

REPLACE – CONTINUED 

10. Install the retained tube adapter (Figure 3, Item 7) with fuel pickup tube attached, onto the serviceable 

fuel regulator (Figure 3, Item 2) as shown in Figure 3. 

11. Push fuel filter (Figure 3, Item 9) onto fuel pickup tube until fully seated. 

12. Lubricate the O-ring (Figure 3, Item 1) with a small amount of clean fuel. 

13. Install a new regulator assembly by installing a new O-ring (Figure 3, Item 1) between the fuel 

regulator (Figure 3, Item 2) and fuel tank (Figure 3, Item 10). 

14. Insert the fuel regulator assembly (Figure 3, Item 2) into the fuel tank (Figure 3, Item 10) and secure 

with the four retaining screws (Figure 3, Item 3) using a suitable screwdriver. Ensure the fuel line 

fitting is facing the front of the MBU and the fuel filter and pickup tube point down into the fuel tank. 

15. Reconnect the fuel feeder line (Figure 3, Item 6) by tightening the compression nut (Figure 3, Item 5) 

to the fuel regulator fitting (Figure 3, Item 4). Use two wrenches, one on the fitting and one on the 

compression nut.

Figure 3. Replace the Fuel Regulator Assembly. 

END OF TASK 

END OF WORK PACKAGE

2 

10

5 

6 

3 

1

4 

9 8 7 

 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0026 

0026-1 

OPERATOR MAINTENANCE 

FUEL FILTER 

REPLACE 

INITIAL SETUP: 

 

Tools and Special Tools Personnel Required 

MBU Tool Kit (WP 0073, Item 1) Food Service Specialist 92G (1) 

 MOS Non-specific (1) 

Materials/Parts 

 Equipment Condition 

Brush, Acid Swabbing (WP 0072, Item 2) 

Rag, Wiping (WP 0072, Item 5) MBU shut down and cool (WP 0005) 

Power disconnected (WP 0005) 

References Fuel tank drained (WP 0014) 

 

WP 0014, WP 0025 

REPLACE 

Replace the Pickup Fuel Filter 

The pickup fuel filter is to be replaced after 300 hours operation. Replace the pickup fuel filter on the 

regulator assembly more often in dusty or extremely humid conditions or whenever recommended as part 

of a troubleshooting procedure. 

WARNING 

Before proceeding with this procedure, the MBU fuel tank must be drained completely as 

described in WP 0014. Have rags on hand to clean up fuel spillage that may occur to 

prevent contamination. Do not perform this procedure near an open flame to prevent fire. 

Failure to observe safety precautions may result in injury or death to personnel. 

1. Check the fuel regulator air vent (Figure 1, Item 3) for dirt or debris and clean with a small soft-bristle 

brush. Do not use any tool that will force the debris into the filter surface or damage it in any way. 

2. Remove the fuel regulator assembly (Figure 1, Item 2) from the fuel tank (Figure 1, Item 1) IAW WP 

0025. 

3. Pull the fuel filter (Figure 1, Item 5) off the fuel pick up tube (Figure 1, Item 4).

4. Install the new fuel filter (Figure 1, Item 5) onto the fuel pick up tube (Figure 1, Item 4) until it is fully 

seated. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0026 

0026-2 

REPLACE – CONTINUED 

5. Re-install the fuel regulator assembly (Figure 1, Item 2) into the fuel tank (Figure 1, Item 1) IAW WP 

0025. 

Figure 1. Replace the Pickup Fuel Filter. 

END OF TASK

END OF WORK PACKAGE

2 

1 

5 4 

3 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0027 

0027-1

OPERATOR MAINTENANCE 

FUEL LINE ASSEMBLY 

INSPECT 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Equipment Condition Personnel Required 

 

MBU shut down and cool (WP 0005) Food Service Specialist 92G (1) 

Power disconnected (WP 0005) MOS Non-specific (1) 

 

References 

WP 0039 

 

INSPECT 

Inspection procedures for the fuel line assembly begin on the next page. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0027 

0027-2

INSPECT – CONTINUED 

WARNING 

Do not attempt service procedures on a burner that has recently been in operation. Let 

the burner cool down before performing these procedures to avoid the possibility of 

burns. 

WARNING 

The MBU weighs approximately 58 pounds fully fueled (26.4 kg). Two persons must 

carry the MBU. Lift with legs, not back, to prevent injury. 

Inspect the fuel line assembly for damage to the fuel line (Figure 1, Item 1) and fittings. Check for leaks 

or loose connections (Figure 1, Item 2). Dents or kinks in the fuel line can restrict or prevent proper fuel 

flow. Refer to Field Maintenance to replace a damaged fuel line IAW WP 0039. 

Figure 1. Inspect the Fuel Line Assembly. 

END OF TASK 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

1 

2 

2 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0028 

0028-1

OPERATOR MAINTENANCE 

FUEL INTERFACE FITTING 

INSPECT 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Equipment Condition Personnel Required 

 

MBU shut down and cool (WP 0005) Food Service Specialist 92G (1) 

Power disconnected (WP 0005) MOS Non-specific (1) 

Fuel tank drained (WP 0014) 

References 

 

WP 0014 

INSPECT 

Inspect the Fuel Interface Fitting 

WARNING 

Before proceeding with this procedure, the MBU fuel tank must be drained completely as 

described in WP 0014. Have rags on hand to clean up fuel spillage that may occur to 

prevent contamination. Do not perform this procedure near an open flame to prevent fire. 

Failure to observe safety precautions may result in injury or death to personnel. 

WARNING

Do not attempt service procedures on a burner that has recently been in operation. Let 

the burner cool down before performing these procedures to avoid the possibility of 

burns. 

WARNING

The MBU weighs approximately 58 pounds fully fueled (26.4 kg). Two persons must 

carry the MBU. Lift with legs, not back, to prevent injury. 

Inspect the fuel interface fitting (Figure 1, Item 1) for physical damage, secure attachment, and leakage. 

Check free movement of the valve stem. Arrange for Field Maintenance to replace a damaged or leaking 

fuel interface fitting IAW WP 0040.
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0028 

0028-2

INSPECT – CONTINUED 

Figure 1. Inspect the Fuel Interface Fitting. 

END OF TASK 

END OF WORK PACKAGE

1 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0029 

0029-1 

OPERATOR MAINTENANCE 

POWER CONVERTER 

INSPECT 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Equipment Condition Personnel Required 

 

Power converter disconnected (WP 0005) Food Service Specialist 92G (1) 

 MOS Non-specific (1) 

References 

 

WP 0041 

 

INSPECT 

WARNING 

HIGH VOLTAGE is used in the operation of this equipment. Ensure power is 

disconnected before attempting with this maintenance procedure. DEATH ON 

CONTACT may result if personnel fail to observe safety precautions.

1. Inspect the outer case of the power converter (Figure 1, Item 1) for any damage that would expose or 

damage the internal components. 

2. Inspect the power cord (Figure 1, Item 2) is not cut, frayed, or otherwise damaged. 

3. Ensure the plug (Figure 1, Item 3) on the power cord has not been damaged. 

4. Ensure that the power output connectors (Figure 1, Item 4) are not bent, or damaged in any way that 

would prevent the proper insertion of cable connectors. 

5. Connect the power converter (Figure 1, Item 1) to an approved power source, and ensure that the 

LED indicator (Figure 1, Item 5) operates correctly. 

6. If any of the above components are damaged, arrange for Field Maintenance to replace the power 

converter IAW WP 0041. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0029 

0029-2 

INSPECT – CONTINUED 

MS0150 

MS0160 

Figure 1. Inspect the Power Converter. 

END OF TASK 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

1 

1 

2 

2 

3 

3 

4 

5 4 

5 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0030 

0030-1 

OPERATOR MAINTENANCE 

BATTERY PACK, BATTERIES, AND BATTERY CHARGER 

 INSPECT 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools and Special Tools Personnel Required 

 

MBU Tool Kit (WP 0073, Item 1) Food Service Specialist 92G (1) 

 MOS Non-specific (1) 

References Equipment Condition 

 

WP 0045 Power disconnected (WP 0005) 

INSPECT 

NOTE 

The inspection procedures for the battery pack, batteries, and battery charger require the 

battery pack cover be removed. If all three components are going to be inspected, do not 

replace the battery cover until you have finished inspecting all three components. 

The inspection procedures for the battery pack, batteries, and battery charger begin on the next page. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0030 

0030-2 

INSPECT – CONTINUED 

Inspect the Battery Pack 

WARNING 

HIGH VOLTAGE is used in the operation of this equipment. This procedure must be 

performed with power disconnected. DEATH ON CONTACT may result if personnel fail 

to observe safety precautions. Do not attempt this maintenance unless there is at least 

one other person nearby who is familiar with the operation and hazards of the equipment. 

That person should also be competent in giving first aid. Failure to observe this warning 

may result in injury or death to personnel. 

WARNING 

The battery pack weighs approximately 93 pounds (42.3 kg). Two persons must carry 

the battery pack. Lift with legs, not back, to prevent injury. 

1. Remove the battery pack outer cover (Figure 1, Item 1) by removing the cover retaining screws 

(Figure 1, Item 2) with a suitable screwdriver. Retain the screws for reassembly. 

2. Inspect the battery pack for broken or loose welds on the frame (Figure 1, Item 3). If broken or loose 

welds are found, refer to Field Maintenance for repair IAW WP 0045. 

3. Install the outer cover (Figure 1, Item 1) and secure with the cover retaining screws (Figure 1, Item 2). 

 

Figure 1. Inspect the Battery Pack. 

END OF TASK 

1 

2 

3 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0030 

0030-3 

INSPECT – CONTINUED 

Inspect the Batteries 

WARNING 

HIGH VOLTAGE is used in the operation of this equipment. This procedure must be 

performed with power disconnected. DEATH ON CONTACT may result if personnel fail 

to observe safety precautions. Do not attempt this maintenance unless there is at least 

one other person nearby who is familiar with the operation and hazards of the equipment. 

That person should also be competent in giving first aid. Failure to observe this warning 

may result in injury or death to personnel. 

WARNING 

The battery pack weighs approximately 93 pounds (42.3 kg). Two persons must carry 

the battery pack. Lift with legs, not back, to prevent injury. 

1. Remove the battery pack outer cover (Figure 2, Item 1) by removing the cover retaining screws 

(Figure 2, Item 2) with a suitable screwdriver. Retain the screws for reassembly. 

2. Inspect the outer casing of the lead acid batteries (Figure 2, Item 3) inside the battery pack (Figure 2, 

Item 1) for any damage or signs that the batteries could be leaking. 

3. Visually inspect the four battery terminals (Figure 2, Item 4) for corrosion. 

4. If the batteries show signs of leakage or the terminals are badly corroded arrange for the Field 

Maintenance to test or replace the batteries. 

5. Install the outer cover (Figure 2, Item 2) and secure with the cover retaining screws (Figure 2, Item 3). 

 

Figure 2. Inspect the Batteries. 

END OF TASK 

1 

3 

4 

2 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0030 

0030-4 

INSPECT – CONTINUED 

Inspect the Battery Charger 

WARNING 

HIGH VOLTAGE is used in the operation of this equipment. This procedure must be 

performed with power disconnected. DEATH ON CONTACT may result if personnel fail 

to observe safety precautions. Do not attempt this maintenance unless there is at least 

one other person nearby who is familiar with the operation and hazards of the equipment. 

That person should also be competent in giving first aid. Failure to observe this warning 

may result in injury or death to personnel. 

WARNING 

The battery pack weighs approximately 93 pounds (42.3 kg). Two persons must carry 

the battery pack. Lift with legs, not back, to prevent injury. 

1. Inspect the front panel of the battery charger (Figure 3, Item 1). 

2. Check the condition of the power out connector (Figure 3, Item 2) for dents or other damage that 

would prevent the proper connection of a cable connector. 

3. Check the condition of the power in cable (Figure 3, Item 3) for cuts or other damage that expose the 

wiring. 

4. Remove the screws (Figure 3, Item 4) retaining the battery pack cover (Figure 3, Item 5), and remove 

the cover. Retain the screws for reassembly. 

5. Inspect the battery charger (Figure 3, Item 1) for indications of physical damage, such as dents, 

corrosion, or burnt components. 

6. Inspect the battery charger wires (Figure 3, Item 6) for damage such as chafed or burnt insulation, 

loose or corroded connections, or exposed wiring. 

7. Inspect the temperature sensor (Figure 3, Item 7) for damage such as chafed or burnt insulation, 

loose or corroded connections, or exposed wiring. 

8. If there are no indications of any faults with the battery charger (Figure 3, Item 1), install battery pack 

cover (Figure 3, Item 5) and retain with screws (Figure 3, Item 4).
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0030 

0030-5/6 blank 

INSPECT – CONTINUED 

 

Figure 3. Inspect the Battery Charger. 

END OF TASK 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

1 

2 

2 

3 4 3 

5 

6 

1 

7 

6 

 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0031 

0031-1 

OPERATOR MAINTENANCE 

FUEL CAN ADAPTER AND FUEL HOSE 

INSPECT, REPLACE 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools and Special Tools Personnel Required 

 

MBU Tool Kit (WP 0073, Item 1) Food Service Specialist 92G (1) 

 MOS Non-specific (1) 

Equipment Condition 

 

Adapter and fuel hose disconnected (WP 0005) 

INSPECT 

Inspect Fuel Can Adapter 

1. Inspect the Fuel Can Adapter (Figure 1, Item 1) for any signs of damage or cracks. 

2. Inspect the female quick disconnect (Figure 1, Item 2) and its attached hose for signs of damage or 

deterioration. Also check that the outer collar pulls back freely. 

3. Inspect the relief valve (Figure 1, Item 3) for cleanliness and security. Older models have a manual 

relief valve; newer models have a self-venting relief valve. Ensure the valve is present and not 

clogged or dirty. 

4. Inspect the seal under the cap (Figure 1, Item 4) to see if it is in place or shows signs of deterioration. 

5. Inspect the pickup fuel hose (Figure 1, Item 5) for any signs of cracks or deterioration. 

Figure 1. Inspect Fuel Adapter Cap. 

6. If any component of the cap is damaged, the cap must be replaced IAW this WP. 

END OF TASK

1 

3 

4 

2 

5 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0031 

0031-2 

INSPECT – CONTINUED 

Inspect Fuel Hose 

1. Inspect fuel hose (Figure 2, Item 1) for signs of deterioration and cracks. 

2. Inspect the female quick disconnect (Figure 2, Item 2) for signs of damage. Also check that the outer 

collar pulls back freely but returns to place under spring tension. 

3. Inspect the male quick disconnect (Figure 2, Item 3) for signs of damage. Also check the nipple is 

secure and it is held in place by spring tension. 

 

Figure 2. Inspect Fuel Hose. 

4. If any component of the fuel hose is damaged, the hose must be replaced. 

2 

1 

3 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0031 

0031-3/4 blank 

REPLACE 

1. Disconnect the fuel hose from the fuel can adapter quick disconnect fitting (Figure 3, Item 1). 

2. If replacing a damaged fuel hose (Figure 3, Item 2), proceed as follows: 

a. Disconnect the opposite end of the fuel hose from the MBU fuel interface fitting. 

b. Connect a replacement fuel hose to the MBU fuel interface fitting. 

3. If replacing the fuel can adapter (Figure 3, Item 3), proceed as follows: 

a. Unscrew and remove the fuel can adapter from the fuel can. 

b. Ensure the dip tube (Figure 3, Item 4) is seated in the replacement fuel can adapter. 

c. Lower the dip tube into the fuel can and screw the replacement fuel can adapter to the fuel can. 

4. Connect the fuel hose to the fuel can adapter quick disconnect fitting (Figure 3, Item 1). 

 

Figure 3. Fuel Can Adapter and Fuel Hose. 

END OF TASK 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

1 

2 

4 

3 

 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0032 

0032-1 

OPERATOR MAINTENANCE 

NATO ADAPTER CABLE 

INSPECT 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Equipment Condition Personnel Required 

 

NATO Adapter Cable disconnected (WP 0005) Food Service Specialist 92G (1) 

 MOS Non-specific (1) 

 

INSPECT 

Inspect the NATO Adapter Cable 

WARNING 

HIGH VOLTAGE is used in the operation of this equipment. This procedure must be 

performed with power disconnected. DEATH ON CONTACT may result if personnel fail 

to observe safety precautions. Do not attempt this maintenance unless there is at least 

one other person nearby who is familiar with the operation and hazards of the equipment. 

That person should also be competent in giving first aid. Failure to observe this warning 

may result in injury or death to personnel. 

1. Remove the outer cap (Figure 1, Item 1) of the large power connector (Figure 1, Item 2) and inspect 

the interior surfaces for any dirt, damage, or corrosion that would prevent a good electrical 

connection. 

2. Inspect the connection point (Figure 1, Item 3) between the large power connector (Figure 1, Item 2) 

and the cable (Figure 1, Item 4) for any cracks, separations, or exposed wires. Inspect the length of 

the cable jacket (Figure 1, Item 4) for any cracks, cuts, or other damage that would expose the inner 

wires. 

3. Inspect the small power connector (Figure 1, Item 6) for any cracks, dents, or damage to the outer 

collar that would prevent a proper and secure electrical connection. 

4. Inspect the interior surfaces of the connector (Figure 1, Item 6) for dirt or damage to the internal 

contacts. 

5. Ensure that the outer cable jacket (Figure 1, Item 4) is securely attached to the connector and that 

there are no exposed wires. 

6. Inspect the cap lanyard (Figure 1, Item 5) is secure and not showing signs of deterioration. 

7. If there are any signs of damage or deterioration of the NATO cable adapter, arrange for it to be 

tested or replaced by Field Maintenance. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0032 

0032-2 

INSPECT – CONTINUED 

Figure 1. Inspect the NATO Adapter Cable. 

END OF TASK 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

1 

2 

4 3 

4 

6 

+

5 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0033 

0033-1 

OPERATOR MAINTENANCE 

CABLES 24VDC, EXTENSION AND BRANCH 

INSPECT, REPLACE 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Equipment Condition Personnel Required 

MBU shut down and cool (WP 0005) Food Service Specialist 92G (1) 

Power disconnected (WP 0005) MOS Non-specific (1) 

 

References 

 WP 0003 

 

INSPECT 

WARNING 

HIGH VOLTAGE is used in the operation of this equipment. Ensure power is 

disconnected before attempting this maintenance procedure. DEATH ON CONTACT

may result if personnel fail to observe safety precautions.

1. Inspect all of the 24VDC cables (Figure 1, Items 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6) for signs of deterioration or 

damage to the insulation. 

Figure 1. Inspect 24VDC Extension and Branch Cables.

5 

2

4 

3 

1 

6 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0033 

0033-2 

INSPECT – CONTINUED 

2. Inspect the exterior of the female (Figure 2, Item 1) and male (Figure 2, Item 2) connectors for signs 

of physical damage. 

3. Inspect the external threads of the female connectors (Figure 2, Item 3) to see if they are damaged. 

4. Inspect the internal threads of the male connectors (Figure 2, Item 4) to see if they are damaged. 

5. Check that the internal threaded cap of the male connector is free to rotate (Figure 2, Item 4). 

6. Inspect the pins of the male connectors (Figure 2, Item 5) to ensure that they are secure and straight. 

7. Inspect the recesses of the female connector (Figure 2, Item 6) to ensure they are clear of foreign 

material and are not crushed. 

8. Inspect the two screws and locking clamps (Figure 2, Item 7) of both types of connectors for correct 

installation and security. 

Figure 2. Inspect Male and Female Plugs. 

9. If any damage is found on a particular cable, it is to be replaced with a serviceable item. 

END OF TASK

1 2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

7 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0033 

0033-3 

REPLACE 

Replace 24VDC Cables 

WARNING 

HIGH VOLTAGE is used in the operation of this equipment. This procedure must be 

performed with power disconnected. DEATH ON CONTACT may result if personnel fail 

to observe safety precautions. Do not attempt this maintenance unless there is at least 

one other person nearby who is familiar with the operation and hazards of the equipment. 

That person should also be competent in giving first aid. Failure to observe this warning 

may result in injury or death to personnel. 

WARNING 

Do not attempt service procedures on a burner that has recently been in operation. Let 

the burner cool down before performing these procedures to avoid the possibility of 

burns. 

1. If a cable needs to be replaced, ensure the power supply is disconnected and the burners have been 

cooled down. 

2. Disconnect and remove the faulty cable. 

3. Depending on the configuration, install the serviceable replacement cable as detailed in the 

procedures described in WP 0003. 

END OF TASK 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0033 

0033-4 

REPLACE – CONTINUED 

Replace a Damaged Crossway Cable 

1. Remove the rubber grommets (Figure 3, Item 1) at each end of the cable (Figure 3, Item 2) and pull 

the cable through the trailer floor at both ends. Set the rubber grommets aside. 

2. Remove the screws (Figure 3, Item 3) retaining the cable clamps (Figure 3, Item 4) to the trailer 

support beam (Figure 3, Item 5), and remove the cable clamps. 

3. Remove the damaged cable (Figure 3, Item 2). 

4. Install the replacement cable (Figure 3, Item 2) as described in the section of this WP entitled, 

“Install the 12-ft Crossway Cable”. 

Figure 3. Replace a Damaged 12-ft MKT Crossway Cable. 

END OF TASK 

END OF WORK PACKAGE

5 

2 

3 

4 

1 

1 

4 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0034 

0034-1 

OPERATOR MAINTENANCE 

110VAC EXTENSION CABLES 

INSPECT, REPLACE 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Equipment Condition Personnel Required 

 

Extension cable disconnected (WP 0005) Food Service Specialist 92G (1) 

 MOS Non-specific (1) 

 

INSPECT 

Inspect the 110VAC Extension Cables 

WARNING 

HIGH VOLTAGE is used in the operation of this equipment. Ensure power is 

disconnected before attempting with this maintenance procedure. DEATH ON 

CONTACT may result if personnel fail to observe safety precautions. 

NOTE 

There are two 110VAC Extension Cables supplied with the MBU, one is 50 ft long and 

the other is 25 ft long. The inspection procedure for both is exactly the same. 

1. Inspect the insulated exterior surface of the extension cable (Figure 1, Item 1) for any cuts, tears and 

sign of deteriorating. 

2. Inspect the area where the cable and the female and male plugs meet for signs of separation. 

3. If there any signs of damage or separation on the insulated surface or at the plug interface the cable 

must be replaced IAW this WP. 

Figure 1. Inspect 110VAC Extension Cable.

1 

2 3 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0034 

0034-2 

INSPECT – CONTINUED 

4. Inspect the male plug to ensure that the three prongs (Figure 2, Item 1) are in place and secure. 

5. Inspect the female plug to ensure the three recesses (Figure 2, Item 2) are clear of foreign material 

and not crushed. 

6. Insert the male plug into the female plug to confirm steps 4 and 5. 

 

7. If the plugs do not interface correctly or there is any doubt regarding the plugs or the insulation, the 

extension cable must be replaced IAW this WP. 

 

Figure 2. Inspect 110VAC Male and Female Plugs. 

8. If the extension cord and the plugs appear to be serviceable but there is no power to the MBU, refer 

to WP 0007 to troubleshoot the MBU. 

END OF TASK 

REPLACE 

WARNING 

HIGH VOLTAGE is used in the operation of this equipment. Ensure power is 

disconnected before attempting with this maintenance procedure. DEATH ON 

CONTACT may result if personnel fail to observe safety precautions. 

1. If a cable needs to be replaced, ensure the power supply is disconnected. 

2. Disconnect and remove the faulty cable. 

3. Depending on the configuration, install the serviceable replacement cable as detailed in the 

procedures described in WP 0003. 

END OF TASK 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

1 

2 
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 

CHAPTER 5 

FIELD MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS 

FOR 

MODERN BURNER UNIT 

AND 

MODERN BURNER UNIT-V3

 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0035 

0035-1 

FIELD MAINTENANCE 

SERVICE UPON RECEIPT 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools and Special Tools Personnel Required 

 

Tool Kit, General Mechanic’s (WP 0073, Item 2) MOS Non-specific (2) 

 

References 

 

WP 0005, DD Form 361, DA PAM 750-8 

 

SERVICE UPON RECEIPT OF MATERIAL 

Unpacking 

The initial fielding of the MBU and its associated components, including equipment modifications to the 

MKT to accommodate the system, will be accomplished using contractor resources. Subsequent 

shipments containing replacement items will be individually packaged. None of these components require 

any kind of de-processing. They should be removed from their packing containers and used as outlined in 

WP 0005. 

Inspection 

Inspect the equipment for damage incurred during shipment. If the equipment has been damaged, report 

the damage on DD Form 361, Transportation Discrepancy Report. Check the equipment against the 

packing slip to see if the shipment is complete. Report all discrepancies in accordance with applicable 

service instructions (e.g., for Army instructions, see DA PAM 750-8. Check to see whether equipment has 

been modified. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0035 

0035-2 

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 

Food Service System Equipment Modification 

The adaptation of the MBU to the field feeding systems does not require modification of any equipment 

except the Mobile Kitchen Trailer (MKT). Three modifications to that system are necessary. All three will 

be applied by the fielding contractor prior to issue of the MBU equipment to the using unit. These 

modifications involve the installation of various components as described in the sections that follow: 

Figure 1. Overview of MKT Modification. 

This section of cable is underneath 

the deck of the MKT. 

The 50-Ft 110VAC extension cable is fed 

through the floor at this location. 

Griddle 

MBU MBU 

MBU MBU MBU MBU
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0035 

0035-3 

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS – CONTINUED 

Crossway Cable (24VDC) 

The 12-ft crossway cable (Figure 2) connects the power converter and the 24VDC, 4-branch cable. The 

fielding contractor will drill the necessary holes in the trailer frame and install cable clamps below the deck 

in preparation for this installation. The cable will be furnished with the MBU equipment and installed by 

the unit. For instructions on installing and replacing the Crossway Cable, refer to the details below. 

Figure 2. MKT Modification (Crossway Cable). 

Install the 12-ft Crossway Cable 

Before the MBU can be used with the MKT, the Crossway Cable (Figure 1, Item 1) must be installed 

under the trailer. This is a one-time procedure performed when the MBU is initially fielded. Once 

installed, the Crossway Cable remains in place unless the cable is damaged in some way and requires 

replacement. 

The cable clamps (Figure 3, Item 2) that secure the Crossway Cable to the MKT support beam (Figure 3, 

Item 3) are installed by the fielding contractor and will be in place prior to installing the Crossway Cable. 

1. To install the Crossway Cable (Figure 3, Item 1), take position with the required tools under the right, 

rear end of the MKT in the vicinity of the cooling cabinet that houses the Power Converter Mounting 

Bracket. 

2. Locate the support beam (Figure 3, Item 3) on which the cable clamps (Figure 3, Item 2) are 

mounted. 

3. Distribute the Crossway Cable (Figure 3, Item 1) along the ground under the trailer support beam 

(Figure 3, Item 3) so that an equal amount of cable is available to pass up through the trailer floor 

under the cooling cabinet as well as under the left side between the cabinet and griddle. 

4. Approximately 1 to 11⁄2 ft of cable should be available on each end to pass through the trailer floor. 

5. Once the cable has been distributed to allow a sufficient amount to pass up through the floor of the 

trailer, move to the far left end of the support beam and remove the screw (Figure 3, Item 4) that 

secures the first cable clamp (Figure 3, Item 5). 

6. Place the cable in position on the support beam (Figure 3, Item 3) and reinstall the clamp. 

7. Move down the support beam, installing the cable under each clamp, one at a time, until the entire 

cable has been installed under all the clamps. 

8. While under the cooling cabinet area on the right side of the trailer, remove the rubber grommet 

(Figure 3, Item 6) mounted in the trailer floor. 

9. Cut the grommet and install over the Crossway Cable (Figure 3, Item 1). 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0035 

0035-4 

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS – CONTINUED 

10. Push the connector (Figure 3, Item 7) of the Crossway Cable up through the hole in the floor of the 

trailer and reinstall the rubber grommet (Figure 3, Item 6). 

11. Move to the left end of the support beam (Figure 3, Item 3) and remove the second rubber grommet 

(Figure 3, Item 8). Cut as before and wrap around the cable. 

12. Pass the connector end (Figure 3, Item 9) of the cable up through the floor of the trailer and reinstall 

the grommet in the floor of the trailer. 

Figure 3. Install the 12-ft MKT Crossway Cable. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0035 

0035-5 

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS – CONTINUED 

Feeder Cable Harness 

The second modification involves the installation of a feeder cable harness (Figure 4) connecting the 

110VAC power cord extension to the power converter. The modification also provides two ground fault 

circuit interrupt (GFCI) 110VAC utility outlets and installation of a grounding lug on the MKT chassis. The 

fielding contractor will complete this installation. There are no unit responsibilities involved in this 

modification. 

Figure 4. MKT Modification (Feeder Cable Harness). 

Power Converter Mounting Bracket 

A third modification involves the installation of a power converter mounting bracket assembly (Figure 5,

Item 1) onto the floor of the MKT cooling cabinet. The fielding contractor will install the bracket into which 

the unit will install the power converter received with the MBU shipment. 

Figure 5. MKT Modification (Power Converter Mounting Bracket). 

1 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0035 

0035-6 

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS – CONTINUED 

MKT Grounding Rod 

A 2KW Generator is typically used to provide 110VAC power to the power converter. The grounding rod is 

supplied in sections (Figure 6, Item 1) that are connected together using threaded fittings (Figure 6, Item

2). The grounding rod is driven into the ground in the vicinity of the MKT grounding lug that is located on 

the front driver’s side of the vehicle chassis. The grounding cable (Figure 6, Item 3) is then connected 

between the MKT grounding lug and the grounding rod. 

The lug on the MKT can be utilized to ground the MKT when AC power is provided from a source other 

than a properly grounded 2 KW generator, such as directly from a building. In this instance, the grounding 

rod from the 2 KW generator may be used to ground the MKT or a separate grounding rod may be 

purchased. The grounding rod is on the additional authorized list for the MKT. 

Figure 6. Grounding Rod Assembly. 

END OF TASK 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

1 

2 

3 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0036 

0036-1 

FIELD MAINTENANCE 

FRAME ASSEMBLY 

REPAIR 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools and Special Tools Personnel Required 

 

Tool Kit, General Mechanic’s (WP 0073, Item 2) Metal Worker 91W (1) 

Welding Shop (WP 0073, Item 3) Machinist 91E (1) 

Materials/Parts References 

 

Rag, Wiping (WP 0072, Item 5) TC 9-237 

 WP 0011, WP 0017, WP 0018, WP 0019 

Equipment Condition WP 0023, WP 0024, WP 0025, WP 0039 

 

MBU shut down and cool (WP 0005) 

Power disconnected (WP 0005) 

Fuel tank drained (WP 0014) 

 

REPAIR 

Repair the MBU 

WARNING 

Before proceeding, the MBU fuel tank must be drained completely as described in WP 

0011. Have rags on hand to clean up fuel spillage that may occur to prevent 

contamination. Do not attempt this repair on an assembled MBU. Do not perform this 

procedure near an open flame to prevent fire. Failure to observe safety precautions may 

result in injury or death to personnel. 

WARNING 

The MBU weighs approximately 58 pounds fully fueled (26.4 kg). Two persons must 

carry the MBU. Lift with legs, not back, to prevent injury. 

1. Remove the controller assembly IAW WP 0017. 

2. Remove the fuel delivery block, with air filter attached IAW WP 0019. 

3. Remove the reflective heat shield and burner tube assemblies IAW WP 0024. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0036 

0036-2 

REPAIR – CONTINUED 

4. Remove the compressor IAW WP 0018. 

5. Remove the fuel regulator assembly, with fuel filter attached IAW WP 0025. 

6. Remove the fuel line assembly IAW WP 0039. 

7. Remove the vent valve assembly IAW WP 0023. 

8. Perform welding operations as specified in TC 9-237, Welding Theory and Application. 

9. Install the vent valve assembly IAW WP 0023. 

10. Install the fuel line assembly IAW WP 0039. 

11. Install the fuel regulator assembly, with fuel filter attached IAW WP 0025. 

12. Install the compressor IAW WP 0018. 

13. Install the reflective heat shield and burner tube assemblies IAW WP 0024. 

14. Install the fuel delivery block, with air filter attached IAW WP 0019. 

15. Install the controller assembly IAW WP 0017. 

END OF TASK 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0037 

0037-1 

FIELD MAINTENANCE 

CABLE CLIPS 

REPLACE 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools and Special Tools Personnel Required 

 

Tool Kit, General Mechanic’s (WP 0073, Item 2) MOS Non-specific (2) 

 Equipment Condition 

 

 MBU shut down and cool (WP 0005) 

 Power disconnected (WP 0005) 

 

REPLACE 

Replace the Cable Clips and Hose Clamps 

WARNING

Do not attempt service procedures on a burner that has recently been in operation. Let 

the burner cool down before performing these procedures to avoid the possibility of 

burns. 

WARNING

The MBU weighs approximately 58 pounds fully fueled (26.4 kg). Two persons must 

carry the MBU. Lift with legs, not back, to prevent injury. 

1. To replace the chassis cable clips, proceed as follows: 

NOTE 

The chassis mounted cable clips come in two different sizes. The procedure to replace 

both sizes is exactly the same.

a. Locate the three chassis mounted cable clips (Figure 1, Item 1 and 2) on the bottom surface of 

the MBU. Take note that there are two sizes. 

b. Replace the chassis cable clips (Figure 1, Item 1 and 2) by removing the cables/hoses retained 

by the strap. 

c. Remove the nut (Figure 1, Item 3) securing the cable clips to the chassis. 

d. Install a new cable clip in place on the threaded chassis stud and fasten with the nut (Figure 1,

Item 3) removed earlier. 

e. Reinstall the hoses/cables inside the cable clip (Figure 1, Item 1 and 2).
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0037 

0037-2 

REPLACE – CONTINUED 

Figure 1. Replace Chassis Mounted Cable Clips and Hose Clamps. 

END OF TASK 

END OF WORK PACKAGE

1 

2 

3 

3 

NOTE 

Assemblies are shown 

removed from the MBU 

frame for clarity. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0038 

0038-1 

FIELD MAINTENANCE 

ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY 

TEST, REPLACE 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools and Special Tools Personnel Required 

 

Tool Kit, General Mechanic’s (WP 0073, Item 2) MOS Non-specific (2) 

 Equipment Condition 

 

MBU shut down and cool (WP 0005) 

 Power disconnected (WP 0005) 

 

TEST 

Test the Electrical Connector Assembly 

WARNING 

The MBU weighs approximately 58 pounds fully fueled (26.4 kg). Two persons must 

carry the MBU. Lift with legs, not back, to prevent injury. 

1. Disconnect the connector assembly plug (Figure 1, Item 1) from its interface connection. 

2. Using a multimeter (Figure 1, Item 2), test the leads for continuity between the plug (Figure 1, Item 1) 

and the terminals in the receptacle plug (Figure 1, Item 3). 

3. If the wires are open, replace the electrical connector assembly. 

4. Reconnect the connector assembly plug (Figure 1, Item 1) to its interface connection. 

Figure 1. Test the Electrical Connector Assembly. 

END OF TASK 

1 

2 

3 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0038 

0038-2 

REPLACE 

Replace the Electrical Connector Assembly 

WARNING 

The MBU weighs approximately 58 pounds fully fueled (26.4 kg). Two persons must 

carry the MBU. Lift with legs, not back, to prevent injury. 

1. Replace the connector assembly (Figure 2, Item 1) by removing the four screws (Figure 2, Item 2). 

Retain the screws for reassembly. 

2. Slide the connector assembly (Figure 2, Item 1) from the bracket (Figure 2, Item 3). 

3. Disconnect the plug (Figure 2, Item 4) at the end of the connector assembly from its interface 

connection and fully withdraw the cable. 

4. Slide the serviceable connector assembly (Figure 2, Item 1) into place on the bracket (Figure 2, Item 

3). 

5. Connect the connector assembly plug (Figure 2, Item 4) to its interface connection. 

6. Secure the connector assembly in place with the four retainer screws. 

Figure 2. Replace the Electrical Connector Assembly. 

END OF TASK 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

3 

2 

1 

4 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0039 

0039-1 

FIELD MAINTENANCE 

FUEL LINE ASSEMBLY 

REPLACE 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools Special Tools Personnel Required 

 

Tool Kit, General Mechanic’s (WP 0073, Item 2) MOS Non-specific (2) 

Materials/Parts Equipment Condition 

Rag, Wiping (WP 0072, Item 5) MBU shut down and cool (WP 0005) 

Sealing Compound (WP 0072, Item 6) Power disconnected (WP 0005) 

Fuel tank drained (WP 0014) 

References 

 

WP 0014, WP 0040 

REPLACE

Replace the Fuel Line Assembly 

Procedures for replacing the fuel line assembly begin on the next page. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0039 

0039-2

REPLACE – CONTINUED 

WARNING 

Before proceeding with this procedure, the MBU fuel tank must be drained completely as 

described in WP 0014. Have rags on hand to clean up fuel spillage that may occur to 

prevent contamination. Do not perform this procedure near an open flame to prevent fire. 

Failure to observe safety precautions may result in injury or death to personnel.

WARNING 

Do not attempt service procedures on a burner that has recently been in operation. Let 

the burner cool down before performing these procedures to avoid the possibility of 

burns. 

WARNING 

The MBU weighs approximately 58 pounds fully fueled (26.4 kg). Two persons must 

carry the MBU. Lift with legs, not back, to prevent injury. 

1. To replace the fuel line assembly (Figure 1, Item 9), remove the fuel interface fitting (Figure 1, Item 5) 

IAW WP 0040. 

2. Remove the two clamps that are supporting the fuel line assembly (Figure 1, Item 9). 

3. Loosen the fuel line compression fitting (Figure 1, Item 2) on the fuel line attached to the elbow fitting 

(Figure 1, Item 1). 

4. Loosen the compression fitting (Figure 1, Item 8) while holding the inner union locking nut (Figure 1, 

Item 3) with a second wrench. 

5. Back off the inner union locking nut (Figure 1, Item 3) while holding the outer union locking nut 

(Figure 1, Item 4) with a second wrench until the union (Figure 1, Item 7) has some sideways 

movement. 

6. Remove the fuel line assembly (Figure 1, Item 9) from between the elbow fitting (Figure 1, Item 1) 

and the union (Figure 1, Item 7). 

7. Fully remove the inner union locking nut (Figure 1, Item 3) and remove the union (Figure 1, Item 7) 

from the bracket (Figure 1, Item 6). 

8. Make note of the angle at which the elbow fitting (Figure 1, Item 1) is mounted in the fuel tank port 

(Figure 1, Item 10). 

9. Remove the elbow fitting (Figure 1, Item 1) from the fuel tank port (Figure 1, Item 10). 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0039 

0039-3/4 blank

REPLACE – CONTINUED 

10. Clean off any pipe sealer compound residue with a rag. 

CAUTION 

Antiseize tape is NEVER to be used as a substitute for the approved Pipe Sealing 

Compound. Antiseize tape may shred and clog the fuel delivery system of the MBU.

11. Apply new pipe sealer compound to the serviceable elbow fitting (Figure 1, Item 1) and screw in place 

on fuel tank port (Figure 1, Item 10). Make sure that the elbow is installed at the same angle as 

before removal. 

12. Install the union (Figure 1, Item 7) through the bracket (Figure 1, Item 6) and thread the inner locking 

union (Figure 1, Item 3) onto the union. The union must have a small amount of sideways movement 

to allow for the correct alignment of the fuel line. 

13. Install the serviceable fuel line assembly (Figure 1, Item 9) into the elbow fitting (Figure 1, Item 1) and 

hand tighten the compression fitting (Figure 1, Item 2). 

14. Align the fuel line assembly (Figure 1, Item 9) to the union, and hand tighten the compression fitting 

(Figure 1, Item 8) onto the union (Figure 1, Item 7). 

15. When the fuel line assembly (Figure 1, Item 9) is in the correct alignment, between the elbow fitting 

(Figure 1, Item 1) and the union (Figure 1, Item 7), hand tighten the outer union locking nut (Figure 1, 

Item 4) against the bracket. Then hand tighten the inner locking union nut (Figure 1, Item 3) against 

the bracket. 

16. Using suitable wrenches, tighten the inner union locking nut (Figure 1, Item 3) and the outer union 

locking nut (Figure 1, Item 4) into place. 

17. Tighten the fuel line compression fitting (Figure 1, Item 8) to the union (Figure 1, Item 7). Support the 

fuel line so that it does not rotate out of alignment. 

18. Tighten the fuel line compression fitting (Figure 1, Item 2) to the elbow fitting (Figure 1, Item 1). 

19. Install two serviceable clamps to the fuel line assembly (Figure 1, Item 9) and the MBU frame. 

20. Install fuel interface fitting (Figure 1, Item 5) as described in WP 0040. 

Figure 1. Replace the Fuel Line Assembly. 

END OF TASK 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

9 

5 

2 

1 

3 4 

10 8 7 6 

 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0040 

0040-1

FIELD MAINTENANCE 

FUEL INTERFACE FITTING 

REPLACE 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools and Special Tools Personnel Required 

 

Tool Kit, General Mechanic’s (WP 0073, Item 2) MOS Non-specific (2) 

Materials/Parts Equipment Condition 

Rag, Wiping (WP 0072, Item 5) MBU shut down and cool (WP 0005) 

Sealing Compound (WP 0072, Item 6) Power disconnected (WP 0005) 

Fuel tank drained (WP 0014) 

References 

WP 0014 

 

REPLACE 

Replace the Fuel Interface Fitting 

Procedures for replacing the fuel interface fittings begin on the next page. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0040 

0040-2

REPLACE – CONTINUED 

WARNING 

Before proceeding with this procedure, the MBU fuel tank must be drained completely as 

described in WP 0014. Have rags on hand to clean up fuel spillage that may occur, to 

prevent contamination. Do not perform this procedure near an open flame, to prevent 

fire. Failure to observe safety precautions may result in injury or death to personnel. 

WARNING

Do not attempt service procedures on a burner that has recently been in operation. Let 

the burner cool down before performing these procedures, to avoid the possibility of 

burns. 

WARNING

The MBU weighs approximately 58 pounds fully fueled (26.4 kg). Two persons must 

carry the MBU. Lift with legs, not back, to prevent injury. 

1. To replace the fuel interface fitting (Figure 1, Item 1), loosen and remove the fitting from the union 

(Figure 1, Item 2) using a suitable wrench, while holding the union in place with a second wrench. 

2. Remove joint sealing compound residue from the union (Figure 1, Item 2). 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0040 

0040-3/4 blank

REPLACE – CONTINUED 

CAUTION 

Antiseize tape is NEVER to be used as a substitute for the approved pipe sealing 

compound. Antiseize tape may shred and clog the fuel delivery system of the MBU. 

3. Apply new joint sealing compound to the union (Figure 1, Item 2), and thread the serviceable fuel 

interface fitting (Figure 1, Item 1) onto the union, while holding the union in place with a wrench. 

Figure 1. Replace the Fuel Interface Fitting.

END OF TASK 

END OF WORK PACKAGE

1 

2 

2 1 

 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0041 

0041-1 

FIELD MAINTENANCE 

POWER CONVERTER 

TEST, REPLACE 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools and Special Tools Personnel Required 

 

Tool Kit, General Mechanic’s (WP 0073, Item 2) MOS Non-specific (2) 

Equipment Condition 

 

Power converter disconnected (WP 0005) 

TEST 

Test the Power Converter (MS0150) 

WARNING 

HIGH VOLTAGE is used in the operation of this equipment. Ensure power is 

disconnected before attempting this maintenance procedure. DEATH ON CONTACT

may result if personnel fail to observe safety precautions.

1. Connect the power converter (Figure 1, Item 1) to an approved power source. 

2. Use a multimeter to verify that the output voltage of the power converter (Figure 1, Item 1) is 23-29 

VDC. If the output voltage is correct, no further testing is required. If there is no voltage output, go to 

Step 3. If the voltage is out of range, replace the converter and return to service. 

3. Disconnect the power converter (Figure 1, Item 1) from the power source. 

4. To test the power converter switch (Figure 1, Item 5), remove the top cover (Figure 1, Item 2) of the 

power converter by removing the ten sets of fasteners (Figure 1, Item 3). Retain for reassembly. 

5. Loosen and remove the hex nut with protective rubber cap (Figure 1, Item 4) of the main power 

switch (Figure 1, Item 5). 

6. Make a note of the location, color, and connection point of the two wires connected to the main power 

switch (Figure 1, Item 5) inside the power converter (Figure 1, Item 1), to ensure that the wires are 

reconnected properly when the switch is replaced. 

7. Reach inside the power converter case and disconnect the spade connector (Figure 1, Item 6) which 

connects the power switch (Figure 1, Item 5) to the AC filter block (Figure 1, Item 7). 

8. Loosen and remove the screw (Figure 1, Item 8) that secures the wire (Figure 1, Item 9) to the 

second terminal. Retain the wire and the fasteners for reassembly. 

9. Remove the main power switch (Figure 1, Item 5) from the power converter. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0041 

0041-2 

TEST – CONTINUED 

10. Test for continuity through the power switch (Figure 1, Item 5) with a multimeter. If the power switch 

is not defective, check for continuity through the power cord (Figure 1, Item 10). If both the power 

switch and power cord are not defective, the entire power converter should be replaced. 

11. Install the main power switch (Figure 1, Item 5). Install the short wire (Figure 1, Item 9), set aside 

earlier on the switch terminal labeled “LOAD.” Secure with screw. 

12. Place the switch (Figure 1, Item 5) in position in the power converter’s front panel. Be sure to position 

the switch so that the screw terminal labeled “LOAD” is facing up and out of the case, while the 

terminal labeled “LINE” is facing down into the power converter case. 

13. Install the hex nut with protective rubber cap (Figure 1, Item 4) onto the front of the power switch 

(Figure 1, Item 5). 

14. Connect the spade terminal (Figure 1, Item 6) to the lug on the AC filter block (Figure 1, Item 7). 

15. Secure power converter cover (Figure 1, Item 2) with the retained fasteners (Figure 1, Item 3). 

Figure 1. Test the Power Converter (MS0150). 

END OF TASK 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 7 8

9 

10 

10 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0041 

0041-3 

TEST – CONTINUED 

Test the Power Converter (MS0160) 

WARNING 

HIGH VOLTAGE is used in the operation of this equipment. Ensure power is 

disconnected before attempting this maintenance procedure. DEATH ON CONTACT

may result if personnel fail to observe safety precautions.

1. Connect the power converter (Figure 2, Item 1) to an approved power source. 

2. Use a multimeter to verify that the output voltage of the power converter (Figure 2, Item 1) is 23-

29VDC. If the output voltage is correct, no further testing is required. 

3. Disconnect the power converter (Figure 2, Item 1) from the power source. 

4. Remove the fasteners (Figure 2, Item 2) retaining the bottom cover of the power converter (Figure 2, 

Item 1), and then remove the bottom cover (Figure 2, Item 3). Retain the fasteners for reassembly. 

5. Loosen and remove the hex nut with protective rubber cap (Figure 2, Item 4) on the main power 

switch (Figure 2, Item 5). 

6. Reach inside the power converter case and withdraw the main power switch (Figure 2, Item 5) from 

the case as far as the wiring will allow. 

7. Take note of the location, color, and connection point of the two wires connected to the main power 

switch (Figure 2, Item 5) inside the power converter to ensure that the wires are reconnected properly 

when the switch is replaced. Tag the wires as necessary. 

8. Loosen and remove the fasteners securing the wires to the terminals on the main power switch 

(Figure 2, Item 6). Retain the fasteners for reassembly. Move the wires aside. 

9. Move the power switch to the ON position and test for continuity through the power switch (Figure 2, 

Item 5) with a multimeter. If the power switch is not defective, check for continuity through the power 

cord (Figure 2, Item 7). If both the power switch and power cord are not defective, the entire power 

converter should be replaced. 

10. To install the main power switch (Figure 2, Item 5), reconnect the wiring to the switch as tagged and 

secure with the retained fasteners (Figure 2, Item 6). 

11. Place the main power switch (Figure 2, Item 5) in position in the power converter’s front panel. Be 

sure to position the switch so that the screw terminal labeled “LOAD” is facing up and out of the case 

while the terminal labeled “LINE” is facing down into the power converter case. 

12. Install the hex nut with protective rubber cap (Figure 2, Item 4) on the front of the main power switch 

(Figure 2, Item 5). 

13. Install the bottom cover (Figure 2, Item 3) of the power converter (Figure 2, Item 1) and secure with 

the retained fasteners (Figure 2, Item 2). 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0041 

0041-4 

TEST – CONTINUED 

Figure 2. Test the Power Converter (MS0160). 

END OF TASK

1 

3 

7 

7 

6 

4 

5 

2 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0041 

0041-5 

REPLACE 

Replace the Main Power Switch (MS0150) 

WARNING 

HIGH VOLTAGE is used in the operation of this equipment. Ensure power is 

disconnected before attempting this maintenance procedure. DEATH ON CONTACT

may result if personnel fail to observe safety precautions.

1. Disconnect the power converter (Figure 3, Item 3) from the power source. 

2. Remove the fasteners (Figure 3, Item 1) retaining the top cover (Figure 3, Item 2) of the power 

converter (Figure 3, Item 3) and remove the top cover. 

3. Loosen and remove the hex nut with protective rubber cap (Figure 3, Item 4) of the main power 

switch (Figure 3, Item 5). 

4. Take note of the location, color, and connection point of the two wires connected to the main power 

switch (Figure 3, Item 5) inside the power converter (Figure 3, Item 3) to ensure that the wires are 

reconnected properly when the switch is replaced. 

5. Reach inside the power converter (Figure 3, Item 3) case and disconnect the spade connector 

(Figure 3, Item 6) which connects the power switch (Figure 3, Item 5) to the AC filter block (Figure 3, 

Item 7). 

6. Loosen and remove the screw that secures the wire (Figure 3, Item 8) to the second terminal. Retain 

the screw for reassembly. Set this wire aside. 

7. Loosen and remove the screw retaining the power cord wire (Figure 3, Item 9) to the switch (Figure 3, 

Item 5) at the LINE terminal. 

8. Remove the main power switch (Figure 3, Item 5) from the power converter (Figure 3, Item 3). 

9. To install a new main power switch (Figure 3, Item 5), install the short wire (Figure 3, Item 8) set 

aside earlier on the switch terminal labeled “LOAD.” Secure with retained screw. 

10. Place the switch (Figure 3, Item 5) in position in the power converter’s (Figure 3, Item 3) front panel. 

Be sure to position the switch so that the screw terminal labeled “LOAD” is facing up and out of the 

case while the terminal labeled “LINE” is facing down into the power converter case. 

11. Install the hex nut with protective rubber cap (Figure 3, Item 4) on the front of the power switch 

(Figure 3, Item 5). 

12. Connect the spade terminal (Figure 3, Item 6) to the lug on the AC filter block (Figure 3, Item 7). 

13. Connect the power cord wire (Figure 3, Item 9) to the switch (Figure 3, Item 5) at the terminal marked 

“LINE,” and secure with screw. 

14. Install power converter cover (Figure 3, Item 2) and secure with the retained fasteners (Figure 3, Item 

1). 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0041 

0041-6 

REPLACE – CONTINUED 

Figure 3. Replace the Main Power Switch (MS0150). 

END OF TASK

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

1 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0041 

0041-7 

REPLACE – CONTINUED 

Replace the Main Power Switch (MS0160) 

WARNING 

HIGH VOLTAGE is used in the operation of this equipment. Ensure power is 

disconnected before attempting this maintenance procedure. DEATH ON CONTACT

may result if personnel fail to observe safety precautions.

1. Remove the fasteners (Figure 4, Item 2) retaining the bottom cover of the power converter 

(Figure 4, Item 1), and then remove the bottom cover (Figure 4, Item 3). Retain the fasteners for 

reassembly. 

2. Loosen and remove the hex nut with protective rubber cap (Figure 4, Item 4) of the main power 

switch (Figure 4, Item 5). 

3. Reach inside the power converter case and withdraw the main power switch (Figure 4, Item 5) 

from the case as far as the wiring will allow. 

4. Take note of the location, color, and connection point of the two wires connected to the main 

power switch (Figure 4, Item 5) inside the power converter to ensure that the wires are 

reconnected properly when the switch is replaced. Tag the wires as necessary. 

5. Loosen and remove the fasteners securing the wires to the terminals on the main power switch 

(Figure 4, Item 5). Retain the fasteners for reassembly. Move the wires aside. 

6. To install the main power switch (Figure 4, Item 5), reconnect the wiring to the switch as tagged 

and secure with the retained fasteners (Figure 4, Item 6). 

7. Place the switch (Figure 4, Item 5) in position in the power converter’s front panel. Be sure to 

position the switch so that the screw terminal labeled “LOAD” is facing up and out of the case 

while the terminal labeled “LINE” is facing down into the power converter case. 

8. Install the hex nut with protective rubber cap (Figure 4, Item 4) on the front of the power switch 

(Figure 4, Item 5). 

9. Install the bottom cover (Figure 4, Item 3) of the power converter (Figure 4, Item 1) and secure 

with the retained fasteners (Figure 4, Item 2). 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0041 

0041-8 

REPLACE – CONTINUED 

Figure 4. Replace the Main Power Switch (MS0160). 

END OF TASK

5 

4 

3 

1 

2 

6 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0041 

0041-9 

REPLACE – CONTINUED 

Replace the Power Cord (MS0150) 

WARNING 

HIGH VOLTAGE is used in the operation of this equipment. Ensure power is 

disconnected before attempting this maintenance procedure. DEATH ON CONTACT

may result if personnel fail to observe safety precautions.

1. Remove the fasteners (Figure 5, Item 1) that secure the power converter cover (Figure 5, Item 2) and 

remove the cover. Retain the fasteners and cover for reassembly. 

2. Remove the main power switch (Figure 5, Item 3) as detailed in “Replace the Main Power Switch 

(MS0150)” section of this WP. 

3. Take note of the color of the power cord wires (Figure 5, Item 10) and where they are connected, to 

ensure that the cord is reconnected properly. 

4. Disconnect the power cord spade terminal (Figure 5, Item 11) from the lower lug of the AC filter block 

(Figure 5, Item 5). 

5. Remove the hex nut retaining the power cord ground wire (Figure 5, Item 12) to the grounding stud 

(Figure 5, Item 6) and remove the power cord ground wire. Retain the hex nut for reassembly. 

6. Loosen and remove the inner plastic hex nut (Figure 5, Item 7) that is part of the cord securing collar. 

Retain the plastic hex nut for reassembly. 

7. Pull the entire power cord assembly (Figure 5, Item 4) out of the power converter (Figure 5, Item 9). 

8. Unscrew the strain relief (Figure 5, Item 8) from the outer section of the securing collar and pull the 

power cord (Figure 5, Item 4) free. Retain the securing collar (Figure 5, Item 7) and the strain relief 

for reassembly. 

NOTE 

Replace a damaged or otherwise unserviceable strain relief. 

9. Thread the serviceable power cord (Figure 5, Item 4) through the strain relief (Figure 5, Item 8) and 

then the outer section of the securing collar (Figure 5, Item 7). 

10. Slide the plastic hex nut (Figure 5, Item 7) over the terminal end of the power cord (Figure 5, Item 4). 

11. Insert the terminal ends of the power cord (Figure 5, Item 4), with the strain relief assembly (Figure 5, 

Item 8) and the outer section of the securing collar (Figure 5, Item 7 ), through the hole in the front 

panel of the power converter (Figure 5, Item 9). 

12. Connect the spade terminal of the BLUE wire to the lower terminal of the AC Filter block (Figure 5, 

Item 5). 

 

13. Connect the GREEN/YELLOW wire to the grounding stud (Figure 5, Item 6), on the inside surface of 

the front panel, and retain with hex nut. 

14. Reinstall the main power switch (Figure 5, Item 3) as detailed in “Replace the Main Power Switch 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0041 

0041-10 

REPLACE – CONTINUED 

(MS0150)” section of this WP. 

15. Connect the BROWN power cord wire to the terminal on the power switch labeled “LINE.” Secure 

with screw. 

16. Secure the inner plastic hex nut (Figure 5, Item 7) onto the outer section of the securing collar (Figure 

5, Item 7). 

17. Secure the stain relief (Figure 5, Item 8) to the outer section of the securing collar (Figure 5, Item 7). 

18. Reinstall the power converter cover (Figure 5, Item 2) and secure with the retained fasteners (Figure 

5, Item 1). 

Figure 5. Replace the Power Cord (MS0150). 

END OF TASK

2 

3 

4 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

1 

7 

9 

10 

11 

12 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0041 

0041-11 

REPLACE – CONTINUED 

Replace the Power Cord (MS0160) 

WARNING 

HIGH VOLTAGE is used in the operation of this equipment. Ensure power is 

disconnected before attempting this maintenance procedure. DEATH ON CONTACT

may result if personnel fail to observe safety precautions.

1. Disconnect the power converter (Figure 6, Item 3) from the power source. 

2. Remove the fasteners (Figure 6, Item 1) that secure the bottom cover (Figure 6, Item 2) of the power 

converter (Figure 6, Item 3). Retain the fasteners and cover for reassembly. 

3. Remove the main power switch (Figure 6, Item 4) as detailed in “Replace the Main Power Switch 

(MS0160)” section of this WP. 

4. Take note of the color of the power cord (Figure 6, Item 5) wires and where they are connected, to 

ensure that the cord is reconnected properly. Tag wires as necessary (one lead has been 

disconnected in the removal of the main power switch). 

5. Tag and disconnect the remaining “BLUE” power cord (Figure 6, Item 5) wire. 

6. Locate and remove the hex nut on the grounding stud (Figure 6, Item 6) and remove the power cord 

(Figure 6, Item 5) ground wire. 

7. Loosen and remove the inner plastic hex nut of the securing collar (Figure 6, Item 7) on the inside of 

the power converter front panel that secures the power cord strain relief (Figure 6, Item 8). 

8. Pull the entire power cord assembly (Figure 6, Item 5) out of the power converter (Figure 6, Item 3). 

9. Separate and remove the strain relief (Figure 6, Item 8) and the securing collar (Figure 6, Item 7) from 

the power cord (Figure 6, Item 5). 

10. Slide the strain relief (Figure 6, Item 8) and the outer section of the securing collar (Figure 6, Item 7) 

over the replacement power cord (Figure 6, Item 5). 

11. Insert the terminal end of the power cord (Figure 6, Item 5) through the hole in the front panel of the 

power converter (Figure 6, Item 3) and through the inner plastic hex nut of the securing collar (Figure 

6, Item 7). 

12. Install the power cord ground wire on the grounding stud (Figure 6, Item 6) and secure with the hex 

nut. 

13. Connect the “BLUE” power cord (Figure 6, Item 5) wire as tagged. 

14. Reinstall the main power switch (Figure 6, Item 4) as detailed in “Replace the Main Power Switch 

(MS0160)” section of this WP. 

15. Secure the inner plastic hex nut (Figure 6, Item 7) onto the outer section of the securing collar (Figure 

6, Item 7). 

16. Secure the strain relief (Figure 6, Item 8) to the outer section of the securing collar (Figure 6, Item 7). 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0041 

0041-12 

REPLACE – CONTINUED 

17. Reinstall the bottom cover (Figure 6, Item 2) of the power converter (Figure 6, Item 3) and secure with 

the retained fasteners (Figure 6, Item 1). 

Figure 6. Replace the Power Cord (MS0160). 

END OF TASK 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

4 

3 

7 

5 

5 

4 

2 

8 

6 

1 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0042 

0042-1

FIELD MAINTENANCE 

BATTERY PACK 

REPAIR, REPLACE 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools and Special Tools Personnel Required 

 

Tool Kit, General Mechanic’s (WP 0073, Item 2) Metal Worker 91W (1) 

Welding Shop (WP 0073, Item 3) Machinist 91E (1) 

References Equipment Condition 

 

TC 9-237, TC 9-510, WP 0043, WP 0044 Battery pack disconnected (WP 0005) 

 

REPAIR 

Repair the Battery Pack 

WARNING 

Before proceeding, the batteries must be removed from the battery pack. Failure to 

observe safety precautions may result in injury or death to personnel. 

WARNING

The battery pack weighs approximately 80 pounds (36.2 kg). Two persons must carry 

the battery pack. Lift with legs, not back, to prevent injury. 

1. Remove the batteries IAW instructions given in WP 0043. 

2. Remove the battery charger IAW instructions given in WP 0044. 

3. Perform welding operations as specified in TC 9-237, Operator’s Manual: Welding Theory and 

Application. 

4. Perform repairs to the sheet metal cover as described in TC 9-510, Metal Body Repair and Related 

Operations. 

5. Install the battery charger IAW instructions given in WP 0044. 

6. Install the batteries IAW instructions given in WP 0043. 

END OF TASK
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0042 

0042-2

REPLACE 

Replace the Battery Pack

Replace the entire Battery Pack (Figure 1, Item 1) if damaged beyond repair. 

Figure 1. Replace the Battery Pack. 

END OF TASK 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

1 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0043 

0043-1

FIELD MAINTENANCE 

BATTERIES 

TEST, REPLACE 

INITIAL SETUP 

Tools and Special Tools Personnel Required 

 

Tool Kit, General Mechanic’s (WP 0073, Item 2) MOS Non-specific (2) 

References Equipment Condition 

 

WP 0005 Battery pack disconnected (WP 0005) 

TEST 

Test the Batteries 

WARNING 

The battery pack weighs approximately 93 pounds (42.3 kg). Two persons must carry 

the battery pack. Lift with legs, not back, to prevent injury. 

1. To determine the status of the batteries, attempt to charge the battery pack (Figure 1, Item 1) until the 

“READY” indicator is lit. Refer to WP 0005 as necessary for operating procedures. 

2. If the “READY” indicator does not light after approximately 2 hours of charging, discontinue the 

charging operation and disconnect the power source from the Power Input connector. Refer to WP 

0005 as necessary for operating procedures. 

3. Remove the fasteners (Figure 1, Item 2) retaining the battery pack cover (Figure 1, Item 3) and 

remove the cover. Retain the fasteners and cover for reassembly. 

4. Tag and disconnect the power leads (Figure 1, Item 4) that extend from the charger to the battery 

terminals (Figure 1, Item 5) so that the batteries (Figure 1, Item 6) are no longer connected to the 

charger or each other. 

5. With a multimeter set to measure DC volts, place the (+) positive lead of the multimeter on the (+) 

positive terminal of one battery (Figure 1, Item 6) and the (-) negative lead of the multimeter on the (-) 

negative terminal of the same battery. 

6. Read the output voltage of the battery (Figure 1, Item 6) on the multimeter. If the voltage is 11VDC or 

less, the battery is most likely no longer capable of holding a full charge and requires replacement. 

7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 with the remaining battery (Figure 1, Item 6). 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0043 

0043-2

TEST – CONTINUED 

WARNING 

Batteries may explode if connected incorrectly. RED power lead MUST be connected to 

positive (+) terminal of battery. BLACK power lead MUST be connected to negative (-) 

terminal of battery. 

8. Connect the power leads (Figure 1, Item 4) to the battery terminals (Figure 1, Item 5) as tagged. 

9. If the batteries (Figure 1, Item 6) pass the voltage test, install the battery pack cover (Figure 1, Item 3) 

and secure with the retained fasteners (Figure 1, Item 2). 

Figure 1. Test the Batteries. 

END OF TASK

3 

6 2 

5 

4 

1 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0043 

0043-3

REPLACE 

Replace the Batteries 

NOTE 

Replace both batteries at the same time, if possible. 

1. To replace the battery pack batteries (Figure 2, Item 1), remove the battery pack outer cover (Figure 

2, Item 2) by removing the cover retaining fasteners (Figure 2, Item 3) with a suitable screwdriver. 

Retain the fasteners for reassembly. 

2. Remove the two nylon locking nuts and washers (Figure 2, Item 4) on the hold-down bracket (Figure 

2, Item 5) of the battery being replaced. 

3. Lift the hold-down bracket (Figure 2, Item 5) off the threaded shafts (Figure 2, Item 6) and remove. 

4. Loosen and remove the battery terminal hex head bolts (Figure 2, Item 7) that secure the power leads 

(Figure 2, Item 8) to the battery terminals of the battery being replaced. 

NOTE 

Take care when handling the batteries, as each weighs approximately 35 pounds. Due 

to their weight, the batteries may stick to the neoprene cushion of the battery pack base 

plate (Figure 2, Item 9) and may require a moderate amount of force to break the bond. 

5. Remove the defective battery (Figure 2, Item 1) and set aside. 

6. Install the new battery (Figure 2, Item 1) onto the battery pack base plate (Figure 2, Item 9). 

7. Slide the hold-down bracket (Figure 2, Item 5) onto the threaded shafts (Figure 2, Item 6). 

8. Reinstall the two nylon locking nuts (Figure 2, Item 4) on the hold-down bracket (Figure 2, Item 5) of 

the battery. 

WARNING 

Batteries may explode if connected incorrectly. RED power lead MUST be connected to 

positive (+) terminal of battery. BLACK power lead MUST be connected to negative (-) 

terminal of battery. 

9. Reconnect each power lead (Figure 2, Item 8) making sure to attach the “RED” lead to the positive 

(+) battery terminal and the temperature sensor (Figure 2, Item 10) under the “BLACK” negative lead 

of the negative (-) battery terminal. Secure the power lead to the battery terminals with hex head 

bolts (Figure 2, Item 7). 

10. Dispose of defective batteries (Figure 2, Item 1) IAW unit SOP or in an environmentally approved 

manner per local commander’s requirements. 

11. Install the battery pack outer cover (Figure 2, Item 2) and secure with the retained fasteners (Figure 

2, Item 3). 

.
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0043 

0043-4

REPLACE – CONTINUED 

Figure 2. Replace the Batteries. 

END OF TASK 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5

6 

7 

9 

8 

10 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0044 

0044-1 

FIELD MAINTENANCE 

BATTERY CHARGER 

TEST, REPLACE 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools and Special Tools Personnel Required 

 

Tool Kit, General Mechanic’s (WP 0073, Item 2) MOS Non-specific (2) 

Materials/Parts Equipment Condition 

Tape, Insulation, Electrical (WP 0072, Item 8) Battery pack disconnected (WP 0005) 

References 

 

WP 0043 

TEST 

Test the Battery Charger 

WARNING 

The battery pack weighs approximately 93 pounds (42.3 kg). Two persons must carry 

the battery pack. Lift with legs, not back, to prevent injury. 

1. Remove the fasteners (Figure 1, Item 1) retaining the battery pack cover (Figure 1, Item 2) and 

remove the cover. Retain the cover and fasteners for reassembly. 

2. Tag and disconnect the battery charger wiring (Figure 1, Item 3) from the batteries (Figure 1, Item 4). 

3. Use electrical tape to insulate the terminal end of each battery charger wire (Figure 1, Item 3). Leave 

the end open to allow access to the terminal. 

CAUTION 

Ensure the terminals are completely insulated from each other and from any conductive 

components. Failure to do so may allow a short circuit and may damage the charger. 

4. Connect the battery charger (Figure 1, Item 5) to an approved power source, and set the 3-Position 

switch (Figure 1, Item 6) to “CHARGE.” 

5. Set a multimeter to read DC voltage, and check the voltage between the two charger wire terminals 

(Figure 1, Item 3). The charger (Figure 1, item 5) should deliver approximately 24 to 28VDC. 

Replace a charger with low or no voltage. 

6. Disconnect the battery charger (Figure 1, Item 5) from the power source. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0044 

0044-2 

TEST – CONTINUED 

WARNING 

Batteries may explode if connected incorrectly. RED power lead MUST be connected to 

positive (+) terminal of battery. BLACK power lead MUST be connected to negative (-) 

terminal of battery. 

7. Remove the electrical tape from the wire terminals (Figure 1, Item 3), and connect the charger wiring 

to the batteries (Figure 1, Item 4) as tagged. 

8. Install the battery pack cover (Figure 1, Item 2), and secure with the retained fasteners (Figure 1, Item 

1). 

 

Figure 1. Test the Battery Charger. 

END OF TASK

5 

6 

1 

2 

3 

4 

3 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0044 

0044-3 

REPLACE 

Replace the Battery Charger 

WARNING 

The battery pack weighs approximately 93 pounds (42.3 kg). Two persons must carry 

the battery pack. Lift with legs, not back, to prevent injury. 

1. To replace the internal battery charger (Figure 2, Item 1), remove batteries IAW WP 0043. 

2. Loosen the two hex nuts (Figure 2, Item 2) at the base of the threaded shafts (Figure 2, Item 3) just 

behind the charger assembly. 

3. Remove the two shafts (Figure 2, Item 3) (it is not necessary to remove rear shafts), making sure not 

to drop the nuts and washers under the battery pack base plate that secure the shafts to the frame. 

4. Remove the six retaining screws and washers (Figure 2, Item 4) that secure the battery charger 

(Figure 2, Item 1) to the battery pack frame (Figure 2, Item 5). Retain the fasteners for reassembly. 

5. Remove the charger assembly (Figure 2, Item 1). 

6. Install a new charger (Figure 2, Item 1) in place on the battery pack frame (Figure 2, Item 5). 

7. Secure in place with the six retaining screws and washers (Figure 2, Item 4). 

8. Install the two threaded shafts (Figure 2, Item 3) removed earlier and secure. 

WARNING 

Batteries may explode if connected incorrectly. RED power lead MUST be connected to 

positive (+) terminal of battery. BLACK power lead MUST be connected to negative (-) 

terminal of battery. 

9. Reinstall the batteries and battery pack cover IAW WP 0043. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0044 

0044-4 

REPLACE – CONTINUED 

Figure 2. Replace the Battery Charger. 

END OF TASK 

END OF WORK PACKAGE

2 

1 

4 

5 

3 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0045 

0045-1 

FIELD MAINTENANCE 

NATO ADAPTER CABLE 

TEST, REPLACE 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools and Special Tools Personnel Required 

 

Tool Kit, General Mechanic’s (WP 0073, Item 2) MOS Non-specific (2) 

 Equipment Condition 

 

 NATO Adapter Cable disconnected (WP 0005) 

TEST 

Test the NATO Adapter Cable 

1. Remove the outer cap (Figure 1, Item 3) of the large power connector (Figure 1, Item 2). 

2. Use a multimeter to test for continuity between the terminal (Figure 1, Item 5) in the large power 

connector (Figure 1, Item 2) and each terminal in the small power connector (Figure 1, Item 1). There 

should be continuity with only one terminal in the small power connector. Replace a NATO Adapter 

Cable which does not pass this test. 

3. Use a multimeter to test for continuity between the socket (Figure 1, Item 4) in the large power 

connector (Figure 1, Item 2) and each terminal in the small power connector (Figure 1, Item 1). There 

should be continuity with only one terminal in the small power connector. Replace a NATO Adapter 

Cable which does not pass this test. 

4. Install the outer cap (Figure 1, Item 3) on the large power connector (Figure 1, Item 2). 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0045 

0045-2 

TEST – CONTINUED 

Figure 1. Test the NATO Adapter Cable. 

END OF TASK 

3 

2 

5 4 

1 

+

2 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0045 

0045-3/4 blank 

REPLACE 

Replace NATO Adapter Cable Components 

1. Remove the protective cap (Figure 2, Item 1). 

2. Remove the six screws that secure the back cover of the main connector head (Figure 2, Item 2). 

3. Remove the two hex head bolts (Figure 2, Item 3) that secure the power cable (Figure 2, Item 4) to 

the main power connector head (Figure 2, Item 2) and remove the cable assembly. 

4. Install a new power cable (Figure 2, Item 4) or new main connector head (Figure 2, Item 2) making 

sure to place the power cable strain relief (Figure 2, Item 5) into the slot on the main power connector 

head. 

5. Place the power cable terminals in position by aligning the (+) positive lead of the cable with the (+) 

terminal (Figure 2, Item 6) on the main connector head (Figure 2, Item 2) and install the two hex head 

bolts (Figure 2, Item 3). 

6. Place the back cover of the main connector head (Figure 2, Item 2) into position. Place a new cap, or 

the cap removed earlier, into position over the top screw hole (Figure 2, Item 7) and secure the six 

cover screws. 

7. If the main power connector head and power cable are both damaged, replace the entire NATO 

Adapter Cable assembly. 

Figure 2. Replace NATO Adapter Cable Components. 

END OF TASK 

END OF WORK PACKAGE

1 

2 

5 4 

4 

7 

3 

6 

+

2 

TM 10-7310-281-13&P 

CHAPTER 6 

PARTS INFORMATION 

FOR 

MODERN BURNER UNIT 

AND 

MODERN BURNER UNIT-V3 

 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0046 

0046-1 

OPERATOR AND FIELD MAINTENANCE 

REPAIR PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS LIST (RPSTL) 

INTRODUCTION 

SCOPE 

This RPSTL lists and authorizes spares and repair parts; special tools; special test, measurement, and 

diagnostic equipment (TMDE); and other special support equipment required for performance of operator, 

unit, and field maintenance of the Modern Burner Unit (MBU). It authorizes the requisitioning, issue, and 

disposition of spares, repair parts, and special tools as indicated by the source, maintenance, and 

recoverability (SMR) codes. 

GENERAL 

In addition to the Introduction work package, this RPSTL is divided into the following work packages. 

1. Repair Parts List Work Packages. Work packages containing lists of spares and repair parts 

authorized by this RPSTL for use in the performance of maintenance. These work packages also 

include parts which must be removed for replacement of the authorized parts. Parts lists are 

composed of functional groups in ascending alphanumeric sequence, with the parts in each group 

listed in ascending figure and item number sequence. Sending units, brackets, filters, and bolts are 

listed with the component they mount on. Bulk materials are listed by item name in FIG. BULK at the 

end of the work packages. Repair parts kits are listed at the end of the individual work packages. 

Repair parts for reparable special tools are also listed in a separate work package. Items listed are 

shown on the associated illustrations. 

2. Special Tools List Work Packages. Work packages containing lists of special tools, special TMDE, 

and special support equipment authorized by this RPSTL (as indicated by Basis of Issue (BOI) 

information in the DESCRIPTION AND USABLE ON CODE (UOC) column). Tools that are 

components of common tool sets and/or Class VII are not listed. 

3. Cross-Reference Indexes Work Packages. There are two cross-reference indexes work packages in 

this RPSTL: the National Stock Number (NSN) Index work package and the Part Number (P/N) Index 

work package. The National Stock Number Index work package refers you to the figure and item 

number. The Part Number Index work package refers you to the figure and item number. 

EXPLANATION OF COLUMNS IN THE REPAIR PARTS LIST AND SPECIAL TOOLS LIST WORK 

PACKAGES 

ITEM NO. (Column (1)). Indicates the number used to identify items called out in the illustration. 

SMR CODE (Column (2)). The SMR code containing supply/requisitioning information, maintenance level 

authorization criteria, and disposition instruction, as shown in the following breakout. This entry may be 

subdivided into 4 subentries, one for each service. 

Table 1. SMR Code Explanation. 

Source 

Code

XX 

Maintenance 

Code

XX 

Recoverability 

Code

X 

1st two positions: 

How to get an item. 

3rd position: 

Who can install, 

replace, or use the 

item. 

4th position: 

Who can do 

complete repair* on 

the item. 

5th position: 

Who determines 

disposition action on 

unserviceable items. 

*Complete Repair: Maintenance capacity, capability, and authority to perform all corrective maintenance 

tasks of the "Repair" function in a use/user environment in order to restore serviceability to a failed item. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0046 

0046-2 

Source Code. The source code tells you how you get an item needed for maintenance, 

repair, or overhaul of an end item/equipment. Explanations of source codes follow: 

Source Code Application/Explanation

PA 

PB NOTE

PC Items coded PC are subject to deterioration. 

PD 

PE Stock items; use the applicable NSN to 

PF requisition/request items with these source codes. They 

PG are authorized to the level indicated by the code entered 

PH in the 3rd position of the SMR code. 

PR 

PZ 

 Items with these codes are not to be 

KD requested/requisitioned individually. They are part of a 

KF kit which is authorized to the maintenance level indicated 

KB in the third position of the SMR code. The complete kit 

 must be requisitioned and applied. 

 Items with these codes are not to be 

 requested/requisitioned individually. They must be made 

MF-Made at Field from bulk material which is identified by the part number 

MH-Made at below in the DESCRIPTION AND USABLE ON CODE 

depot/sustainment level (UOC) column and listed in the bulk material group work 

ML-Made at SRA package of the RPSTL. If the item is authorized to you 

MD-Made at depot by the third position code of the SMR code, but the source 

MG-Navy only code indicates it is made at higher level, order the item 

 from the higher level of maintenance. 

 

 Items with these codes are not to be 

 requested/requisitioned individually. The parts that make 

AF-Assembled by Field up the assembled item must be requisitioned or 

AH-Assembled by below fabricated and assembled at the level of maintenance 

depot/sustainment level indicated by the source code. If the 3rd position of the 

AL-Assembled by SRA SMR code authorizes you to replace the item, but the 

AD-Assembled by depot source code indicates the item is assembled at a higher 

AG-Navy only level, order the item from the higher level of 

 maintenance. 

XA Do not requisition an "XA" coded item. Order the next 

 higher assembly.(Refer to NOTE below.) 

XB If an item is not available from salvage, order it using the 

 CAGEC and part number. 

XC Installation drawings, diagrams, instruction sheets, field 

 service drawings; identified by manufacturer's part 

 number. 

XD Item is not stocked. Order an XD-coded item through 

 normal supply channels using the CAGEC and part 

 number given, if no NSN is available. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0046 

0046-3 

NOTE 

Cannibalization or controlled exchange, when authorized, may be used as a source of supply 

for items with the above source codes except for those items source coded "XA" or those 

aircraft support items restricted by requirements of AR 750-1. 

Maintenance Code. Maintenance codes tell you the level(s) of maintenance authorized to use and repair 

support items. The maintenance codes are entered in the third and fourth positions of the SMR code as 

follows: 

Third Position. The maintenance code entered in the third position tells you the lowest maintenance level 

authorized to remove, replace, and use an item. The maintenance code entered in the third position will 

indicate authorization to the following levels of maintenance: 

Maintenance 

Code Application/Explanation

F - Field maintenance can remove, replace, and use the item. 

H - Below Depot Sustainment maintenance can remove, replace, and use the item. 

L - Specialized Repair Activity can remove, replace, and use the item. 

G - Afloat and ashore intermediate maintenance can remove, replace, and use 

 the item (Navy only). 

K - Contractor facility can remove, replace, and use the item. 

Z - Item is not authorized to be removed, replace, or used at any maintenance 

 level. 

D - Depot can remove, replace, and use the item. 

*NOTE - Army may use C in the third position. However, for joint service publications, Army will use O. 

Fourth Position. The maintenance code entered in the fourth position tells you whether or not the item is to 

be repaired and identifies the lowest maintenance level with the capability to do complete repair (perform 

all authorized repair functions). 

NOTE 

Some limited repair may be done on the item at a lower level of maintenance, if authorized by 

the Maintenance Allocation Chart (MAC) and SMR codes. 

Maintenance 

Code Application/Explanation

F - Field is the lowest level that can do complete repair of the item. 

H - Below Depot Sustainment is the lowest level that can do complete repair of the item. 

L - Specialized Repair Activity is the lowest level that can do complete repair of the item. 

D - Depot is the lowest level that can do complete repair of the item. 

G - Both afloat and ashore intermediate levels are capable of complete repair of 

 item (Navy only). 

K - Complete repair is done at contractor facility. 

Z - Nonreparable. No repair is authorized. 

 No repair is authorized. No parts or special tools are authorized for 

B - maintenance of "B" coded item. However, the item may be reconditioned by 

 adjusting, lubricating, etc., at the user level. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0046 

0046-4 

Recoverability Code. Recoverability codes are assigned to items to indicate the disposition action on 

unserviceable items. The recoverability code is shown in the fifth position of the SMR code as follows: 

Recoverability 

Code Application/Explanation

Z - Nonreparable item. When unserviceable, condemn and dispose of the item 

 at the level of maintenance shown in the third position of the SMR code. 

F - Reparable item. When uneconomically reparable, condemn and dispose of 

 the item at the field level. 

D - Reparable item. When beyond lower level repair capability, return to 

 depot. Condemnation and disposal of item are not authorized below depot 

 level. 

L - Reparable item. Condemnation and disposal not authorized below 

 SRA. 

A - Item requires special handling or condemnation procedures because of 

 specific reasons (such as precious metal content, high dollar value, critical 

 material, or hazardous material). Refer to appropriate manuals/directives 

 for specific instructions. 

G - Field level reparable item. Condemn and dispose at either afloat or ashore 

 intermediate levels (Navy only). 

K - Reparable item. Condemnation and disposal to be performed at contractor 

 Facility. 

NSN (Column (3)). The NSN for the item is listed in this column. 

CAGEC (Column (4)). The Commercial and Government Entity Code (CAGEC) is a five-digit code which 

is used to identify the manufacturer, distributor, or Government agency/activity that supplies the item. 

PART NUMBER (Column (5)). Indicates the primary number used by the manufacturer (individual, 

company, firm, corporation, or Government activity), which controls the design and characteristics of the 

item by means of its engineering drawings, specifications, standards, and inspection requirements to 

identify an item or range of items. 

NOTE 

When you use an NSN to requisition an item, the item you receive may have a different 

part number from the number listed. 

DESCRIPTION AND USABLE ON CODE (UOC) (Column (6)). This column includes the following 

information: 

1. The federal item name, and when required, a minimum description to identify the item. 

2. Part numbers of bulk materials are referenced in this column in the line entry to be manufactured or 

 fabricated. 

3. Hardness Critical Item (HCI). A support item that provides the equipment with special protection from 

 electromagnetic pulse (EMP) damage during a nuclear attack. 

4. The statement END OF FIGURE appears just below the last item description in column (6) for a given 

 figure in both the repair parts list and special tools list work packages. 

 QTY (Column (7)). The QTY (quantity per figure) column indicates the quantity of the item used in the 

 breakout shown on the illustration/figure, which is prepared for a functional group, subfunctional 

 group, or an assembly. A "V" appearing in this column instead of a quantity indicates that the quantity 

 is variable and quantity may change from application to application. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0046 

0046-5 

EXPLANATION OF CROSS-REFERENCE INDEXES WORK PACKAGES 

FORMAT AND COLUMNS 

1. National Stock Number (NSN) Index Work Package. NSN’s in this index are listed in National Item 

Identification Number (NIIN) sequence. 

STOCK NUMBER Column. This column lists the NSN in NIIN sequence. The NIIN consists of the last 

nine digits of the NSN. When using this column to locate an item, ignore the first four digits of the NSN. 

However, the complete NSN should be used when ordering items by stock number. For example, if the 

NSN is 5385-01-574-1476, the NIIN is 01-574-1476. 

FIG. Column. This column lists the number of the figure where the item is identified/located. The figures 

are in numerical order in the repair parts list and special tools list work packages. 

ITEM Column. The item number identifies the item associated with the figure listed in the adjacent FIG. 

column. This item is also identified by the NSN listed on the same line. 

2. Part Number (P/N) Index Work Package. Part numbers in this index are listed in ascending 

alphanumeric sequence (vertical arrangement of letter and number combinations which places the first 

letter or digit of each group in order A through Z, followed by the numbers 0 through 9 and each following 

letter or digit in like order). 

PART NUMBER Column. Indicates the part number assigned to the item. 

FIG. Column. This column lists the number of the figure where the item is identified/located in the repair 

parts list and special tools list work packages. 

ITEM Column. The item number is the number assigned to the item as it appears in the figure referenced 

in the adjacent figure number column." 

SPECIAL INFORMATION 

UOC. The UOC appears in the lower left corner of the Description Column heading. Usable on codes are 

shown as "UOC:..." in the Description Column (justified left) on the first line under the applicable 

item/nomenclature. Uncoded items are applicable to all models. Identification of the UOCs used in the 

RPSTL are: 

Code Used On

FQG MBU

FTW MBU-V3 

Fabrication Instructions. Bulk materials required to manufacture items are listed in the bulk material 

functional group of this RPSTL. Part numbers for bulk material are also referenced in the Description 

Column of the line item entry for the item to be manufactured/fabricated. Detailed fabrication instructions 

for items source coded to be manufactured or fabricated are found in the applicable maintenance work 

package. 

Index Numbers. Items which have the word BULK in the figure column will have an index number shown 

in the item number column. This index number is a cross-reference between the NSN / Part Number 

(P/N) Index work packages and the bulk material list in the repair parts list work package. 

Illustrations List. The illustrations in this RPSTL contain field authorized items. 

Illustrations published in (enter applicable TM number for the higher maintenance level RPSTL, e.g., for 

field, below depot sustainment, etc.) that contain field authorized items also appear in this RPSTL. The 

tabular list in the repair parts list work package contains only those parts coded "O" in the third position of 

the SMR code, therefore, there may be a break in the item number sequence. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0046 

0046-6 

HOW TO LOCATE REPAIR PARTS 

1. When NSNs or Part Numbers Are Not Known. 

First. Using the table of contents, determine the assembly group to which the item belongs. This is 

necessary since figures are prepared for assembly groups and subassembly groups, and lists are divided 

into the same groups. 

Second. Find the figure covering the functional group or the subfunctional group to which the item 

belongs. 

Third. Identify the item on the figure and note the number(s). 

Fourth. Look in the repair parts list work packages for the figure and item numbers. The NSNs and part 

numbers are on the same line as the associated item numbers. 

2. When NSN Is Known. 

First. If you have the NSN, look in the STOCK NUMBER column of the NSN index work package. The 

NSN is arranged in NIIN sequence. Note the figure and item number next to the NSN. 

Second. Turn to the figure and locate the item number. Verify that the item is the one you are looking for. 

3. When Part Number Is Known. 

First. If you have the part number and not the NSN, look in the PART NUMBER column of the part number 

index work package. Identify the figure and item number. 

Second. Look up the item on the figure in the applicable repair parts list work package. 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0047 

0047-1 

OPERATOR AND FIELD MAINTENANCE 

FRAME ASSEMBLY 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0047 

0047-2 

Figure 1. Frame Assembly. 

3 

2 

4 

5 

6 

1 

NOTE 

Reflective Heat Shield Assembly 

partially cut away for illustrative clarity. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0047 

0047-3/4 blank 

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) 

ITEM 

NO. 

SMR 

CODE NSN CAGEC 

PART 

NUMBER 

DESCRIPTION AND USABLE ON 

CODE (UOC) QTY

 GROUP 01 FRAME ASSEMBLY 

FIG. 1 FRAME ASSEMBLY 

1 PAFFF 7310-01-462-4864 3AD06 980250K KIT, MBU FRAME, TANK, PLATE ASSY 1 

2 PACOO 7310-01-462-4865 L4703 935631K . MBU CAP, FILLER, FUEL TANK 1 

3 PACZZ 7310-01-462-4867 L4703 980940K . MBU SEAL FUEL TANK 1 

4 PACZZ 5340-01-479-5144 06915 WHC-1000-01 . CLIP, SPRING TENSION (SMALL) 1 

5 PAFZZ 5340-01-479-5180 06915 WHC-1500-01 . CLIP, SPRING TENSION (LARGE) 2 

6 PACZZ 5310-00-984-6610 18876 9171692-3 . NUT, SELF-LOCKING, HEXAGON 3 

 

END OF FIGURE 

TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0048 

0048-1 

OPERATOR AND FIELD MAINTENANCE 

ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY 
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0048 

0048-2 

Figure 2. Electrical Connector Assembly. 

2 

(Clamp loops 

are standalone items 

used to 

organize cable 

harness 

assemblies.) 

1 

INCLUDES 2 

1 

NOTE 

Reflective Heat Shield Assembly is 

removed for illustrative clarity. 

3, 4 
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0048 

0048-3/4 blank 

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) 

ITEM 

NO. 

SMR 

CODE NSN CAGEC 

PART 

NUMBER 

DESCRIPTION AND USABLE ON 

CODE (UOC) QTY

 GROUP 02 ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY 

FIG. 2 ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY 

1 PAFFF 7310-01-462-4868 L4703 930740K KIT, MBU CONNECTOR ASSY 1 

2 XDFZZ 9W655 491-100 . SCREW, #4-40X1/4ZP 4 

3 PAFZZ 5340-01-479-7770 06915 SHC-50 CLAMP, LOOP (SMALL) 2 

4 PAFZZ 5340-01-479-7760 06915 SHC-80 CLAMP, LOOP (LARGE) 1 

 

END OF FIGURE 

TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0049 

0049-1 

OPERATOR AND FIELD MAINTENANCE 

CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY 
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0049 

0049-2 

Figure 3. Controller Assembly. 

2 

4

5 

3 

NOTE 

Reflective Heat Shield Assembly is 

removed for illustrative clarity. 2 THRU 5 

1 
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0049 

0049-3/4 blank 

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) 

ITEM 

NO. 

SMR 

CODE NSN CAGEC

PART 

NUMBER 

DESCRIPTION AND USABLE ON 

CODE (UOC) QTY

 GROUP 03 CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY 

FIG. 3 CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY 

1 PACZZ 7310-01-507-9302 L4703 PD MBU-001 MBU ASSY CONTROLLER [USE ONLY ON MBU-V3] 

(FTW) 1 

2 XACZZ L4703 980350 . MBU ASSY CONTROLLER (FTW) 1 

1 PACCZ 7310-01-462-4869 L4703 980240K MBU ASSY CONTROLLER [USE ONLY ON MBU] 

(FQG) 1 

2 7810-01-507-9302 L4703 980350K . MBU ASSY CONTROLLER (FQG) 1 

3 PACZZ 5340-01-479-8335 94222 48-99-221-92N . FASTENER, PAWL 1 

4 PACZZ 7310-01-462-4871 3AD06 930929K . MBU PIN HINGE 1 

5 PACZZ 5325-00-721-7889 79136 5137-37MD . . RING, RETAINING 2 

 

END OF FIGURE 

TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0050 

0050-1 

OPERATOR AND FIELD MAINTENANCE 

COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY 
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0050 

0050-2 

Figure 4. Compressor Assembly. 

1 

NOTE: Cutaway view of MBU 

base plate shown for drawing 

clarity. Threaded studs 

mounted permanently to base 

plate. 

3 

4 

5 

6 

8

7 

2 

3 THRU 8 
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0050 

0050-3/4 blank 

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) 

ITEM 

NO. 

SMR 

CODE NSN CAGEC 

PART 

NUMBER 

DESCRIPTION AND USABLE ON 

CODE (UOC) QTY

GROUP 04 COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY 

FIG. 4 COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY 

1 PACOO 7310-01-462-4899 L4703 980124K MBU ASSY, COMPRESSOR 1 

2 PACZZ 7310-01-462-4902 L4703 933827K MBU ASSY BRACKET 1 

3 XACZZ L4703 933900 . BRACKET, COMPRESSOR 1 

4 PACZZ 4730-01-486-1138 L4703 HC5-36 . CLAMP, HOSE 2 

5 XDCZZ 76385 Z103 TYPE SC . GROMMET, NONMETALLIC 4 

6 PACZZ 5365-21-920-9924 94223 607-085-RC . SPACER, SLEEVE 4 

7 PACZZ 5310-00-984-6610 18876 79NTE040 . NUT, SELF-LOCKING, HEXAGON 4 

8 PACZZ 5310-21-921-0253 94223 W-167 . WASHER, FLAT 4 

 

END OF FIGURE 

TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0051 

0051-1 

OPERATOR AND FIELD MAINTENANCE 

FUEL DELIVERY BLOCK ASSEMBLY 

Figure 5. Fuel Delivery Block Assembly (Sheet 1 of 2).

2 

2 THRU 24 

1 

3 4 

5 6 

7 

8 9 

16 

10 

11 

12 

13 14 

15 

18 

20 

21 

22 

23 

24 

17 

19 
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0051 

0051-2 

Figure 5. Fuel Delivery Block Assembly (Sheet 2 of 2).

40 

42 

32 

37 36 35 

38

34

45 

31 

30 

26 27 28 29 

33 

39 

44 

43 

41 

26 THRU 45 

25 
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0051 

0051-3 

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) 

ITEM 

NO. 

SMR 

CODE NSN CAGEC 

PART 

NUMBER 

DESCRIPTION AND USABLE ON 

CODE (UOC) QTY

GROUP 05 FUEL DELIVERY BLOCK ASSEMBLY 

FIG. 5 FUEL DELIVERY BLOCK ASSEMBLY 

1 PACZZ 7310-01-462-4905 L4703 980230K MBU FUEL DELIVERY BLOCK 

UOC: FQG 

1 

2 PACZZ 7310-01-462-4913 L4703 349930K . MBU FILTER AIR INLET 1 

3 PACZZ 4810-01-480-0851 73212 2X1323-24VDC . VALVE, SOLENOID 1 

4 PACZZ 7310-01-462-4915 L4703 980260K . MBU ASSY IGNITOR 

 UOC: FQG 

1 

5 XACZZ 3AD06 930700 . FUEL DELIVERY BODY 

 UOC: FQG 

1 

6 PACZZ 7310-01-462-4919 L4703 928329K . MBU ASSY FUEL NOZZLE 1 

7 PACZZ 4730-01-481-9200 0J2W4 125-4A . ADAPTER, STRAIGHT, PIPE TO HOSE, 1⁄4 BARB X 

 1/8 NPTM 

1 

8 PACZZ 4730-01-481-9210 0J2W4 125-6B . ADAPTER, STRAIGHT, PIPE TO HOSE, 3/8 BARB 

 X 1/4 NPTM 

1 

9 PACZZ 4730-00-954-1251 59199 UM5008 . CLAMP, 1/4 ID HOSE 4 

10 MOCZZ 3AD06 989000K . HOSE, NONMETALLIC (NEOPRENE AIR LINE 1⁄4 

ID, MAKE FROM P/N J30-30R7-1/4ID, 2 FT LENGTH)

1 

11 MOCZZ 3AD06 989038K . HOSE, NONMETALLIC (NEOPRENE AIR LINE 3/8 

 ID, MAKE FROM P/N6675-06298, 2 FT LENGTH) 1 

12 PACZZ 5342-01-210-7340 59199 UM5010 . CLAMP, 3/8 ID HOSE 2 

13 MOCZZ 3AD06 989038K . HOSE, NONMETALLIC (NEOPRENE AIR LINE 3/8 

 ID, MAKE FROM P/N 6675-06298, 2 FT 8 IN 

 LENGTH 

1 

14 PACZZ 4810-01-480-0861 73212 1X1024-24VDC . VALVE, SOLENOID 1 

15 PACZZ 4730-01-481-9121 0J2W4 48-4A . ADAPTER, STRAIGHT, PIPE TO TUBE, 1/8-#4 

 STRAIGHT 

1 

16 PACZZ 7310-01-462-4907 3AD06 880150K . MBU CONTROL KNOB 1 

17 XACZZ 3AD06 981028 . . SPRING, KNOB, NEEDLE VALVE 

 UOC: FQG 

1 

18 PACZZ 7310-01-462-4928 L4703 980610K . MBU, FEEDBACK POTENTIOMETER 

 UOC: FQG 

1 

19 PACZZ 5305-01-481-0580 9W655 180629 . SCREW 

 UOC: FQG 

2 

20 PACZZ 7310-01-462-4918 L4703 930125K . MBU FLAME SENSOR 1 

21 PACZZ 5310-00-984-6610 18876 79NTE040 . NUT, SELF-LOCKING, HEXAGON 2 

22 PACZZ 5310-00-582-5677 80205 MS15759-810 . WASHER, FLAT 2 

23 PACZZ 4730-01-070-7680 93061 229-6-2 . ELBOW, PIPE TO HOSE (3/8 TUBE X 1/8 NPT) 1 

24 PACZZ 7310-01-462-4936 3AD06 910729K . MBU GROUND WIRE 1 

25 PACOO 7310-01-462-4905 L4703 980310K MBU FUEL DELIVERY BLOCK 

UOC: FTW 

1 

26 PACZZ 7310-01-462-4913 L4703 349930K . MBU AIR FILTER INLET 1 

27 PACZZ 4810-01-480-0851 73212 2X1323-24VDC . VALVE, SOLENOID 

 UOC: FTW

1 

28 PACZZ 7310-01-462-4915 L4703 980260K . MBU ASSY IGNITOR 1 

29 XACZZ L4703 935874 . FUEL DELIVERY BODY 

 UOC: FTW 1 

30 PACZZ 7310-01-462-4919 L4703 928329K . MBU ASSY FUEL NOZZLE 

 1 
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0051 

0051-4 

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) 

ITEM 

NO. 

SMR 

CODE NSN CAGEC 

PART 

NUMBER 

DESCRIPTION AND USABLE ON 

CODE (UOC) QTY

31 PACZZ 4730-01-481-9200 0J2W4 125-4A . ADAPTER, STRAIGHT, PIPE TO HOSE, 1⁄4 BARB X 

 1/8 NPTM 

1 

32 PACZZ 4730-01-481-9210 0J2W4 125-6B . ADAPTER, STRAIGHT, PIPE TO HOSE, 3/8 BARB 

 X 1⁄4 NPTM 

1 

33 PACZZ 4730-00-954-1251 59199 UM5008 . CLAMP, 1/4 ID HOSE 

 UOC: FTW 

4 

34 MOCZZ 3AD06 989000K . HOSE, NONMETALLIC (NEOPRENE AIR LINE 1⁄4 

 ID, MAKE FROM P/N J30-30R7-1/4 ID, 2 FT 

 LENGTH) 

 UOC: FTW 

1 

35 MOCZZ 3AD06 989038K . HOSE, NONMETALLIC (NEOPRENE AIR LINE 3/8 

 ID, MAKE FROM P/N 667-06298, 2 FT LENGTH) 

1 

36 PACZZ 5342-01-210-7340 3AD06 860073 . CLAMP, 3/8 ID HOSE 2 

37 PACZZ 4810-01-480-0861 73212 1X1024-24VDC . VALVE, SOLENOID 1 

38 MOCZZ 3AD06 989038K . HOSE, NONMETALLIC (NEOPRENE AIR LINE 3/8 

 ID, MAKE FROM P/N 6675-06298, 2 FT 8 IN 

 LENGTH) 

1 

39 PACZZ 4730-01-481-9121 0J2W4 48-4A . ADAPTER, STRAIGHT, PIPE TO TUBE, 1/8-#4 

 STRAIGHT 

1 

40 PACZZ 7310-01-462-4907 3AD06 880150K . MBU CONTROL KNOB 1 

41 PACZZ 7310-01-462-4936 3AD06 910729K . MBU GROUND WIRE 1 

42 PACZZ 7310-01-462-4918 L4703 930125K . MBU FLAME SENSOR 1 

43 PACZZ 5310-00-984-6610 18876 79NTE040 . NUT, SELF-LOCKING, HEXAGON 2 

44 PACZZ 5310-00-582-5677 80205 MS15795-810 . WASHER, FLAT 2 

45 PACZZ 4730-01-070-7680 93061 229-6-2 . ELBOW, PIPE TO TUBE, 3/8 TUBE X 1/8 NPT 1 

 

END OF FIGURE 
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0052 

0052-1 

OPERATOR AND FIELD MAINTENANCE 

VENT VALVE ASSEMBLY 
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0052 

0052-2 

Figure 6. Vent Valve Assembly. 

1 

2 

4 

3 

2 THRU 4 
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0052 

0052-3/4 blank 

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) 

ITEM 

NO. 

SMR 

CODE NSN CAGEC 

PART 

NUMBER 

DESCRIPTION AND USABLE ON 

CODE (UOC) QTY 

 GROUP 06 VENT VALVE ASSEMBLY 

FIG. 6 VENT VALVE ASSEMBLY 

1 PACZZ 7310-01-462-4942 L4703 980280K MBU ASSY VENT VALVE 1 

2 XACZZ 3AD06 980280 . VENT VALVE 1 

3 PACZZ 5305-01-481-0580 9W655 180629 . SCREW, MACHINE, #10 C/W L/WASHER 4 

4 PACZZ 5331-01-183-0991 81343 M83461/1-223 . O-RING, 233 COMP 1 1 

 

END OF FIGURE 

 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0053 

0053-1 

OPERATOR AND FIELD MAINTENANCE 

BURNER ASSEMBLY 

 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0053 

0053-2 

Figure 7. Burner Assembly. 

3 

2 

2 and 3 

1 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0053 

0053-3/4 blank 

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) 

ITEM 

NO. 

SMR 

CODE NSN CAGEC 

PART 

NUMBER 

DESCRIPTION AND USABLE ON 

CODE (UOC) QTY

 GROUP 07 BURNER ASSEMBLY 

FIG. 7 BURNER ASSEMBLY 

1 PACZZ 7310-01-462-4943 L4703 880110K MBU ASSY, BURNER 1 

2 XACZZ L4703 880110 . BURNER TUBE 1 

3 PACZZ 5305-01-483-3412 9W655 029422 . SCREW, MACHINE, PHMS 1/4NC X 5/8 SS 4 

 

END OF FIGURE 

TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0054 

0054-1 

OPERATOR AND FIELD MAINTENANCE 

FUEL REGULATOR ASSEMBLY 
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0054 

0054-2 

Figure 8. Fuel Regulator Assembly. 

5 

4 

7 

2 

9 

6 

10 

3 

8

2 THRU 10 

1 
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0054 

0054-3/4 blank 

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) 

ITEM 

NO. 

SMR 

CODE NSN CAGEC 

PART 

NUMBER 

DESCRIPTION AND USABLE ON 

CODE (UOC) QTY 

 GROUP 08 FUEL REGULATOR ASSEMBLY 

FIG. 8 FUEL REGULATOR ASSEMBLY 

1 PACZZ 7310-01-462-4944 L4703 880050K MBU ASSY, FUEL REGULATOR 1 

2 PACZZ 7310-01-462-4946 3AD06 980101K . FUEL PICKUP TUBE 1 

3 PACZZ 4730-01-071-9080 93061 61CA-6 . . NUT, TUBE COUPLING, 3/8 IN 1 

4 PACZZ 5331-01-183-0991 81343 M83461/1-223 . O-RING, 233 COMP 1 1 

5 XACZZ 3AD06 980270 . FUEL REGULATOR 1 

6 PACZZ 5305-01-481-0580 9W655 180629 . SCREW, MACHINE, #10 C/W L/WASHER 4 

7 PACZZ 4730-00-542-5796 93601 68C-6-2 . ADAPTER, STRAIGHT, PIPE TO TUBE, 3/8T - 1/8 

 NPTM 1 

8 PACZZ 4720-01-486-0595 50599 031803E0200 . HOSE ASSY, NONMETALLIC, FUEL FEEDER 1 

9 PACZZ 5305-01-481-9121 0J2W4 48-4A . ADAPTER, STRAIGHT, PIPE TO TUBE,1/8-#4 1 

10 PACZZ 7310-01-462-6765 L4703 953451K . MBU FILTER FUEL PICKUP 1 

 

END OF FIGURE 

 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0055 

0055-1 

OPERATOR AND FIELD MAINTENANCE 

REFLECTIVE HEAT SHIELD ASSEMBLY 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0055 

0055-2 

Figure 9. Reflective Heat Shield Assembly. 

1 

3 

4

8 

6 

7 

2 

5

2 THRU 7 

Note: Frame shown 

for illustration only. 

Not included in 

Reflective Heat 

Shield Assembly 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0055 

0055-3/4 blank 

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) 

ITEM 

NO. 

SMR 

CODE NSN CAGEC

PART 

NUMBER 

DESCRIPTION AND USABLE ON 

CODE (UOC) QTY

 GROUP 09 REFLECTIVE HEAT SHIELD ASSEMBLY 

FIG 9 REFLECTIVE HEAT SHIELD ASSEMBLY 

1 PACZZ 7310-01-462-4948 L4703 880004K MBU ASSY, REFLECTIVE HEAT SHIELD 1 

2 PACZZ 7310-01-462-4949 3AD06 880005K . MBU REFLECTIVE HEAT SHIELD 1 

3 PACZZ 5306-01-481-5242 9W655 025C0125CGE . BOLT, SQUARE NECK, CARRIAGE 1/4NC X 1-1/4 

 SS 4 

4 PACZZ 5310-00-582-5677 80205 MS15795-810 . WASHER, FLAT 1⁄4 ID SS 5/8 OD 4 

5 PACZZ 5310-00-984-6610 18876 79NTE040 . NUT, SELF-LOCKING, HEXAGON 4 

6 PACZZ 7310-01-462-4955 3AD06 880080K . MBU BURNER WELL 1 

7 PACZZ 7310-01-462-4959 3AD06 880090K . MBU INSULATION 1 

8 PACZZ 5310-21-920-9094 94223 202-026 . NUT, SHEET SPRING 4 

 

END OF FIGURE 

TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0056 

0056-1 

OPERATOR AND FIELD MAINTENANCE 

FUEL LINE ASSEMBLY 
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0056 

0056-2 

Figure 10. Fuel Line Assembly. 

1 

2 
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0056 

0056-3/4 blank 

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) 

ITEM 

NO. 

SMR 

CODE NSN CAGEC 

PART 

NUMBER 

DESCRIPTION AND USABLE ON 

CODE (UOC) QTY

 GROUP 10 FUEL LINE ASSEMBLY 

FIG. 10 FUEL LINE ASSEMBLY 

1 PAFZZ 7310-01-462-4964 3AD06 980130K MBU ASSY FUEL LINE 1 

2 XDFZZ 97111 BH2-61Y . FITTING, FUEL INTERFACE 1 

 

END OF FIGURE 

TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0057 

0057-1 

OPERATOR AND FIELD MAINTENANCE 

POWER CONVERTER 

Figure 11. Power Converter for MBU (Sheet 1 of 2).

1 

3 

4 

2 
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0057 

0057-2 

Figure 11. Power Converter for MBU-V3 (Sheet 2 of 2).

5 

7 

8 

6 
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0057 

0057-3/4 blank 

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) 

ITEM 

NO. 

SMR 

CODE NSN CAGEC 

PART 

NUMBER 

DESCRIPTION AND USABLE ON 

CODE (UOC) QTY

 GROUP 11 POWER CONVERTER 

FIG. 11 POWER CONVERTER 

1 PAFFF 7310-01-453-6513 3AD06 MS0150 POWER CONVERTER, MBU (FQG) 1 

2 PAFZZ 7310-01-462-4990 L4703 981002K . POWER SWITCH (FQG) 1 

3 PAFZZ 5975-01-480-1302 28520 3249 . ADAPTER, ELECTRICAL CONDUIT, STRAIN 

 RELIEF, POWER CORD (FQG) 1 

4 PAFZZ 6150-01-267-5488 1M3W9 17516 . CABLE ASSY, POWER, ELECTRICAL (FQG) 1 

5 PAFFF 7310-01-502-9455 L4703 MS0160 MBU, POWER CONVERTER 1 

6 PAFZZ 5930-20-000-5584 3AD06 980122K . POWER SWITCH 1 

7 PAFZZ 5975-01-480-1302 28520 3249 . ADAPTER, ELECTRICAL CONDUIT, STRAIN 

 RELIEF, POWER CORD 1 

8 PAFZZ 6150-01-267-5488 1M3W9 17516 . CABLE ASSY, POWER, ELECTRICAL 1 

 

END OF FIGURE 

TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0058 

0058-1 

OPERATOR AND FIELD MAINTENANCE 

BATTERY PACK 
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0058 

0058-2 

Figure 12. Battery Pack. 

7 

6 

14 

5 

9 8

3 4 

10 

2 

14 

16

15

11 

13 

12 

1 

2 THRU 17 INCLUDES 

15 AND 16 
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0058 

0058-3/4 blank 

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) 

ITEM 

NO. 

SMR 

CODE NSN CAGEC

PART 

NUMBER 

DESCRIPTION AND USABLE ON 

CODE (UOC) QTY

 GROUP 12 BATTERY PACK 

FIG. 12 BATTERY PACK 

1 PAFFF 7310-01-453-6565 L4703 MS0200 BATTERY MODULE, MBU 1 

2 PAFZZ 7310-01-462-4994 3AD06 800205K . MBU BATTERY HOLD DOWN BRACKET 2 

3 PAFZZ 5310-01-396-8168 3AD06 191424 . NUT, SELF-LOCKING, HEXAGON, 1⁄4-20 SS 4 

4 PAFZZ 5310-00-582-5677 80205 MS15795-810 . WASHER, FLAT, 1⁄4 ID X 5/8 OD SS 4 

5 PAFZZ 7310-01-454-1249 L4703 MS0225 . BATTERIES, MBU (pair) 1 

6 PAFZZ 5305-21-910-7640 94223 344-015 . . SCREW,MACHINE 4 

7 PAFFF 7310-01-462-4992 3AD06 800207K . MBU BATTERY PACK COVER 1 

8 PAFZZ 5310-21-905-5279 94223 667-002 . WASHER, LOCK, SPRING 6 

9 PAFZZ 5305-01-483-3412 9W655 029422 . SCREW, MACHINE, 1⁄4-20 X 5/8 LG SS 6 

10 PAFFF 7310-01-462-4997 3AD06 800203K . MBU BATTERY PACK FRAME 1 

11 PAFZZ 5306-21-920-9092 94223 TR-2005 . ROD, SS THREADED 1⁄4-20 X 7.5 IN (CUT TO 

 LENGTH) 4 

12 PAFZZ 5310-21-905-5279 94223 667-002 . WASHER, LOCK, SPRING 8 

13 PAFZZ 5310-00-903-5966 96906 MS51971-1 . NUT, PLAIN, HEXAGON, SS 1⁄4-20 8 

14 PAFZZ 7310-01-462-4998 3AD06 980611K . MBU BATTERY PACK CHARGER 1 

15 PAFZZ 5310-21-905-5279 94223 667-002 . LOCKWASHER, SPRING 6 

16 PAFZZ 5305-01-483-3412 9W655 029422 . SCREW, MACHINE, 1⁄4-20 X 5/8 LG SS 6 

 

END OF FIGURE 

TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0059 

0059-1 

OPERATOR AND FIELD MAINTENANCE 

FUEL CAN ADAPTER AND FUEL HOSE 
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0059 

0059-2 

 

Figure 13. Fuel Can Adapter and Fuel Hose. 

1 

3 

5 4

2 
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0059 

0059-3/4 blank 

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) 

ITEM 

NO. 

SMR 

CODE NSN CAGEC

PART 

NUMBER 

DESCRIPTION AND USABLE ON 

CODE (UOC) QTY

 GROUP 1301 FUEL CAN ADAPTER AND FUEL 

HOSE 

FIG. 13 FUEL CAN ADAPTER AND FUEL HOSE 

1 PACZZ 7310-01-455-3736 L4703 MS0300 FUEL ADAPTER, MBU 1 

2 XACZZ 97111 BH2-60Y . COUPLING HALF, QUICK DISCONNECT (FEMALE) 1 

3 PACZZ 7310-01-455-3735 L4703 MS0350 FUEL LINE, MBU 1 

4 XACZZ 97111 BH2-60Y . COUPLING HALF, QUICK DISCONNECT (FEMALE) 1 

5 XACZZ 97111 BH2-61Y . COUPLING HALF, QUICK DISCONNECT (MALE) 1 

 

END OF FIGURE 

 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0060 

0060-1 

OPERATOR AND FIELD MAINTENANCE 

NATO ADAPTER CABLE 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0060 

0060-2 

Figure 14. NATO Adapter Cable. 

INCLUDES 4 

3 

4 

1 

2 

2 THRU 4 

3 

3 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0060 

0060-3/4 blank 

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) 

ITEM 

NO. 

SMR 

CODE NSN CAGEC

PART 

NUMBER 

DESCRIPTION AND USABLE ON 

CODE (UOC) QTY

 GROUP 1302 NATO ADAPTER CABLE 

FIG. 14 NATO ADAPTER CABLE 

1 PAFFF 7310-01-454-1241 L4703 MS0250 ELECTRICAL ADAPTER, MBU, NATO CABLE 1 

2 XAFZZ 3AD06 981026K . CABLE, POWER 1 

3 PAFZZ 5935-00-567-0128 05593 151605 . CONNECTOR, PLUG, ELECTRICAL, NATO 1 

4 PAFZZ 5340-01-316-1624 19207 12314225 . CAP, PROTECTIVE, DUST AND MOISTURE SEAL 1 

 

END OF FIGURE 

 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0061 

0061-1 

OPERATOR AND FIELD MAINTENANCE 

24VDC EXTENSION AND BRANCH CABLES 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0061 

0061-2 

Figure 15. 24VDC Extension and Branch Cables. 

5 

3 

4 

6 

1 2 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0061 

0061-3/4 blank 

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) 

ITEM 

NO. 

SMR 

CODE NSN CAGEC

PART 

NUMBER 

DESCRIPTION AND USABLE ON 

CODE (UOC) QTY

 GROUP 1303 24VDC EXTENSION AND BRANCH 

 CABLES 

FIG.15 24VDC EXTENSION AND BRANCH CABLES 

1 PACZZ 7310-01-455-0665 L4703 MS0101 CORD LONG, MBU (CABLE A) 1 

2 PACZZ 7310-01-455-1206 L4703 MS0105 CORD SHORT, MBU (CABLE E) 1 

3 PACZZ 6150-01-455-1014 L4703 MS0103 WIRING HARNESS, BRANCHED (CABLE C) 1 

4 PACZZ 7310-01-455-1017 3AD06 MS0104 HARNESS BRANCH, MBU (CABLE D) 1 

5 PACZZ 7310-01-455-0896 L4703 MS0102 HARNESS BRANCH, MBU (CABLE B) 1 

6 PACZZ 7310-01-509-4453 L4703 MS0106 MBU EXT CABLE (CABLE F) 1 

 

END OF FIGURE 

TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0062 

0062-1 

OPERATOR AND FIELD MAINTENANCE 

110VAC EXTENSION CABLES 
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0062 

0062-2 

Figure 16. 110VAC Extension Cables. 

1 

2 
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0062 

0062-3/4 blank 

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) 

ITEM 

NO. 

SMR 

CODE NSN CAGEC

PART 

NUMBER 

DESCRIPTION AND USABLE ON 

CODE (UOC) QTY

 GROUP 1304 110VAC EXTENSION CABLES 

FIG. 16 110VAC EXTENSION CABLES 

1 PACZZ 7310-01-454-1281 L4703 MS0400 EXTENSION CORD, MBU (50 FT) ........................ 1 

2 PACZZ 7310-01-458-5060 L4703 MS0425 EXTENSION CORD SHORT, MBU (25 FT) ........... 1 

 

END OF FIGURE 

TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0063 

0063-1/2 blank 

OPERATOR AND FIELD MAINTENANCE 

BULK MATERIAL 

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) 

ITEM 

NO. 

SMR 

CODE NSN CAGEC 

PART 

NUMBER 

DESCRIPTION AND USABLE ON 

CODE (UOC) QTY

 GROUP 99 GENERAL USE 

STANDARDIZED PARTS 

GROUP 99 BULK MATERIAL 

FIG. 99 BULK 

1 PACZZ 4720-01-247-5457 81343 J30-30R7-1/4ID HOSE, NONMETALLIC (1/4 ID) 2 

2 PACZZ 4720-01-483-6944 21868 6675-06298 HOSE, NONMETALLIC (3/8 ID) 5 

3 MOCZZ 3AD06 989038K HOSE, NONMETALLIC (1/4 ID) 

END OF FIGURE 

1 

 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0064 

0064-1/2 blank 

OPERATOR AND FIELD MAINTENANCE 

SPECIAL TOOLS LIST 

There are no special tools required for the MBU, the MBU-V3, or associated equipment. 

 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0065 

0065-1 

OPERATOR AND FIELD MAINTENANCE 

NATIONAL STOCK NUMBER INDEX 

STOCK NUMBER FIG. ITEM 

4730-00-542-5796 8 7 

5935-00-567-0128 14 3 

5310-00-582-5677 5 22 

 5 44 

 9 4 

 12 4 

5325-00-721-7889 3 5 

5310-00-903-5966 12 13 

5365-00-920-9924 4 6 

4730-00-954-1251 5 9 

 5 33 

5310-00-984-6610 1 6 

 4 7 

 5 21 

 5 43 

 9 5 

4730-01-070-7680 5 23 

 5 45 

4730-01-071-9080 8 3 

5331-01-183-0991 6 4 

 8 4 

5342-01-210-7340 5 12 

 5 36 

4720-01-247-5457 BULK 1 

6150-01-267-5488 11 4 

 11 8 

5340-01-316-1624 14 4 

5310-01-396-8168 12 3 

7310-01-453-6513 11 1 

7310-01-453-6565 12 1 

7310-01-454-1241 14 1 

7310-01-454-1249 12 5 

7310-01-454-1281 16 1 

7310-01-455-0665 15 1 

7310-01-455-0896 15 5 

6150-01-455-1014 15 3 

7310-01-455-1017 15 4 

7310-01-455-1206 15 2 

7310-01-455-3735 13 3 

7310-01-455-3736 13 1 

7310-01-458-5060 16 2 

7310-01-462-4864 1 1 

7310-01-462-4865 1 2 

7310-01-462-4867 1 3 

7310-01-462-4868 2 1 

7310-01-462-4869 3 1 

7310-01-462-4871 3 4 

7310-01-462-4899 4 1 

7310-01-462-4902 4 2 

7310-01-462-4905 5 1 

STOCK NUMBER FIG. ITEM 

 5 25 

7310-01-462-4907 5 16 

 5 40 

7310-01-462-4913 5 2 

 5 26 

7310-01-462-4915 5 4 

 5 28 

7310-01-462-4918 5 20 

 5 42 

7310-01-462-4919 5 6 

 5 30 

7310-01-462-4928 5 18 

7310-01-462-4936 5 24 

 5 41 

7310-01-462-4942 6 1 

7310-01-462-4943 7 1 

7310-01-462-4944 8 1 

7310-01-462-4946 8 2 

7310-01-462-4948 9 1 

7310-01-462-4949 9 2 

7310-01-462-4955 9 6 

7310-01-462-4959 9 7 

7310-01-462-4964 10 1 

7310-01-462-4990 11 2 

7310-01-462-4992 12 7 

7310-01-462-4994 12 2 

7310-01-462-4997 12 10 

7310-01-462-4998 12 14 

7310-01-462-6765 8 10 

5340-01-479-5144 1 4 

5340-01-479-5180 1 5 

5340-01-479-7760 2 4 

5340-01-479-7770 2 3 

5340-01-479-8335 3 3 

4810-01-480-0851 5 3 

 5 27 

4810-01-480-0861 5 14 

 5 37 

5975-01-480-1302 11 3 

 11 7 

5305-01-481-0580 5 19 

 6 3 

 8 6 

5306-01-481-5242 9 3 

4730-01-481-9121 5 15 

 5 39 

 8 9 

4730-01-481-9200 5 7 

 5 31 

4730-01-481-9210 5 8 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0065 

0065-2 

STOCK NUMBER FIG. ITEM 

 5 32 

5305-01-483-3412 7 3 

 12 9 

 12 16 

4120-01-483-6944 BULK 2 

 

4720-01-486-0595 8 8 

4730-01-486-1138 4 4 

7310-01-502-9455 11 5 

7310-01-507-9302 3 1 

 3 2 

STOCK NUMBER FIG. ITEM 

7310-01-509-4453 15 6 

5930-20-000-5584 11 6 

5310-21-905-5279 12 8 

 12 12 

 12 15 

5305-21-910-7640 12 6 

5306-21-920-9092 12 11 

5310-21-920-9094 9 8 

5365-21-920-9924 4 6 

5310-21-921-0253 4 8 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0066 

0066-1 

OPERATOR AND FIELD MAINTENANCE 

PART NUMBER INDEX 

PART NUMBER FIG ITEM 

BH2-60Y 13 2 

 13 4 

BH2-61Y 10 2 

 13 5 

HC5-36 4 4 

J30-30R7-1/4ID BULK 1 

M83461/1-223 6 4 

 8 4 

MS0101 15 1 

MS0102 15 5 

MS0103 15 3 

MS0104 15 4 

MS0105 15 2 

MS0106 15 6 

MS0150 11 1 

MS0160 11 5 

MS0200 13 1 

MS0225 12 5 

MS0250 14 1 

MS0300 13 1 

MS0350 13 3 

MS0400 16 1 

MS0425 16 2 

MS15795-810 5 22 

 12 4 

 5 44 

MS51971-1 12 13 

PD MBU-001 3 1 

SHC-50 2 3 

SHC-80 2 4 

TR-2005 12 11 

UM 5010 5 12 

UM 5008 5 9 

 5 33 

W-167 4 8 

WHC-1000-01 1 4 

WHC-1500-01 1 5 

Z103 TYPE SC 4 5 

025C0125CGE 9 3 

029422 12 9 

 12 16 

 7 3 

031803E0200 8 8 

12314225 14 4 

125-4A 5 7 

 5 31 

125-6B 5 8 

 5 32 

151605 14 3 

17516 11 4 

PART NUMBER FIG ITEM 

 11 8 

180629 5 19 

 6 3 

 8 6 

191424 12 3 

1X1024-24VDC 5 14 

 5 37 

202-026 9 8 

229-6-2 5 23 

 5 45 

2X1323-24VDC 5 3 

 5 27 

3249 11 3 

 11 7 

344-015 12 6 

349930K 5 2 

 5 26 

48-4A 5 15 

 5 39 

 8 9 

48-99-221-92N 3 3 

491-100 2 2 

5137-37MD 3 5 

61CA-6 8 3 

667-002 12 8 

 12 12 

 12 15 

6675-06298 BULK 2 

68C-6-2 8 7 

79NTE040 9 5 

 5 21 

 5 43 

800203K 12 10 

800205K 12 2 

800207K 12 7 

860073 5 36 

880004K 9 1 

880005K 9 2 

880050K 8 1 

880080K 9 6 

880090K 9 7 

880110 7 2 

880110K 7 1 

880150K 5 16 

 5 40 

9171692-3 1 6 

910729K 5 24 

 5 41 

928329K 5 6 

 5 30 
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0066 

0066-2 

PART NUMBER FIG ITEM 

930125K 5 20 

 5 42 

930700 5 5 

930740K 2 1 

930929K 3 4 

933827K 4 2 

933900 4 3 

935631K 1 2 

935874 5 29 

953451K 8 10 

980101K 8 2 

980122K 11 6 

980124K 4 1 

980130K 10 1 

980230K 5 1 

980240K 3 1 

980250K 1 1 

980260K 5 4 

 5 28 

PART NUMBER FIG ITEM 

980270 8 5 

980280 6 2 

980280K 6 1 

980310K 5 25 

980350 3 2 

980350K 3 2 

980610K 5 18 

980611K 12 14 

980940K 1 3 

981002K 11 2 

981026K 14 2 

981028 5 17 

989000K 5 10 

 5 34 

989038K 5 11 

 5 13 

 5 35 

 5 38 

 BULK 3

END OF WORK PACKAGE 
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 

CHAPTER 7 

SUPPORTING INFORMATION 

FOR 

MODERN BURNER UNIT 

 AND 

 MODERN BURNER UNIT-V3 

 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0067 

0067-1 

OPERATOR AND FIELD MAINTENANCE 

REFERENCES 

SCOPE 

This Work Package lists all field manuals, forms, technical manuals and miscellaneous publications 

referenced in this manual. 

FIELD MANUALS 

Basic Doctrine for Army Field Feeding and Class I Operations Management ................................. FM 10-23 

Basic Cold Weather Manual ............................................................................................................. FM 31-70 

Northern Operations ......................................................................................................................... FM 31-71 

NBC Packaging of Material – Preservation .................................................................................... FM 38-700 

Packaging of Material – Packing .................................................................................................... FM 38-701 

Mountain Operations ....................................................................................................................... FM 3-97.6 

First Aid ......................................................................................................................................... FM 4-25.11 

Multiservice Tactics, Techniques and Procedures for Nuclear, Biological, Radiological, and 

Nuclear Decontamination ................................................................................................................ FM 3-11.5 

FORMS 

Product Quality Deficiency Report ....................................................................................................... SF 368 

Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms ..................................................... DA Form 2028 

Hand Receipt/Annex Number................................................................................................... DA Form 2062 

Equipment Control Record .................................................................................................... DA Form 2408-9 

Equipment Inspection and Maintenance Worksheet ................................................................ DA Form 2404 

Equipment Inspection Maintenance Worksheet ................................................................... DA Form 5988-E 

Transportation Discrepancy Report ............................................................................................ DD Form 361 

TECHNICAL MANUALS 

Operator’s Manual: Welding Theory and Application ........................................................................ TC 9-237 

Metal Body Repair and Related Operation ....................................................................................... TC 9-510 

Operator’s, Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual 

Including Repair Parts and Special Tools List for 

2KW Military Tactical Generator Sets 

120 VAC, 60Hz

MEP 531A (Dewey) (NSN 6115-01-435-1565) (EIC: LKA) 

Mechron (NSN 6115-21-912-0393) (EIC: N/A) 

28 VDC

MEP 531A (Dewey) (NSN 6115-01-435-1567) (EIC: LKD) 

Mechron (NSN 6115-21-912-0392) (EIC: N/A) .............................................................. TM 9-6115-673-13&P 

Operator, Organizational and Direct Support Maintenance Manual 

Including Repair Parts and Special Tools List for 

Range Outfit, Gasoline, Model M59 (NSN 7360-00-082-2153); 

Burner Unit, Gasoline, Model M2 (NSN 7310-00-842-9247); 

Burner Unit, Model M2A (NSN 7310-01-017-1285); 

Burner Unit, Model M2A with Safety Device (NSN 7310-01-113-9172); 

Accessory Outfit, Gasoline, Field Range with Baking Rack 

(NSN 7360-00-187-4757) ............................................................................................. TM 10-7360-204-13&P 

Operator’s, Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual 

for Kitchen, Field, Trailer Mounted 

MKT-75 (NSN 7360-00-138-7782) 

MKT-75A (NSN 7360-01-155-6020) 

MKT-82 (NSN 7360-01-155-6020) ................................................................................... TM 10-7360-206-13 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0067 

0067-2 

REFERENCES – CONTINUED 

Operator’s Manual For 

Truck, Utility: Cargo/Troop Carrier, 1-1/4 Ton, 4x4, M998 

(2320-01-107-7155) (EIC: BBD); 

M998A1 (2320-01-371-9577) (EIC: BBN); 

Truck, Utility: Cargo/Troop Carrier, 1-1/4 Ton, 4x4, W/Winch, M1038 

(2320-01-107-7156) (EIC: BBE); 

M1038A1 (2320-01-371-9578) (EIC: BBP); 

Truck, Utility: Heavy Variant, 4x4, 

M1097 (2320-01-346-9317) (EIC: BBM); 

M1097A1 (2320-01-371-9583) (EIC: BBU); 

M1097A2 (2320-01-380-8604) (EIC: BB6); 

M1123 (2320-01-455-9593) (EIC: B6G); 

Truck, Utility: Tow Carrier, Armored, 1-1/4 Ton, 4x4, 

M966 (2320-01-107-7153) (EIC: BBC); 

M966A1 (2320-01-372-3932) (EIC: BBX); 

M1121 (2320-01-956-1282) (EIC: B6H); 

Truck, Utility: Tow Carrier, Armored, 1-1/4 Ton, 4x4, W/Winch, 

M1036 (2320-01-107-7154) (EIC: BBH); 

Truck, Utility: Tow Carrier, W/Supplemental Armor, 1-1/4 Ton, 4x4, 

M1045 (2320-01-146-7191); 

M1045A1 (2320-01-371-9580) (EIC: BBR); 

M1045A2 (2320-01-380-8229) (EIC: BB5); 

Truck, Utility: Tow Carrier, W/Supplemental Armor, 1-1/4 Ton, 4x4, W/Winch, 

M1046 (2320-01-146-7188); 

M1046A1 (2320-01-371-9582) (EIC: BBT); 

Truck, Utility: Armament Carrier, Armored, 1-1/4 Ton, 4x4, M1025 

(2320-01-128-9551) (EIC: BBF); 

M1025A1 (2320-01-371-9584) (EIC: BBV); 

M1025A2 (2320-01-380-8233) (EIC: BB3); 

Truck, Utility: Armament Carrier, Armored, 1-1/4 Ton, 4x4, W/Winch, 

M1026 

(2320-01-128-9552) (EIC: BBG); 

M1026A1 (2320-01-371-9579) (EIC: BBQ); 

Truck, Utility: Armament Carrier, W/Supplemental Armor, 

1-1/4 Ton, 4x4, M1043 

(2320-01-146-7190); M1043A1 (2320-01-372-3933) (EIC: BBY); 

M1043A2 (2320-01-380-8213) (EIC: BB4); 

Truck, Utility: Armament Carrier, W/Supplemental Armor, 1-1/4 Ton, 4x4, 

W/Winch, M1044 (2320-01-146-7189); 

M1044A1 (2320-01-371-9581) (EIC: BBS); 

Truck, Utility: S250 Shelter Carrier, 4x4, M1037 (2320-01-146-7193) 

(EIC: BBK); 

Truck, Utility: S250 Shelter Carrier, 4x4, W/Winch, 

M1042 (2320-01-146-7187); 

Truck, Ambulance, 2-Litter, Armored, 4x4, M996 (2310-01-111-2275) 

(EIC: BBB); M996A1 (2310-01-372-3935) (EIC: BB2); 

Truck, Ambulance, 4-Litter, Armored, 4x4, M997 

(2310-01-111-2274) (EIC: BBA); 

M997A1 (2310-01-372-3934) (EIC: BBZ); M997A2 

(2310-01-380-8225) (EIC: BB8); 

Truck, Ambulance, 2-Litter, Soft Top, 4x4, 

M1035 (2310-01-146-7194); 

M1035A1 (2310-01-371-9585) (EIC: BBW); 

M1035A2 (2310-01-380-8290) (EIC: BB9) ......................................................................... TM 9-2320-280-10 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0067 

0067-3/4 blank 

REFERENCES – CONTINUED 

Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Repair Parts and Special Tools List 

Kitchen, Field, Trailer Mounted ...................................................................................... TM 10-7360-206-23P 

Operator’s, Unit, and Direct Support Maintenance Manual 

Including Repair Parts and Special Tools List for Modular Field Kitchen 

(NSN 7360-01-276-9817) ............................................................................................. TM 10-7360-208-13&P 

Operator, Organizational and Direct Support Maintenance Manual 

Including Repair Parts and Special Tools List for 

Kitchen, Company Level Field Feeding (KCLFF) (NSN 7360-01-200-9828) 

Kitchen, Company Level Field Feeding – Enhanced (KCLFF-E) 

(NSN 7360-01-374-1980) ............................................................................................. TM 10-7360-209-13&P 

Operator’s, Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual 

Including Repair Parts and Special Tools List for Food Sanitation Center (FSC) 

(NSN 7360-01-277-2558) ............................................................................................. TM 10-7360-211-13&P 

Procedures for Destruction of Equipment to Prevent Enemy 

Use (Mobility Equipment Command) ......................................................................................... TM 750-244-3 

PAMPHLETS

The Army Maintenance Management System (TAMMS) User Manual ................................... DA Pam 750-8

MISCELLANEOUS PUBLICATIONS

Occupational and Environmental Health Food Sanitation ........................................................... TB MED 530 

Expendable/Durable Items (Except Medical, Class V, Repair Parts, and Heraldic Items) ........... CTA 50-970 

Army Medical Department Expendable/Durable Items .................................................................. CTA 8-100 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0068 

0068-1 

OPERATOR AND FIELD MAINTENANCE 

MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART (MAC) INTRODUCTION 

MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART (MAC) 

INTRODUCTION 

The Army Maintenance System MAC 

This introduction provides a general explanation of all maintenance and repair functions authorized at the 

two maintenance levels under the Two-Level Maintenance System concept. 

This MAC (immediately following the introduction) designates overall authority and responsibility for the 

performance of maintenance functions on the identified end item or component. The application of the 

maintenance functions to the end item or component shall be consistent with the capacities and 

capabilities of the designated maintenance levels, which are shown on the MAC in column (4) as: 

Field – includes two subcolumns, Crew (C) and Maintainer (F). 

 

Sustainment – includes two subcolumns, Below Depot (H) and Depot (D). 

The maintenance to be performed at field and sustainment levels is described as follows: 

1. Crew maintenance. The responsibility of a using organization to perform maintenance on its 

assigned equipment. It normally consists of inspecting, servicing, lubricating, adjusting, and 

replacing parts, minor assemblies, and subassemblies. The replace function for this level of 

maintenance is indicated by the letter “C” in the third position of the SMR code. A “C” appearing 

in the fourth position of the SMR code indicates complete repair is possible at the crew 

maintenance level. 

2. Maintainer maintenance. Maintenance accomplished on a component, accessory, assembly, 

subassembly, plug-in unit, or other portion either on the system or after it is removed. The replace 

function for this level of maintenance is indicated by the letter “F” appearing in the third position of 

the SMR code. An “F” appearing in the fourth position of the SMR code indicates complete repair 

is possible at the field maintenance level. Items are returned to the user after maintenance is 

performed at this level. 

3. Below depot sustainment. Maintenance accomplished on a component, accessory, assembly, 

subassembly, plug-in unit, or other portion either on the system or after it is removed. The replace 

function for this level of maintenance is indicated by the letter "H" appearing in the third position of 

the SMR code. An "H" appearing in the fourth position of the SMR code indicates complete repair 

is possible at the below depot sustainment maintenance level. Items are returned to the supply 

system after maintenance is performed at this level. 

4. Depot sustainment. Maintenance accomplished on a component, accessory, assembly, 

subassembly, plug-in unit, or other portion either on the system or after it is removed. The replace 

function for this level of maintenance is indicated by the letter "D" or "K" appearing in the third 

position of the SMR code. Depot sustainment maintenance can be performed by either depot 

personnel or contractor personnel. A "D" or "K" appearing in the fourth position of the SMR code 

indicates complete repair is possible at the depot sustainment maintenance level. Items are 

returned to the supply systems after maintenance is performed at this level. 

The tools and test equipment requirements table (immediately following the MAC) lists the tools and test 

equipment (both special tools and common tool sets) required for each maintenance function as 

referenced from the MAC. 

The remarks table (immediately following the tools and test equipment requirements) contains 

supplemental instructions and explanatory notes for a particular maintenance function. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0068 

0068-2 

Maintenance Functions 

Maintenance functions are limited to and defined as follows: 

1. Inspect. To determine the serviceability of an item by comparing its physical, mechanical, and/or 

electrical characteristics with established standards through examination (e.g., by sight, sound, or 

feel). This includes scheduled inspection and gauging and evaluation of cannon tubes. 

2. Test. To verify serviceability by measuring the mechanical, pneumatic, hydraulic, or electrical 

characteristics of an item and comparing those characteristics with prescribed standards on a 

scheduled basis, i.e., load testing of lift devices and hydrostatic testing of pressure hoses. 

3. Service. Operations required periodically to keep an item in proper operating condition; e.g., to 

clean (includes decontaminate, when required), to preserve, to drain, to paint, or to replenish fuel, 

lubricants, chemical fluids, or gases. This includes scheduled exercising and purging of recoil 

mechanisms. The following are examples of service functions: 

a. Unpack. To remove from packing box for service or when required for the performance of 

maintenance operations. 

b. Repack. To return item to packing box after service and other maintenance operations. 

c. Clean. To rid the item of contamination. 

d. Touch up. To spot paint scratched or blistered surfaces. 

e. Mark. To restore obliterated identification. 

4. Adjust. To maintain or regulate, within prescribed limits, by bringing into proper position, or by 

setting the operating characteristics to specified parameters.

5. Align. To adjust specified variable elements of an item to bring about optimum or desired 

performance.

6. Calibrate. To determine and cause corrections to be made or to be adjusted on instruments of 

test, measuring, and diagnostic equipment used in precision measurement. Consists of 

comparisons of two instruments, one of which is a certified standard of known accuracy, to detect 

and adjust any discrepancy in the accuracy of the instrument being compared.

7. Remove/Install. To remove and install the same item when required to perform service or other 

maintenance functions. Install may be the act of emplacing, seating, or fixing into position a spare, 

repair part, or module (component or assembly) in a manner to allow the proper functioning of an 

equipment or system.

8. Paint (ammunition only). To prepare and spray color coats of paint so that the ammunition can be 

identified and protected. The color indicating primary use is applied, preferably, to the entire 

exterior surface as the background color of the item. Other markings are to be repainted as 

original so as to retain proper ammunition identification.

9. Replace. To remove an unserviceable item and install a serviceable counterpart in its place. 

“Replace” is authorized by the MAC and assigned maintenance level is shown as the third position 

code of the Source, Maintenance and Recoverability (SMR) code.

10. Repair. The application of maintenance services, including fault location/troubleshooting, 

removal/installation, disassembly/assembly procedures and maintenance actions to identify 

troubles and restore serviceability to an item by correcting specific damage, fault, malfunction, or 

failure in a part, subassembly, module (component or assembly), end item, or system.
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0068 

0068-3 

NOTE 

The following definitions are applicable to the “repair” maintenance function: 

Services. Inspect, test, service, adjust, align, calibrate, and/or replace. 

Fault location/troubleshooting. The process of investigating and detecting the cause of 

equipment malfunctioning; the act of isolating a fault within a system or Unit Under Test 

(UUT). 

Disassembly/assembly. The step-by-step breakdown (taking apart) of a spare/functional 

group coded item to the level of its least component, that is assigned an SMR code for the 

level of maintenance under consideration (i.e., identified as maintenance significant). 

Actions. Welding, grinding, riveting, straightening, facing, machining, and/or resurfacing.

11. Overhaul. That maintenance effort (service/action) prescribed to restore an item to a completely 

serviceable/operational condition as required by maintenance standards in appropriate technical 

publications. Overhaul is normally the highest degree of maintenance performed by the Army. 

Overhaul does not normally return an item to like new condition. 

12. Rebuild. Consists of those services/actions necessary for the restoration of unserviceable 

equipment to a like new condition in accordance with original manufacturing standards. Rebuild is 

the highest degree of material maintenance applied to Army equipment. The rebuild operation 

includes the act of returning to zero those age measurements (e.g., hours/miles) considered in 

classifying Army equipment/components. 

Explanation of Columns in the MAC

Column (1) Group Number. Column (1) lists Functional Group Code (FGC) numbers, the purpose of 

which is to identify maintenance significant components, assemblies, subassemblies, and modules with 

the Next Higher Assembly (NHA). 

Column (2) Component/Assembly. Column (2) contains the item names of components, assemblies, 

subassemblies, and modules for which maintenance is authorized. 

Column (3) Maintenance Function. Column (3) lists the functions to be performed on the item listed in 

column (2). (For a detailed explanation of these functions refer to “Maintenance Functions” outlined 

above). 

Column (4) Maintenance Level. Column (4) specifies each level of maintenance authorized to perform 

each function listed in column (3), by indicating work time required (expressed as manhours in whole 

hours or decimals) in the appropriate subcolumn. This work time figure represents the active time 

required to perform that maintenance function at the indicated level of maintenance. If the number or 

complexity of the tasks within the listed maintenance function varies at different maintenance levels, 

appropriate work time figures are to be shown for each level. The work time figure represents the average 

time required to restore an item (assembly, subassembly, component, module, end item, or system) to a 

serviceable condition under typical field operating conditions. This time includes preparation time 

(including any necessary disassembly/assembly time), troubleshooting/fault location time, and quality 

assurance time in addition to the time required to perform the specific tasks identified for the maintenance 

functions authorized in the MAC. The symbol designations for the various maintenance levels are as 

follows: 

Field:

C Crew maintenance 

F Maintainer maintenance 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0068 

0068-4 

Sustainment:

NOTE 

The “L” maintenance level is not included in column (4) of the MAC. Functions to this 

level of maintenance are identified by work time figure in the “H” column of column (4), 

and an associated reference code is used in the REMARKS column (6). This code is 

keyed to the remarks and the SRA complete repair application is explained there. 

Column (5) Tools and Equipment Reference Code. Column (5) specifies, by code, those common tool 

sets (not individual tools), common Test, Measurement and Diagnostic Equipment (TMDE), and special 

tools, special TMDE, and special support equipment required to perform the designated function. Codes 

are keyed to the entries in the tools and test equipment table. 

Column (6) Remarks Code. When applicable, this column contains a letter code, in alphabetical order, 

which is keyed to the remarks table entries. 

Explanation of Columns in the Tools and Test Equipment Requirements 

Column (1) – Tool or Test Equipment Reference Code. The tool or test equipment reference code 

correlates with a code used in column (5) of the MAC. 

Column (2) – Maintenance Level. The lowest level of maintenance authorized to use the tool or test 

equipment. 

Column (3) – Nomenclature. Name or identification of the tool or test equipment. 

Column (4) – National Stock Number (NSN). The NSN of the tool or test equipment. 

Column (5) – Tool Number. The manufacturer's part number. 

Explanation of Columns in the Remarks 

Column (1) – Remarks Code. The code recorded in column (6) of the MAC. 

Column (2) – Remarks. This column lists information pertinent to the maintenance function being 

performed as indicated in the MAC.

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

L Specialized Repair Activity (SRA) 

H Below depot maintenance 

D Depot maintenance 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0069 

0069-1 

OPERATOR AND FIELD MAINTENANCE 

MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART (MAC) 

Table 1. MAC for Modem Burner Unit (MBU and MBU-V3). 

(1) 

GROUP 

NUMBER 

(2) 

COMPONENT/ 

ASSEMBLY 

(3) 

MAINTENANCE 

FUNCTION 

(4) 

MAINTENANCE LEVEL 

(5) 

TOOLS AND 

EQUIPMENT 

REFERENCE 

CODE 

(6) 

REMARKS 

CODE 

FIELD SUSTAINMENT 

CREW MAINTAINER BELOW 

DEPOT 

DEPOT

C F H D 

00 MBU Inspect 

Service 

0.1 

0.5 

 

1 A, B, C 

 

01 ASSEMBLY, 

FRAME 

Inspect 

Repair 

0.1 

0.5 

 

3 D, E 

 

0101 CLIPS, CABLE Inspect 

Replace 

0.1 

0.2 0.2 

 

 

02 ASSEMBLY, 

ELECTRICAL 

CONNECTOR 

Inspect 

Test 

Replace 

0.1 

0.1 

0.4 

 

2 

2 

C 

C 

 

03 ASSEMBLY, 

CONTROLLER 

Inspect 

Replace 

Calibrate 

0.1 

0.4 

0.1 

 

1 

1 

C 

C 

 

0301 ASSEMBLY, 

CONTROLLER 

PAWL 

Inspect 

Replace 

0.1 

0.4 

 

1 C 

 

04 ASSEMBLY, 

COMPRESSOR 

Inspect 

Test 

Replace 

0.1 

0.3 

0.4 

 

1 

1 

C 

C 

 

05 ASSEMBLY, 

FUEL 

DELIVERY 

BLOCK 

Inspect 

Test 

Remove/ 

Install 

Adjust 

Replace 

0.1 

0.3 

0.3 

0.5 

0.5 

 

1 

1 

1 

1 

C 

C 

C 

 

0501 FILTER, AIR Test 

Replace 

0.1 

0.2 

 1 

1 

 

0502 IGNITER Replace 0.2 1 

0503 NOZZLE, FUEL Replace 0.2 1 

 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0069 

0069-2 

Table 1. MAC for Modem Burner Unit (MBU and MBU-V3) - Continued. 

(1) 

GROUP 

NUMBER 

(2) 

COMPONENT/ 

ASSEMBLY 

(3) 

MAINTENANCE 

FUNCTION 

(4) 

MAINTENANCE LEVEL 

(5) 

TOOLS AND 

EQUIPMENT 

REFERENCE 

CODE 

(6) 

REMARKS 

CODE 

FIELD SUSTAINMENT 

CREW MAINTAINER BELOW 

DEPOT 

DEPOT

C F H D 

06 ASSEMBLY, 

VENT VALVE 

Inspect 

Service 

Replace 

0.1 

0.1 

0.5 

 

1 

1 

A 

A, C 

 

07 ASSEMBLY, 

BURNER 

Inspect 

Replace 

0.1 

0.4 

 

1 C 

 

08 ASSEMBLY, 

FUEL 

REGULATOR 

Inspect 

Service 

Replace 

0.1 

0.1 

0.2 

 

1 

1 C 

 

0801 FILTER, FUEL Replace 0.2 

 

09 ASSEMBLY, 

REFLECTIVE 

HEAT SHIELD 

Inspect 

Replace 

0.1 

0.2 

 

1 C 

 

10 ASSEMBLY, 

FUEL LINE 

Inspect 

Replace 

0.1 

0.5 

 

2 C 

 

1001 FITTING, FUEL 

INTERFACE 

Inspect 

Replace 

0.1 

0.4 

 

2 C 

 

11 CONVERTER, 

POWER 

Inspect 

Test 

Replace 

0.1 

0.4 

0.5 

 

2 

2 

C 

C 

 

12 PACK, 

BATTERY 

Inspect 

Repair 

Replace 

0.1 

0.5 

0.1 

 1 

2 

2 

C, D, E 

 

1201 BATTERIES Inspect 

Test 

Replace 

0.1 

0.3 

0.4 

 1 

2 

2 

C 

C 

C 

 

1202 CHARGER, 

BATTERY 

Inspect 

Test 

Replace 

0.1 

0.5 

0.4 

 1 

2 

2 

C 

C 

C 

 

13 ASSEMBLIES, 

MISC. 

 

1301 ADAPTER, 

FUEL CAN, 

AND FUEL 

HOSE 

Inspect 

Replace 

0.1 

0.1 

 C 

C 

 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0069 

0069-3/4 blank 

Table 1. MAC for Modem Burner Unit (MBU and MBU-V3) - Continued. 

(1) 

GROUP 

NUMBER 

(2) 

COMPONENT/ 

ASSEMBLY 

(3) 

MAINTENANCE 

FUNCTION 

(4) 

MAINTENANCE LEVEL 

(5) 

TOOLS AND 

EQUIPMENT 

REFERENCE 

CODE 

(6) 

REMARKS 

CODE 

FIELD SUSTAINMENT 

CREW MAINTAINER BELOW 

DEPOT 

DEPOT

C F H D 

1302 CABLE, NATO 

ADAPTER 

Inspect 

Test 

Replace 

0.1 

0.2 

0.1 

 

2 

2 

C 

C 

C 

 

1303 CABLES, 

24VDC 

EXTENSION 

AND BRANCH 

Inspect 

Replace 

0.1 

0.1 

 

F 

 

1304 CABLES, 

110VAC 

EXTENSION 

Inspect 

Replace 

0.1 

0.1 

 

Table 2. Tools and Test Equipment for Modern Burner Unit (MBU and MBU-V3). 

TOOL OR TEST 

EQUIPMENT 

REFERENCE 

CODE 

MAINTENANCE 

LEVEL 

NOMENCLATURE NATIONAL 

STOCK NUMBER 

(NSN) 

TOOL NUMBER 

1 C MBU TOOL KIT 5180-01-565-2047 DFP TRI-013 

2 C TOOL KIT, GENERAL MECHANIC’S: 

AUTOMOTIVE 

5180-01-454-3787 

5180-01-483-0249 

SC 5180-95-B47 

3 F WELDING SHOP, TRAILER 

MOUNTED 

3431-01-090-1231 SC 3431-95-CLA04 

Table 3. Remarks for Modern Burner Unit (MBU and MBU-V3). 

REMARKS 

CODE 

REMARKS 

A Availability of tools necessary for operator to perform this maintenance function is dependent on application. 

Refer to Setup information in the maintenance work package. 

B Service is specific to draining the fuel tank. 

C 

Maintenance shall be performed using the tools associated with the systems in which the MBU is being used 

(MKT, KCLFF, etc). The MBU Tool Kit is an additional authorized tool kit located in WP 0073 that should be used 

when the tools necessary to perform maintenance are not available. 

D Perform welding operations as directed in TC 9-237, Welding Theory and Application. 

E Perform repairs to the body as directed in TC 9-510, Metal Body Repair and Related Operations. 

F This includes the 12-ft Crossway Cable. 

END OF WORK PACKAGE

 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0070 

0070-1 

OPERATOR AND FIELD MAINTENANCE 

COMPONENTS OF END ITEM (COEI) AND BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (BII) LISTS 

INTRODUCTION 

Scope 

This work package lists COEI and BII for the Modern Burner Unit (MBU and MBU-V3) to help you 

inventory items for safe and efficient operation of the equipment. 

General 

The COEI and BII information is divided into the following lists: 

Components of End Item (COEI). This list is for information purposes only and is not authority to 

requisition replacements. These items are part of the Modern Burner Unit (MBU and MBU-V3). As part of 

the end item, these items must be with the end item whenever it is issued or transferred between property 

accounts. Items of COEI are removed and separately packaged for transportation or shipment only when 

necessary. Illustrations are furnished to help you find and identify the items. 

Basic Issue Items (BII). These essential items are required to place the Modern Burner Unit (MBU and 

MBU-V3) in operation, operate it, and to do emergency repairs. Although shipped separately packaged, 

BII must be with the Modern Burner Unit (MBU and MBU-V3) during operation and when it is transferred 

between property accounts. Listing these items is your authority to request/requisition them for 

replacement based on authorization of the end item by the TOE/MTOE. Illustrations are furnished to help 

you find and identify the items. 

Explanation of Columns in the COEI List and BII List 

Column (1) Illus Number. Gives you the number of the item illustrated. 

Column (2) National Stock Number (NSN). Identifies the stock number of the item to be used for 

requisitioning purposes. 

Column (3) Description, Part Number/(CAGEC). Identifies the Federal item name (in all capital letters) 

followed by a minimum description when needed. The stowage location of COEI and BII is also included 

in this column. The last line below the description is the part number and the Commercial and 

Government Entity Code (CAGEC) (in parentheses). 

Column (4) Usable On Code. When applicable, gives you a code if the item you need is not the same for 

different models of equipment. These codes are identified below: 

Code Used On

FQG MBU 

FTW MBU-V3 

Column (5) U/I. Unit of Issue (U/I) indicates the physical measurement or count of the item as issued per 

the National Stock Number shown in column (2). 

Column (6) Qty Rqr. Indicates the quantity required. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0070 

0070-2 

Table 1. Components of End Item List. 

(1) 

Illus 

Number 

(2) 

National Stock Number 

(NSN) 

(3) 

Description, Part 

Number/(CAGEC) 

(4) 

Usable On 

Code 

(5) 

U/I 

(6) 

Qty 

Rqr. 

1 7310-01-452-8137 

OR 

MBU 

(3AD06) MS0001 

FQG EA 1 

2 7310-01-507-9310 MBU-V3 

(L4703) MS0003 

FTW EA 1 

1 

2 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0070 

0070-3/4 blank 

Table 2. Basic Issue Items List. 

Table 2. Basic Issue Items List. 

(1) 

Illus 

Number 

(2) 

National Stock 

Number (NSN) 

(3) 

Description, Part Number/(CAGEC) 

(4) 

Usable 

On Code 

(5) 

U/I 

(6) 

Qty 

Rqr. 

1 N/A TM 10-7310-281-13&P EA 1 

END OF WORK PACKAGE

1 

 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0071 

0071-1 

OPERATOR AND FIELD MAINTENANCE 

ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST (AAL) 

INTRODUCTION 

Scope 

This work package lists additional items you are authorized for the support of the Modern Burner Unit 

(MBU and MBU-V3). 

General 

This list identifies items that do not have to accompany the Modern Burner Unit (MBU and MBU-V3) and 

that do not have to be turned in with it. These items are all authorized to you by CTA, MTOE, TDA, or 

JTA. 

Explanation of Columns in the AAL 

Column (1) National Stock Number (NSN). Identifies the stock number of the item to be used for 

requisitioning purposes. 

Column (2) Description, Part Number/(CAGEC) identifies the Federal item name (in all capital letters) 

followed by a minimum description when needed. The last line below the description is the part number 

part number and Commercial and Government Entity Code (CAGEC) (in parentheses). 

Column (3) Usable On Code. When applicable, gives you a code if the item you need is not the same for 

different models of equipment. These codes are identified below: 

Code Used On

PAA MFK KIT 

PAB MKT KIT 

PAC FSC KIT 

PAD KCLFF-E KIT 

Column (4) U/I. Unit of Issue (U/I) indicates the physical measurement or count of the item as issued per 

the National Stock Number shown in column (1). 

Column (5) Qty Recm. Indicates the quantity recommended. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0071 

0071-2 

Table 1. Additional Authorization List. 

(1) 

National Stock 

Number (NSN) 

(2) 

Description, Part Number/(CAGEC) 

(3) 

Usable On 

Code 

(4) 

U/I 

(5) 

Qty 

Recm 

7310-01-454-1249 BATTERY 

(L4703) MS0225 

 EA 2 

7310-01-453-6565 BATTERY PACK 

(L4703) MS0200 

PAD EA 1 

7310-01-455-0665 CABLE A, EXTENSION 25FT 

(L4703) MS0101 

PAA 

PAC 

PAD 

EA 

EA 

EA 

3 

1 

1 

7310-01-455-0896 CABLE B, MKT, 4 BRANCH 

(L4703) MS0105 

PAB EA 1 

7310-01-455-1014 CABLE C, MKT, 2 BRANCH 

(L4703) MS0103 

PAB EA 1 

7310-01-455-1017 CABLE D, 2 BRANCH 

(3AD06) MS0104 

PAA 

PAC 

PAD 

EA 

EA 

EA 

5 

2 

2 

7310-01-455-1206 CABLE E, MKT EXTENSION 12FT 

(L4703) MS0105 

PAB EA 1 

7310-01-509-4453 CABLE F, EXTENSION 3FT 

(L4703) MS0106 

PAC 

PAD 

EA 

EA 

1 

1 

1025-01-214-6568 CLEANING KIT, BORE, WEAPON, SMALL 

(65983) BOR-CAP-20 

 EA 1 

7310-01-458-5060 EXTENSION CORD, 25FT (110VAC) 

(L4703) MS0425 

PAA 

PAB 

PAC 

EA 

EA 

EA 

1 

1 

1 

7310-01-454-1281 EXTENSION CORD, 50FT (110VAC) 

(L4703) MS0400 

PAA 

PAB 

PAC 

EA 

EA 

EA 

1 

1 

1 

7240-01-337-5269 

(GREEN) 

OR 

7240-01-337-5268 

(TAN) 

FUEL CAN (GREEN ) 

(56161) 

FUEL CAN (TAN) 

(19204) RIA 150374-1 

 EA 2 

7310-01-455-3736 FUEL ADAPTER, MBU 

(L4703) MS0300 

PAA 

PAB 

PAC 

PAD 

EA 

EA 

EA 

EA 

2 

2 

1 

1 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0071 

0071-3/4 blank 

Table 1. Additional Authorization List – Continued. 

(1) 

National Stock 

Number (NSN) 

(2) 

Description, Part Number/(CAGEC) 

(3) 

Usable On 

Code 

(4) 

U/I 

(5) 

Qty 

Recm 

7310-01-455-3735 FUEL LINE, MBU 

(L4703) MS0350 

PAA 

PAB 

PAC 

PAD 

EA 

EA 

EA 

EA 

2 

2 

1 

1 

5180-01-565-2047 MBU TOOL KIT PAA EA 1 

7310-01-454-1241 NATO ELECTRICAL ADAPTER (24VDC) 

(L4703) MS0250 

PAD EA 1 

7310-01-453-6513 POWER CONVERTER FOR MBU-V3 

(3AD06) MS0150 

PAA 

PAB 

PAC 

EA 

EA 

EA 

1 

1 

1 

7310-01-502-9455 POWER CONVERTER FOR MBU 

(L4703) MS0160 

PAA 

PAB 

PAC 

EA 

EA 

EA 

1 

1 

1 

5120-01-548-9061 PUNCH, DRIVE PIN 

(59678) 21002 

PAA EA 1 

5975-00-878-3791 ROD, GROUNDING 

(58536) AA55804-3B 9FT 

 EA 1 

7240-00-177-6154 SPOUT, CAN FLEXIBLE 

(19207) 11677020 

 EA 1 

5120-00-228-9505 WRENCH, BOX AND OPEN END, COMBINATION 

(05047) B107.100 

PAA EA 1 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0072 

0072-1 

OPERATOR AND FIELD MAINTENANCE 

EXPENDABLE AND DURABLE ITEMS LIST 

INTRODUCTION 

Scope 

This work package lists expendable and durable items that you will need to operate and maintain the 

Modern Burner Unit (MBU and MBU V-3). This list is for information only and is not authority to requisition 

the listed items. These items are authorized to you by CTA 50-970, Expendable/Durable Items (Except 

Medical, Class V Repair Parts, and Heraldic Items), CTA 50-909, Field and Garrison Furnishings and 

Equipment or CTA 8-100, Army Medical Department Expendable/Durable Items.

Explanations of Columns in Expendable/Durable Items List 

Column (1) Item No. This number is assigned to the entry in the list and is referenced in the narrative 

instructions to identify the item (e.g., Use brake fluid (WP 0098, Item 5)). 

Column (2) Level. This column includes the lowest level of maintenance that requires the listed item 

(C=Crew, F=Maintainer/ASB). 

Column (3) National Stock Number (NSN). This is the NSN assigned to the item which you can use to 

requisition it. 

Column (4) Item Name, Description, Part Number/(CAGEC). This column provides the other information 

you need to identify the item. The last line below the description is the part number and the Commercial 

and Government Entity Code (CAGEC) (in parentheses). 

Column (5) U/I. Unit of Issue (U/I) code shows the physical measurement or count of an item, such as 

gallon, dozen, gross, etc. 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0072 

0072-2 

Table 1. Expendable and Durable Items List. 

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) 

Item 

No. Level 

National Stock 

Number (NSN) Item Name, Description, Part Number/(CAGEC) U/I 

1 C, F 7930-01-363-8631 ABSORBENT MATERIAL, OIL AND WATER 

MAT203 (1JA49) 

BG 

2 C, F 7920-00-514-2417 BRUSH, ACID SWABBING 

7920-00-514-2417 (80244) 

GR 

3 C, F 8415-00-009-1900 GLOVES, CHEMICAL AND OIL PROTECTIVE 

N36 (86523) 

PR 

4 C, F 4230-01-323-5298 MASK, FACE, DISPOSABLE 

5453T42 (39428) 

EA 

5 C, F 7920-00-205-1711 RAG, WIPING 

7920-00-205-1711 (80244) 

BE 

6 F 8030-01-166-0675 SEALING COMPOUND 

56747 (05972) 

TU 

7 C, F 9905-00-537-8954 TAGS, MARKING 

9905-00-537-8954 (64067) 

BD 

 8 F 5970-00-419-4291 TAPE, INSULATION, ELECTRICAL 

MIL-I-24391 (81349) 

RO 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0073 

0073-1/2 blank

OPERATOR AND FIELD MAINTENANCE 

TOOL IDENTIFICATION LIST 

INTRODUCTION 

Scope 

This work package lists all common tools and supplements and special tools/fixtures needed to maintain 

the Modern Burner Unit and Modern Burner Unit-V3. 

Explanation of Columns in the Tool Identification List 

Column (1) Item No. This number is assigned to the entry in the list and is referenced in the initial setup to 

identify the item (e.g., Extractor (WP 0090, Item 32)). 

Column (2) Item Name. This column lists the item by noun nomenclature and other descriptive features 

(e.g., Gage, belt tension). 

Column (3) National Stock Number (NSN). This is the National Stock Number (NSN) assigned to the item; 

use it to requisition the item. 

Column (4) Part Number/(CAGEC). Indicates the primary number used by the manufacturer (individual, 

company, firm, corporation, or Government activity) which controls the design and characteristics of the 

item by means of its engineering drawings, specifications, standards, and inspection requirements to 

identify an item or range of items. The manufacturer’s Commercial and Government Entity Code 

(CAGEC) is also included. 

Column (5) Reference. This column identifies the authorizing supply catalog or RPSTL for items listed in 

this work package. 

Table 1. Tool Identification List. 

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) 

Item 

No. Item Name 

National Stock 

Number (NSN) 

Part Number/ 

(CAGEC) Reference 

1 MBU Tool Kit 5180-01-565-2047 DFP TRI-013 

(19207) 

TM 10-7310-281-13&P

2 Tool Kit, General Mechanic’s: 

Automotive (GMTK) 

5180-01-483-0249 12B470000-1 

(59678) 

TM 10-7310-281-13&P

3 Welding Shop, Trailer Mounted 3431-01-090-1231 SC3431-95-CLA04 

(19204) 

TM 10-7310-281-13&P

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 0074 

0074-1/2 blank 

OPERATOR AND FIELD MAINTENANCE 

MANDATORY REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST 

INTRODUCTION

This work package includes a list of all mandatory replacement parts referenced in the task initial setups 

and procedures. These are items that must be replaced during maintenance whether they have failed or 

not. This includes items based on usage intervals such as miles, time, rounds fired, etc. 

MANDATORY REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST 

Table 1. Mandatory Replacement Parts List. 

ITEM 

NO. 

PART 

NUMBER 

(CAGEC) 

NATIONAL STOCK 

NUMBER (NSN) 

NOMENCLATURE QTY 

EVERY 300 HOURS

1 PD MBU-001 

(81349) 

7310-01-462-4905 MBU Fuel Delivery Block 1 

2 953451K 

(L4703) 

7310-01-462-6765 In-Tank Fuel Filter 1 

3 M83461/1-223 

(81343) 

5331-01-183-0991 Fuel Regulator O-ring 1 

EVERY 2000 HOURS

4 980260K 

(L4703) 

7310-01-462-4915 MBU, Assembly, Igniter 1 

5 928329K 

(L4703) 

7310-01-462-4919 Fuel Nozzle 1 

END OF WORK PACKAGE

 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 

Index-1

INDEX 

Subject WP Sequence No.—Page No.

A 

Abbreviations/Acronyms.............................................................................................WP 0001-6 

Actions During Operation.......................................................................................... WP 0003-1 

Adapter Fuel Can, Operator Maintenance..................................................................... WP 0031-1 

Additional Authorization List (AAL).............................................................................. WP 0071-1 

Air Filter, Operator Maintenance................................................................................. WP 0020-1 

Air Vent, Fuel Regulator, Operator Maintenance............................................................ WP 0025-1 

Appliance, Installing MBU into ..................................................................................................... WP 0005-2 

Assembly and Preparation for Use ............................................................................................... WP 0005-1 

Automatic Shutdown .................................................................................................................... WP 0003-1 

Automatic System Shutdown ..................................................................................................... WP 0005-22 

B 

Basic Issue Items (BII) List ........................................................................................................... WP 0070-1 

Batteries, Field Maintenance ....................................................................................................... WP 0043-1 

Batteries, Operator Maintenance ................................................................................................. WP 0030-1 

Battery Charger, Field Maintenance ............................................................................................ WP 0044-1 

Battery Charger, Operator Maintenance ...................................................................................... WP 0030-1 

Battery Lead, Disconnect ............................................................................................................. WP 0001-5 

Battery Pack Controls and Indicators ........................................................................................... WP 0004-4 

Battery Pack, Field Maintenance ................................................................................................. WP 0042-1 

Battery Pack, Operating Procedures ......................................................................................... WP 0005-28 

Battery Pack, Operator Maintenance ........................................................................................... WP 0030-1 

Battery Replacement .................................................................................................................... WP 0043-2

Bulk Material Repair Parts List ..................................................................................................... WP 0063-1 

Burner Control Temperature Adjustment ................................................................................... WP 0005-22 

C 

Cable Clips, Field Maintenance ................................................................................................... WP 0037-1 

Cable Clips, Operator Maintenance ............................................................................................. WP 0015-1 

Cables, Connect Power in the MKT Using 110VAC Power ......................................................... WP 0005-7 

Cables, Connecting to the MBU Prior to Operation ..................................................................... WP 0005-7 

Capabilities ................................................................................................................................... WP 0002-1 

Care and Handling ....................................................................................................................... WP 0001-7 

CBRN, Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and Nuclear Decontamination........................... WP 0006-2 

Characteristics ............................................................................................................................. WP 0002-1 

Charger, Field Maintenance ......................................................................................................... WP 0044-1 

Charger, Operator Maintenance .................................................................................................. WP 0030-1 

Check, Pre-Operational .............................................................................................................. WP 0005-15 

Cleaning of Fuel Regulator Assembly Air Vent ............................................................................ WP 0025-3 

Cold, Extreme .............................................................................................................................. WP 0006-2 

Components of End Item (COEI) List & Basic Issue Items (BII) List ........................................... WP 0070-1 

Components, Description of System ............................................................................................ WP 0002-2 

Compressor Assembly, Operator Maintenance ........................................................................... WP 0018-1 

Configuration, Equipment ............................................................................................................. WP 0002-8 

Connect Cables in the MKT ......................................................................................................... WP 0005-9 

Connect Power Cables in the MKT Using 110VAC Power .......................................................... WP 0005-7 

Connect Power Cables Using Vehicular Power (22-29 VDC) Alone ......................................... WP 0005-12 

Connect Power Cables with 110VAC Power ............................................................................. WP 0005-11 

Connecting Cables to the MBU Prior To Operation ..................................................................... WP 0005-7 

Connecting Power Cables Using the Battery Pack Alone ......................................................... WP 0005-14 

Connecting Power Cables Using Vehicular Power and Battery Pack ....................................... WP 0005-13 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 

Index-2

Subject WP Sequence No.—Page No.

C – Continued 

Controller Assembly, Operator Maintenance ............................................................................... WP 0017-1 

Controls and Indicators (MBU) ..................................................................................................... WP 0004-1 

Controls and Indicators (MBU-V3) ............................................................................................... WP 0004-2 

Controls and Indicators, Battery Pack .......................................................................................... WP 0004-4 

Controls and Indicators, Power Converter ................................................................................... WP 0004-3 

Corrosion Prevention and Control (CPC) ..................................................................................... WP 0001-2 

CPC - Corrosion Prevention and Control ..................................................................................... WP 0001-2 

Cross-Reference List, Nomenclature ........................................................................................... WP 0001-6 

Crossway Cable (24VDC) ............................................................................................................ WP 0035-3 

D 

Data, Equipment .......................................................................................................................... WP 0002-7 

Decals and Instruction Plates..................................................................................................... WP 0005-25 

Decontamination, CBRN (Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and Nuclear) ................................ WP 0006-2 

Description of System Components ............................................................................................. WP 0002-2 

Destruction of Army Materiel to Prevent Enemy Use .................................................................. WP 0001-3

Differences Between Models ....................................................................................................... WP 0002-2 

Disconnect Battery Lead .............................................................................................................. WP 0001-5 

Drain the Fuel Tank ...................................................................................................................... WP 0014-1 

Dust .............................................................................................................................................. WP 0006-1 

E 

EIR, Reporting Equipment Improvement Recommendations ...................................................... WP 0001-2 

Electrical Connector Assembly, Field Maintenance ..................................................................... WP 0038-1 

Electrical Connector Assembly, Operator Maintenance .............................................................. WP 0016-1 

Electrical Supply ........................................................................................................................... WP 0003-1 

Electronic Data, Security Measures for ........................................................................................ WP 0005-1 

Electronic Data, Security Measures for ......................................................................................... WP 0006-1 

Equipment Characteristics, Capabilities and Features ................................................................. WP 0002-1 

Equipment Configuration .............................................................................................................. WP 0002-8 

Equipment Data ........................................................................................................................... WP 0002-7 

Expendable and Durable Items List ............................................................................................. WP 0072-1 

Extension Cable 110VAC, Operator Maintenance ...................................................................... WP 0034-1 

Extension Cable 24VDC, Operator Maintenance ........................................................................ WP 0033-1

Extreme Cold ............................................................................................................................... WP 0006-2 

Extreme Heat ............................................................................................................................... WP 0006-2 

F 

Fault Indicators ........................................................................................................................... WP 0005-24 

Features ....................................................................................................................................... WP 0002-1 

Filter, Air, Operator Maintenance ................................................................................................. WP 0020-1 

Filter, Fuel, Operator Maintenance .............................................................................................. WP 0026-1 

Frame, MBU, Field Maintenance ................................................................................................. WP 0036-1 

FSC MBU Kit ................................................................................................................................ WP 0005-5 

Fuel Delivery Block Assembly, Operator Maintenance ................................................................ WP 0019-1 

Fuel Filter, Operator Maintenance ............................................................................................... WP 0026-1 

Fuel Hose, Operator Maintenance ............................................................................................... WP 0031-1 

Fuel Interface Fitting, Field Maintenance ..................................................................................... WP 0040-1 

Fuel Interface Fitting, Operator Maintenance .............................................................................. WP 0028-1 

Fuel Line Assembly, Operator Maintenance ................................................................................ WP 0027-1 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 

Index-3

Subject WP Sequence No.—Page No.

F - Continued 

Fuel Nozzle, Operator Maintenance ............................................................................................ WP 0022-1 

Fuel Regulator Air Vent, Operator Maintenance .......................................................................... WP 0025-3 

Fuel Regulator Assembly, Operator Maintenance ....................................................................... WP 0025-1 

Fuel Supply .................................................................................................................................. WP 0003-1 

Fuel Tank, Drain ........................................................................................................................... WP 0014-1 

Fuel Tank, Operator Maintenance ............................................................................................... WP 0014-1 

Fueling, Manual .......................................................................................................................... WP 0005-20 

Fueling, Powered ....................................................................................................................... WP 0005-18 

G 

General Information ..................................................................................................................... WP 0001-3 

General Warnings ......................................................................................................................................... b 

H 

Heat, Extreme .............................................................................................................................. WP 0006-2 

High Winds/Dust .......................................................................................................................... WP 0006-1 

How to Use This Manual ............................................................................................................................... x 

I 

Igniter, Operator Maintenance ..................................................................................................... WP 0021-1 

Index, Malfunction Symptom, Operator ....................................................................................... WP 0007-1 

Index, National Stock Number ..................................................................................................... WP 0065-1 

Index, Part Number ...................................................................................................................... WP 0066-1 

Indicators ...................................................................................................................................... WP 0004-1 

Inspection ..................................................................................................................................... WP 0013-1 

Installation, Crossway Cable, MKT .............................................................................................. WP 0035-3 

Installing MBU into Appliance ...................................................................................................... WP 0005-2 

Instruction Plates ........................................................................................................................ WP 0005-25 

Instructions, Lubrication ............................................................................................................. WP 0013-10 

Introduction to Repair Parts and Special Tools List (RPSTL) ...................................................... WP 0046-1 

Introduction, Maintenance Allocation Chart (MAC) ...................................................................... WP 0068-1 

Introduction, PMCS Procedures .................................................................................................. WP 0012-1 

K 

KCLFF MBU Kit ............................................................................................................................ WP 0005-6 

Kit, FSC MBU ............................................................................................................................... WP 0005-5 

Kit, KCLFF MBU ........................................................................................................................... WP 0005-6 

Kit, MFK MBU .............................................................................................................................. WP 0005-3 

Kit, MKT MBU .............................................................................................................................. WP 0005-4 

L 

List of Abbreviations/Acronyms .................................................................................................... WP 0001-6 

List of Effective Pages/Work Packages ........................................................................................................ A 

Location and Description of Major Components .......................................................................... WP 0002-2 

Low Fuel ..................................................................................................................................... WP 0005-23 

Lubrication Instructions .............................................................................................................. WP 0013-10 

Lubrication Service Intervals ...................................................................................................... WP 0013-10 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 

Index-4

Subject WP Sequence No.--Page No.

M 

MAC - Maintenance Allocation Chart ........................................................................................... WP 0069-1 

MAC Introduction ......................................................................................................................... WP 0068-1 

Maintenance Allocation Chart (MAC) ........................................................................................... WP 0069-1 

Maintenance Allocation Chart (MAC) Introduction ....................................................................... WP 0068-1 

Maintenance Forms Records and Reports .................................................................................. WP 0001-2 

Major Components, Location and Description of ......................................................................... WP 0002-2 

Malfunction Symptom Index, Operator ........................................................................................ WP 0007-1 

Mandatory Replacement Parts .................................................................................................. WP 0013-10 

Mandatory Replacement Parts List .............................................................................................. WP 0074-1 

Manual Fueling ........................................................................................................................... WP 0005-20 

Material, Quality of ....................................................................................................................... WP 0001-7 

Materiel, Destruction of, To Prevent Enemy Use ......................................................................... WP 0001-3 

MBU Controls and Indicators ....................................................................................................... WP 0004-1 

MBU Controls and Indicators (MBU) ............................................................................................ WP 0004-1 

MBU Controls and Indicators (MBU-V3) ...................................................................................... WP 0004-2 

MBU Fault Indicators .................................................................................................................. WP 0005-24 

MBU Frame, Field Maintenance .................................................................................................. WP 0036-1 

MBU Operating Procedures ....................................................................................................... WP 0005-16 

MBU Power Configuration for 110VAC Power Source ................................................................ WP 0003-4 

MBU Power Configuration for Vehicular or Battery-Supplied 24VDC Power .............................. WP 0003-5 

MBU-V3 Controls and Indicators ................................................................................................. WP 0004-2 

MFK MBU Kit ............................................................................................................................... WP 0005-3 

MKT Cooling Cabinet, Mounting the Power Converter ................................................................ WP 0005-8 

MKT Crossway Cable .................................................................................................................. WP 0005-7 

MKT MBU Kit ............................................................................................................................... WP 0005-4 

MKT, Connect Cables .................................................................................................................. WP 0005-9 

MKT, Connect Power Cables Using 110VAC Power ................................................................. WP 0005-11 

Models, Differences Between ...................................................................................................... WP 0002-2 

Mounting the Power Converter in the MKT Cooling Cabinet ....................................................... WP 0005-8 

Movement, Preparation for ......................................................................................................... WP 0005-29 

Multiservice Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and 

Nuclear.......................,.......................................................................................... WP 0006-2 

N 

National Stock Number Index ...................................................................................................... WP 0065-1 

NATO Adapter, Cable, Field Maintenance ................................................................................... WP 0045-1 

NATO Adapter, Cable, Operator Maintenance ............................................................................ WP 0032-1 

Nomenclature Cross-Reference List ............................................................................................ WP 0001-6 

Normal Shutdown ....................................................................................................................... WP 0005-22 

Nozzle, Fuel, Operator Maintenance ........................................................................................... WP 0022-1 

O 

Operating Procedures, Battery Pack ......................................................................................... WP 0005-28 

Operating Procedures, MBU ........................................................................................................ WP 0005-1 

Operation Under Unusual Conditions .......................................................................................... WP 0006-1 

Operation, Actions During ............................................................................................................ WP 0003-1 

Operation, Theory of .................................................................................................................... WP 0003-1 

Orifice, Vent Valve Assembly, Operator Maintenance ................................................................. WP 0023-4
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 

Index-5

Subject WP Sequence No.—Page No.

P 

Part Number Index ....................................................................................................................... WP 0066-1 

PMCS Procedures, Introduction .................................................................................................. WP 0012-1 

Power Cables, Connect Using Vehicular Power (22-29 VDC) Alone ........................................ WP 0005-12 

Power Cables, Connect With 110VAC Power ........................................................................... WP 0005-11

Power Cables, Connecting Using the Battery Pack Alone ........................................................ WP 0005-14 

Power Cables, Connecting Using Vehicular Power and Battery Pack ...................................... WP 0005-13 

Power Configuration for 110VAC Power Source ......................................................................... WP 0003-4 

Power Configuration for Vehicular or Battery Supplied 24VDC Power ....................................... WP 0003-5 

Power Converter Controls and Indicators .................................................................................... WP 0004-3 

Power Converter, Mounting the MKT Cooling Cabinet ................................................................ WP 0005-8 

Power Converter, Field Maintenance ........................................................................................... WP 0041-1 

Power Converter, Operator Maintenance .................................................................................... WP 0029-1 

Powered Fueling ........................................................................................................................ WP 0005-18 

Power-Up ..................................................................................................................................... WP 0003-1 

Power-Up Sequence .................................................................................................................. WP 0005-16 

Pre-Operational Check ............................................................................................................... WP 0005-15 

Preparation for Movement .......................................................................................................... WP 0005-29 

Preparation for Storage or Shipment ........................................................................................... WP 0001-4 

Preparation for Use ...................................................................................................................... WP 0005-1 

Q 

Quality of Material ........................................................................................................................ WP 0001-7 

R 

Rain/Wet Climate ......................................................................................................................... WP 0006-1 

Records and Reports ................................................................................................................... WP 0001-2 

References ................................................................................................................................... WP 0067-1 

Reflective Heat Shield Assembly and Burner Assembly, Operator Maintenance ....................... WP 0024-1 

Repair Parts and Special Tools List (RPSTL), Introduction to ..................................................... WP 0046-1 

Repair Parts List, Bulk Material .................................................................................................... WP 0063-1 

Replacement Parts, Mandatory ................................................................................................. WP 0013-10 

Reporting Equipment Improvement Recommendations (EIR) ..................................................... WP 0001-2 

Requirements, Siting ................................................................................................................... WP 0005-1 

RPSTL, Introduction to ................................................................................................................. WP 0046-1 

S 

Safety, Care and Handling ........................................................................................................... WP 0001-7 

Security Measures For Electronic Data ....................................................................................... WP 0005-1 

Security Measures For Electronic Data ....................................................................................... WP 0006-1 

Sequence, Power-Up ................................................................................................................. WP 0005-16 

Service ....................................................................................................................................... WP 0005-23 

Service Intervals, Lubrication ..................................................................................................... WP 0013-10 

Service Upon Receipt .................................................................................................................. WP 0035-1 

Shipment, Preparation for ............................................................................................................ WP 0001-4 

Shutdown, Automatic .................................................................................................................. WP 0003-1 

Shutdown, Automatic, System ................................................................................................... WP 0005-22 

Shutdown, Normal ....................................................................................................................... WP 0003-2 

Shutdown, Normal ..................................................................................................................... WP 0005-22 

Shutdown, System ..................................................................................................................... WP 0005-29 

Siting Requirements ..................................................................................................................... WP 0005-1 

Snow and Extreme Cold .............................................................................................................. WP 0006-2 
 TM 10-7310-281-13&P 

Index-6

Subject WP Sequence No.—Page No.

S – Continued 

Special Tools List ......................................................................................................................... WP 0064-1 

Start-Up ...................................................................................................................................... WP 0005-22 

Storage or Shipment, Preparation for .......................................................................................... WP 0001-4 

Supply, Electrical .......................................................................................................................... WP 0003-1 

Supply, Fuel ................................................................................................................................. WP 0003-1 

System Shutdown ...................................................................................................................... WP 0005-29 

T 

Tank, Fuel, Operator Maintenance .............................................................................................. WP 0014-1 

Temperature Adjustment, Burner Control .................................................................................. WP 0005-22 

Theory of Operation ..................................................................................................................... WP 0003-1 

Troubleshooting Procedures, Operator ........................................................................................ WP 0009-1 

U 

Unusual Environment/Weather .................................................................................................... WP 0006-1 

V 

Vent Valve Assembly Orifice, Operator Maintenance .................................................................. WP 0023-4

Vent Valve Assembly, Operator Maintenance ............................................................................. WP 0023-1 

Voltage ....................................................................................................................................... WP 0005-23 

W 

Warning Summary ........................................................................................................................................ a 

Weather Conditions ...................................................................................................................... WP 0006-1 

Wet Climate .................................................................................................................................. WP 0006-1 
These are the instructions for sending an electronic 2028 

The following format must be used if submitting an electronic 2028. The subject 

line must be exactly the same and all fields must be included; however only the 

following fields are mandatory: 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 13, 15, 16, 17, and 27. 

From: "Whomever" <whomever@avma27.army.mil> 

To: TACOMLCMC.DAForm2028@us.army.mil 

Subject: DA Form 2028 

1. From: Joe Smith 

2. Unit: home 

3. Address: 4300 Park 

4. City: Hometown 

5. St: MO 

6. Zip: 77777 

7. Date Sent: 19-OCT-09 

8. Pub no: TM 10-5411-239-13&P 

9. Pub Title: TM 

10. Publication Date: 01-JUL-09 

11. Change Number: 7 

12. Submitter Rank: MSG 

13. Submitter FName: Joe 

14. Submitter MName: T 

15. Submitter LName: Smith 

16. Submitter Phone: 123-123-1234 

17. Problem: 1 

18. Page: 2 

19. Paragraph: 3 

20. Line: 4 

21. NSN: 5 

22. Reference: 6 

23. Figure: 7 

24. Table: 8 

25. Item: 9 

26. Total: 123 

27. Text: 

This is the text for the problem below line 27.

RECOMMENDED CHANGES TO PUBLICATIONS AND 

BLANK FORMS 

For use of this form, see AR 25-30; the proponent agency is ODISC4.

Use Part II (reverse) for Repair Parts and Special Tool 

Lists (RPSTL) and Supply Catalogs/Supply Manuals 

(SC/SM).

DATE 

21 October 2009

TO: (Forward to proponent of publication or form) (Include ZIP Code) 

COMMAND 

TACOM LIFE CYCLE MANAGEMENT COMMAND 

ATTN: AMSTA-LCL-MPP/TECH PUBS 

1 Rock Island Arsenal 

Rock Island, IL 61299-7630

FROM: (Activity and location) (Include ZIP Code)

PFC Jane Doe 

CO A 3rd Engineer BR 

Ft. Leonardwood, MO 63108

PART I – ALL PUBLICATIONS (EXCEPT RPSTL AND SC/SM) AND BLANK FORMS

PUBLICATION/FORM NUMBER 

TM 10-5411-239-13&P 

DATE 

12 December 2008 

TITLE

Unit Manual for Ancillary Equipment for Low Velocity Air 

Drop Systems

ITEM 

NO.

PAGE 

NO.

PARAGRAPHLINE 

NO. *

FIGURE 

NO.

TABLE 

NO.

RECOMMENDED CHANGES AND REASON 

(Provide exact wording of recommended changes, if possible).

0036 00-2 1 In table 1, Sewing Machine Code Symbols, the second 

sewing machine code symbol should be MD ZZ not 

MD22.

Change the manual to show Sewing Machine, 

Industrial: Zig-Zag; 308 stitch; medium-duty; NSN 3530-

01-181-1421as a MD ZZ code symbol.

*Reference to line numbers within the paragraph or subparagraph.

TYPED NAME, GRADE OR TITLE

Jane Doe, PFC

TELEPHONE EXCHANGE/AUTOVON, PLUS

EXTENSION 

508-233-4141

SIGNATURE

Jane Doe Jane Doe

DA FORM 2028, FEB 74 REPLACES DA FORM 2028, 1 DEC 68, WHICH WILL BE USED. USAPPC V3.00
TO: (Forward direct to addressee listed in publication) 

COMMAND 

TACOM LIFE CYCLE MANAGEMENT COMMAND 

ATTN: AMSTA-LCL-MPP/TECH PUBS 

1 Rock Island Arsenal 

Rock Island, IL 61299-7630

FROM: (Activity and location) (Include ZIP Code)

PFC Jane Doe 

CO A 3rd Engineer BR 

Ft. Leonardwood, MO 63108

DATE

21 October 2009

PART II – REPAIR PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOL LISTS AND SUPPLY CATALOGS/SUPPLY MANUALS

PUBLICATION NUMBER 

TM 10-5411-239-13&P

DATE

12 December 2008

TITLE 

Unit Manual for Ancillary Equipment for Low 

Velocity Air Drop Systems

PAGE NO. COLM 

NO.

LINE 

NO.

NATIONAL 

STOCK 

NUMBER

REFERENCE 

NO.

FIGURE 

NO.

ITEM 

NO.

TOTAL NO.

OF MAJOR 

ITEMS 

SUPPORTED

RECOMMENDED ACTION

0066 00-1 4 Callout 16 in figure 4 is pointed 

to a D-Ring. In the Repair Parts 

List key for figure 4, item 16 is 

called a Snap Hook. Please 

correct one or the other.

PART III – REMARKS (Any general remarks or recommendations, or suggestions for improvement of publications and 

blank forms. Additional blank sheets may be used if more space is needed.)

TYPED NAME, GRADE OR TITLE 

Jane Doe, PFC

TELEPHONE EXCHANGE/AUTOVON, PLUS 

EXTENSION 

508-233-4141

SIGNATURE

Jane Doe Jane Doe

UASPPC V3.00
RECOMMENDED CHANGES TO PUBLICATIONS AND 

BLANK FORMS 

For use of this form, see AR 25-30; the proponent agency is ODISC4.

Use Part II (reverse) for Repair Parts and Special Tool 

Lists (RPSTL) and Supply Catalogs/Supply Manuals 

(SC/SM). 

DATE 

TO: (Forward to proponent of publication or form) (Include ZIP Code) 

US ARMY TACOM LIFE CYCLE MANAGEMENT COMMAND 

ATTN: AMSTA-LCL-MPP/TECHPUBS 

1 Rock Island Arsenal 

ROCK ISLAND, IL 61299-7360 

FROM: (Activity and location) (Include ZIP Code)

PART I – ALL PUBLICATIONS (EXCEPT RPSTL AND SC/SM) AND BLANK FORMS 

PUBLICATION/FORM NUMBER 

TM 10-7310-281-13&P

DATE 

17 MAY 2010

TITLE 

Operator and Field Maintenance Manual Including Repair Parts and 

Special Tools List for Modern Burner Unit (MBU) 

ITEM 

NO. 

PAGE 

NO. 

PARAGRAPH LINE 

NO. * 

FIGURE 

NO. 

TABLE 

NO. 

RECOMMENDED CHANGES AND REASON 

(Provide exact wording of recommended changes, if possible). 

 

*Reference to line numbers within the paragraph or subparagraph. 

TYPED NAME, GRADE OR TITLE TELEPHONE EXCHANGE/AUTOVON, PLUS 

EXTENSION 

SIGNATURE 

DA FORM 2028, FEB 74 REPLACES DA FORM 2028, 1 DEC 68, WHICH WILL BE USED. USAPPC V3.00 
TO: (Forward to proponent of publication or form) (Include ZIP Code) 

US ARMY TACOM LIFE CYCLE MANAGEMENT COMMAND 

ATTN: AMSTA-LCL-MPP/TECHPUBS 

1 Rock Island Arsenal 

ROCK ISLAND, IL 61299-7360 

FROM: (Activity and location) (Include ZIP Code) DATE 

PART II – REPAIR PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOL LISTS AND SUPPLY CATALOGS/SUPPLY MANUALS 

PUBLICATION NUMBER 

TM 10-7310-281-13&P

DATE 

17 MAY 2010 

TITLE 

Operator and Field Maintenance Manual Including Repair 

Parts and Special Tools List for Modern Burner Unit (MBU) 

PAGE 

NO. 

COLM 

NO. 

LINE 

NO. 

NATIONAL STOCK 

NUMBER 

REFERENCE NO. FIGURE 

NO. 

ITEM 

NO. 

TOTAL NO. 

OF MAJOR 

ITEMS 

SUPPORTED 

RECOMMENDED ACTION 

 

 PART III – REMARKS (Any general remarks or recommendations, or suggestions for improvement of publications and blank 

forms. Additional blank sheets may be used if more space is needed.)

TYPED NAME, GRADE OR TITLE TELEPHONE EXCHANGE/AUTOVON, PLUS EXTENSION SIGNATURE 

USAPPC V3.00 
RECOMMENDED CHANGES TO PUBLICATIONS AND 

BLANK FORMS 

For use of this form, see AR 25-30; the proponent agency is ODISC4.

Use Part II (reverse) for Repair Parts and Special Tool 

Lists (RPSTL) and Supply Catalogs/Supply Manuals 

(SC/SM). 

DATE 

TO: (Forward to proponent of publication or form) (Include ZIP Code) 

US ARMY TACOM LIFE CYCLE MANAGEMENT COMMAND 

ATTN: AMSTA-LCL-MPP/TECHPUBS 

1 Rock Island Arsenal 

ROCK ISLAND, IL 61299-7360 

FROM: (Activity and location) (Include ZIP Code)

PART I – ALL PUBLICATIONS (EXCEPT RPSTL AND SC/SM) AND BLANK FORMS 

PUBLICATION/FORM NUMBER 

TM 10-7310-281-13&P

DATE 

17 MAY 2010

TITLE 

Operator and Field Maintenance Manual Including Repair Parts and 

Special Tools List for Modern Burner Unit (MBU) 

ITEM 

NO. 

PAGE 

NO. 

PARAGRAPH LINE 

NO. * 

FIGURE 

NO. 

TABLE 

NO. 

RECOMMENDED CHANGES AND REASON 

(Provide exact wording of recommended changes, if possible). 

 

*Reference to line numbers within the paragraph or subparagraph. 

TYPED NAME, GRADE OR TITLE TELEPHONE EXCHANGE/AUTOVON, PLUS 

EXTENSION 

SIGNATURE 

DA FORM 2028, FEB 74 REPLACES DA FORM 2028, 1 DEC 68, WHICH WILL BE USED. USAPPC V3.00 
TO: (Forward to proponent of publication or form) (Include ZIP Code) 

US ARMY TACOM LIFE CYCLE MANAGEMENT COMMAND 

ATTN: AMSTA-LCL-MPP/TECHPUBS 

1 Rock Island Arsenal 

ROCK ISLAND, IL 61299-7360 

FROM: (Activity and location) (Include ZIP Code) DATE 

PART II – REPAIR PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOL LISTS AND SUPPLY CATALOGS/SUPPLY MANUALS 

PUBLICATION NUMBER 

TM 10-7310-281-13&P

DATE 

17 MAY 2010 

TITLE 

Operator and Field Maintenance Manual Including Repair 

Parts and Special Tools List for Modern Burner Unit (MBU) 

PAGE 

NO. 

COLM 

NO. 

LINE 

NO. 

NATIONAL STOCK 

NUMBER 

REFERENCE NO. FIGURE 

NO. 

ITEM 

NO. 

TOTAL NO. 

OF MAJOR 

ITEMS 

SUPPORTED 

RECOMMENDED ACTION 

 

 PART III – REMARKS (Any general remarks or recommendations, or suggestions for improvement of publications and blank 

forms. Additional blank sheets may be used if more space is needed.)

TYPED NAME, GRADE OR TITLE TELEPHONE EXCHANGE/AUTOVON, PLUS EXTENSION SIGNATURE 

USAPPC V3.00 
RECOMMENDED CHANGES TO PUBLICATIONS AND 

BLANK FORMS 

For use of this form, see AR 25-30; the proponent agency is ODISC4.

Use Part II (reverse) for Repair Parts and Special Tool 

Lists (RPSTL) and Supply Catalogs/Supply Manuals 

(SC/SM). 

DATE 

TO: (Forward to proponent of publication or form) (Include ZIP Code) 

US ARMY TACOM LIFE CYCLE MANAGEMENT COMMAND 

ATTN: AMSTA-LCL-MPP/TECHPUBS 

1 Rock Island Arsenal 

ROCK ISLAND, IL 61299-7360 

FROM: (Activity and location) (Include ZIP Code)

PART I – ALL PUBLICATIONS (EXCEPT RPSTL AND SC/SM) AND BLANK FORMS 

PUBLICATION/FORM NUMBER 

TM 10-7310-281-13&P

DATE 

17 MAY 2010

TITLE 

Operator and Field Maintenance Manual Including Repair Parts and 

Special Tools List for Modern Burner Unit (MBU) 

ITEM 

NO. 

PAGE 

NO. 

PARAGRAPH LINE 

NO. * 

FIGURE 

NO. 

TABLE 

NO. 

RECOMMENDED CHANGES AND REASON 

(Provide exact wording of recommended changes, if possible). 

 

*Reference to line numbers within the paragraph or subparagraph. 

TYPED NAME, GRADE OR TITLE TELEPHONE EXCHANGE/AUTOVON, PLUS 

EXTENSION 

SIGNATURE 

DA FORM 2028, FEB 74 REPLACES DA FORM 2028, 1 DEC 68, WHICH WILL BE USED. USAPPC V3.00 
TO: (Forward to proponent of publication or form) (Include ZIP Code) 

US ARMY TACOM LIFE CYCLE MANAGEMENT COMMAND 

ATTN: AMSTA-LCL-MPP/TECHPUBS 

1 Rock Island Arsenal 

ROCK ISLAND, IL 61299-7360 

FROM: (Activity and location) (Include ZIP Code) DATE 

PART II – REPAIR PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOL LISTS AND SUPPLY CATALOGS/SUPPLY MANUALS 

PUBLICATION NUMBER 

TM 10-7310-281-13&P

DATE 

17 MAY 2010 

TITLE 

Operator and Field Maintenance Manual Including Repair 

Parts and Special Tools List for Modern Burner Unit (MBU) 

PAGE 

NO. 

COLM 

NO. 

LINE 

NO. 

NATIONAL STOCK 

NUMBER 

REFERENCE NO. FIGURE 

NO. 

ITEM 

NO. 

TOTAL NO. 

OF MAJOR 

ITEMS 

SUPPORTED 

RECOMMENDED ACTION 

 

 PART III – REMARKS (Any general remarks or recommendations, or suggestions for improvement of publications and blank 

forms. Additional blank sheets may be used if more space is needed.)

TYPED NAME, GRADE OR TITLE TELEPHONE EXCHANGE/AUTOVON, PLUS EXTENSION SIGNATURE 

USAPPC V3.00 
TM 10-7310-281-13&P 

By Order of the Secretary of the Army: 

 GEORGE W. CASEY, JR. 

General, United States Army 

 Chief of Staff 

Official: 

 

 JOYCE E. MORROW 

 Administrative Assistant to the 

 Secretary of the Army 

 1013105 

DISTRIBUTION: 

To be distributed in accordance with initial distribution number (IDN) 256531 requirements for TM 10-7310-281-

13&P.

The Metric System and Equivalents 

 Linear Measure Liquid Measure 

1 centimeter = 10 millimeters = .39 inch 1 centiliter = 10 milliliters = .34 fl. ounce 

1 decimeter = 10 centimeters = 3.94 inches 1 deciliter = 10 centiliters = 3.38 fl. ounces 

1 meter = 10 decimeters = 39.37 inches 1 liter = 10 deciliters = 33.81 fl. ounces 

1 dekameter = 10 meters = 3 2.8 feet 1 dekaliter = 10 liters = 2.64 gallons 

1 hectometer = 10 dekameters = 328.08 feet 1 hectoliter = 10 dekaliters = 26.42 gallons 

1 kilometer = 10 hectometers = 3,280.8 feet 1 kiloliter = 10 hectoliters = 264.18 gallons 

 

 Weights Square Measure 

1 centigram = 10 milligrams = .15 grain 1 sq. centimeter = 100 sq. millimeters = .15 5 sq. inch 

1 decigrarn = 10 centigrams = 1.54 grains 1 sq. decimeter =100 sq. centimeters = 15.5 sq. inches 

1 gram = 10 decigrams = .035 ounce 1 sq. meter (centare) = 100 sq. decimeters = 10.76 sq. feet 

1 dekagrarn = 10 grams = .35 ounce 1 sq. dekameter (are) = 100 sq. meters = 1,076.4 sq. feet 

1 hectogram = 10 dekagrams = 3.52 ounces 1 sq. hectometer (hectare) = 100 sq. dekameters = 2.47 acres 

1 kilogram = 10 hectograms = 2.2 pounds 1 sq. kilometer = 100 sq. hectometers = .386 sq. mile 

1 quintal = 100 kilograms = 220.46 pounds 

1 metric ton = 10 quintals = 1.1 short tons Cubic Measure

 1 cu. centimeter = 1000 cu. millimeters = .06 cu. inch 

 1 cu. decimeter = 1000 cu. centimeters = 61.02 cu. inches 

 1 cu. meter = 1000 cu. decimeters = 35.31 feet 

Approximate Conversion Factors 

 To change To Multiply by To change To Multiply by 

inches centimeters 2.540 ounce-inches newton-meters .007062 

feet meters .305 centimeters inches .394 

yards meters .914 meters feet 3.280 

miles kilometers 1.609 meters yards 1.094 

square inches square centimeters 6.451 kilometers miles .621 

square feet square meters .093 square centimeters square inches .155 

square yards square meters .836 square meters square feet 10.764 

square miles square kilometers 2.590 square meters square yards 1.196 

acres square hectometers .405 square kilometers square miles .386 

cubic feet cubic meters .028 square hectometers acres 2.471 

cubic yards cubic meters .765 cubic meters cubic feet 35.315 

fluid ounces milliliters 29.573 cubic meters cubic yards 1.308 

pints Iiters .473 milliliters fluid ounces .034 

quarts Iiters .946 liters pints 2.113 

gallons Iiters 3.785 liters quarts 1.057 

ounces grams 28.349 liters gallons .264 

pounds kilograms .454 grams ounces .035 

short tons metric tons .907 kilograms pounds 2.205 

pound-feet newton-meters 1.356 metric tons short tons 1.102 

pound-inches newton-meters .11296 

Temperature (Exact) 

_F Fahrenheit 5/9 (after Celsius _C 

 temperature subtracting 32) temperature 
PIN: 077378-000